diff options
Diffstat (limited to '21730.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 21730.txt | 10937 |
1 files changed, 10937 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/21730.txt b/21730.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b5fe3f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/21730.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10937 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Erling the Bold, by R.M. Ballantyne + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Erling the Bold + +Author: R.M. Ballantyne + +Release Date: June 7, 2007 [EBook #21730] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ERLING THE BOLD *** + + + + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + + + + +ERLING THE BOLD, BY R.M. BALLANTYNE. + + + +CHAPTER ONE. + +IN WHICH THE TALE BEGINS SOMEWHAT FURIOUSLY. + +By the early light of a bright summer morning, long, long ago, two small +boats were seen to issue from one of the fiords or firths on the west +coast of Norway, and row towards the skerries or low rocky islets that +lay about a mile distant from the mainland. + +Although the morning was young, the sun was already high in the heavens, +and brought out in glowing colours the varied characteristics of a +mountain scene of unrivalled grandeur. + +The two shallops moved swiftly towards the islands, their oars shivering +the liquid mirror of the sea, and producing almost the only sound that +disturbed the universal stillness, for at that early hour Nature herself +seemed buried in deep repose. A silvery mist hung over the water, +through which the innumerable rocks and islands assumed fantastic +shapes, and the more distant among them appeared as though they floated +in air. A few seagulls rose startled from their nests, and sailed +upwards with plaintive cries, as the keels of the boats grated on the +rocks, and the men stepped out and hauled them up on the beach of one of +the islets. + +A wild uncouth crew were those Norsemen of old! All were armed, for in +their days the power and the means of self-defence were absolutely +necessary to self-preservation. + +Most of them wore portions of scale armour, or shirts of ring mail, and +headpieces of steel, though a few among them appeared to have confidence +in the protection afforded by the thick hide of the wolf, which, +converted into rude, yet not ungraceful, garments, covered their broad +shoulders. All, without exception, carried sword or battle-axe and +shield. They were goodly stalwart men every one, but silent and stern. + +It might have been observed that the two boats, although bound for the +same islet, did not row in company. They were beached as far from each +other as the little bay into which they ran would admit of, and the +crews stood aloof in two distinct groups. + +In the centre of each group stood a man who, from his aspect and +bearing, appeared to be superior to his fellows. One was in the prime +of life, dark and grave; the other in the first flush of manhood, full +grown, though beardless, fair, and ruddy. Both were taller and stouter +than their comrades. + +The two men had met there to fight, and the cause of their feud was-- +Love! + +Both loved a fair Norse maiden in Horlingdal. The father of the maid +favoured the elder warrior; the maid herself preferred the younger. + +In those days, barbarous though they undoubtedly were, law and justice +were more respected and more frequently appealed to in Norway than in +almost any other country. Liberty, crushed elsewhere under the +deadweight of feudalism, found a home in the bleak North, and a rough +but loving welcome from the piratical, sea-roving! She did not, indeed, +dwell altogether scathless among her demi-savage guardians, who, if +their perceptions of right and wrong were somewhat confused, might have +urged in excuse that their light was small. She received many shocks +and frequent insults from individuals, but liberty was sincerely loved +and fondly cherished by the body of the Norwegian people, through all +the period of those dark ages during which other nations scarce dared to +mention her name. + +Nevertheless, it was sometimes deemed more convenient to settle disputes +by the summary method of an appeal to arms than to await the issue of a +tedious and uncertain lawsuit such an appeal being perfectly competent +to those who preferred it, and the belief being strong among the fiery +spirits of the age that Odin, the god of war, would assuredly give +victory to the right. + +In the present instance it was not considered any infringement of the +law of liberty that the issue of the combat would be the disposal of a +fair woman's hand, with or without her heart. Then, as now, women were +often forced to marry against their will. + +Having gone to that island to fight--an island being a naturally +circumscribed battlefield whose limits could not conveniently be +transgressed--the two champions set to work at once with the cool +businesslike promptitude of men sprung from a warlike race, and nurtured +from their birth in the midst of war's alarms. + +Together, and without speaking, they ascended the rock, which was low +and almost barren, with a small extent of turf in the centre, level, and +admirably suited to their purpose. Here they faced each other; the one +drew his sword, the other raised his battle-axe. + +There was no sentiment in that combat. The times and the men were +extremely matter-of-fact. The act of slaying gracefully had not yet +been acquired; yet there was much of manly grace displayed as each threw +himself into the position that nature and experience had taught him was +best suited to the wielding of his peculiar weapon. + +For one instant each gazed intently into the face of the other, as if to +read there his premeditated plan of attack. At that moment the clear +blue eye of the younger man dilated, and, as his courage rose, the +colour mounted to his cheek. The swart brow of the other darkened as he +marked the change; then, with sudden spring and shout, the two fell upon +each other and dealt their blows with incredible vigour and rapidity. + +They were a well-matched pair. For nearly two hours did they toil and +moil over the narrow limits of that sea-girt rock--yet victory leaned to +neither side. Now the furious blows rained incessant on the sounding +shields; anon the din of strife ceased, while the combatants moved round +each other, shifting their position with elastic step, as, with wary +motion and eagle glances, each sought to catch the other off his guard, +and the clash of steel, as the weapons met in sudden onset, was mingled +with the shout of anger or defiance. The sun glanced on whirling blade +and axe, and sparkled on their coats of mail as if the lightning flash +were playing round them; while screaming seamews flew and circled +overhead, as though they regarded with intelligent interest and terror +the mortal strife that was going on below. + +Blood ere long began to flow freely on both sides; the vigour of the +blows began to abate, the steps to falter. The youthful cheek grew +pale; the dark warrior's brow grew darker, while heaving chests, +labouring breath, and an occasional gasp, betokened the approaching +termination of the struggle. Suddenly the youth, as if under the +influence of a new impulse, dropped his shield, sprang forward, raised +himself to his full height, grasped his axe with both hands, and, +throwing it aloft (thus recklessly exposing his person), brought it down +with terrific violence on the shield of his adversary. + +The action was so sudden that the other, already much exhausted, was for +the moment paralysed, and failed to take advantage of his opportunity. +He met but failed to arrest the blow with his shield. It was crushed +down upon his head, and in another moment the swarthy warrior lay +stretched upon the turf. + +Sternly the men conveyed their fallen chief to his boat, and rowed him +to the mainland, and many a week passed by ere he recovered from the +effects of the blow that felled him. His conqueror returned to have his +wounds dressed by the bride for whom he had fought so long and so +valiantly on that bright summer morning. + +Thus it was that King Haldor of Horlingdal, surnamed the Fierce, +conquered King Ulf of Romsdal, acquired his distinctive appellation, and +won Herfrida the Soft-eyed for his bride. + +It must not be supposed that these warriors were kings in the ordinary +acceptation of that term. They belonged to the class of "small" or +petty kings, of whom there were great numbers in Norway in those days, +and were merely rich and powerful free-landholders or udallers. + +Haldor the Fierce had a large family of sons and daughters. They were +all fair, strong, and extremely handsome, like himself. + +Ulf of Romsdal did not die of his wounds, neither did he die of love. +Disappointed love was then, as now, a terrible disease, but not +necessarily fatal. Northmen were very sturdy in the olden time. They +almost always recovered from that disease sooner or later. When his +wounds were healed, Ulf married a fair girl of the Horlingdal district, +and went to reside there, but his change of abode did not alter his +title. He was always spoken of as Ulf of Romsdal. He and his old enemy +Haldor the Fierce speedily became fast friends; and so was it with their +wives, Astrid and Herfrida, who also took mightily to each other. They +span, and carded wool, and sewed together oftentimes, and discussed the +affairs of Horlingdal, no doubt with mutual advantage and satisfaction. + +Twenty years passed away, and Haldor's eldest son, Erling, grew to be a +man. He was very like his father--almost a giant in size; fair, very +strong, and remarkably handsome. His silken yellow hair fell in heavy +curls on a pair of the broadest shoulders in the dale. Although so +young, he already had a thick short beard, which was very soft and +curly. His limbs were massive, but they were so well proportioned, and +his movements so lithe, that his great size and strength were not fully +appreciated until one stood close by his side or fell into his powerful +grasp. + +Erling was lion-like, yet he was by nature gentle and retiring. He had +a kindly smile, a hearty laugh, and bright blue eyes. Had he lived in +modern days he would undoubtedly have been a man of peace. But he lived +"long long ago"--therefore he was a man of war. Being unusually +fearless, his companions of the valley called him Erling the Bold. He +was, moreover, extremely fond of the sea, and often went on viking +cruises in his own ships, whence he was also styled Erling the Sea-king, +although he did not at that time possess a foot of land over which to +exercise kingly authority. + +Now, it must be explained here that the words Sea-king and Viking do not +denote the same thing. One is apt to be misled by the termination of +the latter word, which has no reference whatever to the royal title +king. A viking was merely a piratical rover on the sea, the sea-warrior +of the period, but a Sea-king was a leader and commander of vikings. +Every Sea-king was a viking, but every viking was not a Sea-king; just +as every Admiral is a sailor, but every sailor is not an Admiral. When +it is said that Erling was a Sea-king, it is much as if we had said he +was an admiral in a small way. + + + +CHAPTER TWO. + +INTRODUCES, AMONG OTHERS, THE HERO AND HEROINE, AND OPENS UP A VIEW OF +NORSE LIFE IN THE OLDEN TIME. + +Ulf of Romsdal had a daughter named Hilda. She was fair, and extremely +pretty. + +The young men said that her brow was the habitation of the lily, her eye +the mirror of the heavens, her cheek the dwelling-place of the rose. +True, in the ardour of their feelings and strength of their imaginations +they used strong language; nevertheless it was impossible to overpraise +the Norse maiden. Her nut-brown hair fell in luxuriant masses over her +shapely shoulders, reaching far below the waist; her skin was fair, and +her manners engaging. Hilda was undoubtedly blue-eyed and beautiful. +She was just seventeen at this time. Those who loved her (and there +were few who did not) styled her the sunbeam. + +Erling and Hilda had dwelt near each other from infancy. They had been +playmates, and for many years were as brother and sister to each other. +Erling's affection had gradually grown into a stronger passion, but he +never mentioned the fact to anyone, being exceedingly shamefaced and shy +in regard to love. He would have given his ears to have known that his +love was returned, but he dared not to ask. He was very stupid on this +point. In regard to other things he was sharp-witted above his fellows. +None knew better than he how to guide the "warship" through the +intricate mazes of the island-studded coast of Norway; none equalled him +in deeds of arms; no one excelled him in speed of foot, in scaling the +fells, or in tracking the wolf and bear to their dens; but all beat him +in love-making! He was wondrously slow and obtuse at that, and could by +no means discover whether or not Hilda regarded him as a lover or a +brother. As uncertainty on this point continued, Erling became jealous +of all the young men who approached her, and in proportion as this +feeling increased his natural disposition changed, and his chafing +spirit struggled fiercely within him. But his native good sense and +modesty enabled him pretty well to conceal his feelings. As for Hilda, +no one knew the state of her mind. It is probable that at this time she +herself had not a very distinct idea on the point. + +Hilda had a foster-sister named Ada, who was also very beautiful. She +was unusually dark for a Norse maiden. Her akin indeed was fair, but +her hair and eyes were black like the raven's wing. Her father was King +Hakon of Drontheim. + +It was the custom in those warlike days for parents to send out some of +their children to be fostered by others--in order, no doubt, to render +next to impossible the total extirpation of their families at a time +when sudden descents upon households were common. By thus scattering +their children the chances of family annihilation were lessened, and the +probability that some members might be left alive to take revenge was +greatly increased. + +Hilda and Ada were warmly attached. Having been brought up together, +they loved each other as sisters--all the more, perhaps, that in +character they were somewhat opposed. Hilda was grave, thoughtful, +almost pensive. Ada was full of vivacity and mirth, fond of fun, and by +no means averse to a little of what she styled harmless mischief. + +Now there was a man in Horlingdal called Glumm, surnamed the Gruff, who +loved Ada fervently. He was a stout, handsome man, of ruddy complexion, +and second only to Erling in personal strength and prowess. But by +nature he was morose and gloomy. Nothing worse, however, could be said +of him. In other respects he was esteemed a brave, excellent man. +Glumm was too proud to show his love to Ada very plainly; but she had +wit enough to discover it, though no one else did, and she resolved to +punish him for his pride by keeping him in suspense. + +Horlingdal, where Ulf and Haldor and their families dwelt was, like +nearly all the vales on the west of Norway, hemmed in by steep mountains +of great height, which were covered with dark pines and birch trees. To +the level pastures high up on mountain tops the inhabitants were wont to +send their cattle to feed in summer--the small crops of hay in the +valleys being carefully gathered and housed for winter use. + +Every morning, before the birds began to twitter, Hilda set out, with +her pail and her wooden box, to climb the mountain to the upland dairy +or "saeter", and fetch the milk and butter required by the family during +the day. Although the maid was of noble birth--Ulf claiming descent +from one of those who are said to have come over with Odin and his +twelve godars or priests from Asia--this was not deemed an inappropriate +occupation. Among the Norsemen labour was the lot of high and low. He +was esteemed the best man who could fight most valiantly in battle and +labour most actively in the field or with the tools of the smith and +carpenter. Ulf of Romsdal, although styled king in virtue of his +descent, was not too proud, in the busy summertime, to throw off his +coat and toss the hay in his own fields in the midst of his thralls +[slaves taken in war] and house-carles. Neither he, nor Haldor, nor any +of the small kings, although they were the chief men of the districts in +which they resided, thought it beneath their dignity to forge their own +spearheads and anchors, or to mend their own doors. As it was with the +men, so was it with the women. Hilda the Sunbeam was not despised +because she climbed the mountainside to fetch milk and butter for the +family. + +One morning, in returning from the fell, Hilda heard the loud clatter of +the anvil at Haldorstede. Having learned that morning that Danish +vikings had been seen prowling among the islands near the fiord, she +turned aside to enquire the news. + +Haldorstede lay about a mile up the valley, and Hilda passed it every +morning on her way to and from the saeter. Ulfstede lay near the shore +of the fiord. Turning into the smithy, she found Erling busily engaged +in hammering a huge mass of stubborn red-hot metal. So intent was the +young man on his occupation that he failed to observe the entrance of +his fair visitor, who set down her milk pail, and stood for a few +minutes with her hands folded and her eyes fixed demurely on her lover. + +Erling had thrown off his jerkin and rolled up the sleeves of his shirt +of coarse homespun fabric, in order to give his thick muscular arms +unimpeded play in wielding the hammer and turning the mass of glowing +metal on the anvil. He wore woollen breeches and hose, both of which +had been fashioned by the fingers of his buxom mother, Herfrida. A pair +of neatly formed shoes of untanned hide--his own workmanship--protected +his feet, and his waist was encircled by a broad leathern girdle, from +one side of which depended a short hunting-knife, and from the other a +flap, with a slit in it, to support his sword. The latter weapon--a +heavy double-edged blade--stood leaning against the forge chimney, along +with a huge battle-axe, within reach of his hand. The collar of his +shirt was thrown well back, exposing to view a neck and chest whose +muscles denoted extraordinary power, and the whiteness of which +contrasted strikingly with the ruddy hue of his deeply bronzed +countenance. + +The young giant appeared to take pleasure in the exercise of his +superabundant strength, for, instead of using the ordinary single-hand +hammer with which other men were wont to bend the glowing metal to their +will, he wielded the great forehammer, and did it as easily, too, with +his right arm as if it had been but a wooden mallet. The mass of metal +at which he wrought was thick and unyielding, but under his heavy blows +it began to assume the form of an axe--a fact which Hilda noticed with a +somewhat saddened brow. Erling's long hair, rolling as it did down his +shoulders, frequently straggled over his face and interfered slightly +with his vision, whereupon he shook it back with an impatient toss, as a +lion might shake his mane, while he toiled with violent energy at his +work. To look at him, one might suppose that Vulcan himself had +condescended to visit the abodes of men, and work in a terrestrial +smithy! + +During one of the tosses with which he threw back his hair, Erling +chanced to raise his eyes, which instantly fell upon Hilda. A glad +smile beamed on his flushed face, and he let the hammer fall with a +ringing clatter on the anvil, exclaiming: + +"Ha! good morrow to thee, Hilda! Thou comest with stealthy tread, like +the midnight marauder. What news? Does all go well at Ulfstede? But +why so sad, Hilda? Thy countenance is not wont to quarrel with the +mountain air." + +"Truly, no!" replied the girl, smiling, "mountain air likes me well. If +my looks are sadder than usual, it is because of the form of the weapon +thou art fashioning." + +"The weapon!" exclaimed Erling, as he raised the handle of the hammer, +and, resting his arms on it, gazed at his visitor in some surprise. "It +is but an axe--a simple axe, perchance a trifle heavier than other axes +because it suits my arm better, and I have a weakness that way. What +ails thee at a battle-axe, Hilda?" + +"I quarrel not with the axe, Erling, but it reminds me of thy love of +fighting, and I grieve for that. Why art thou so fond of war?" + +"Fond of war!" echoed the youth. "Now, out upon thee, Hilda! what were +a man fit for if he could not fight?" + +"Nay, I question not thine ability to fight, but I grieve to see thy +love for fighting." + +"Truly there seems to me a close relationship between the love of war +and the ability to fight," returned the youth. "But to be plain with +thee: I _do not_ love war so much as ye think. Yet I utter this in +thine ear, for I would not that the blades of the valley knew it, lest +they might presume upon it, and I should have to prove my ability-- +despite my want of love--upon some of their carcasses." + +"I wish there were no such thing as war," said Hilda with a sigh. + +Erling knitted his brows and gazed into the smithy fire as if he were +engaged in pondering some knotty point. "Well, I'm not sure," said he +slowly, and descending to a graver tone of address--"I'm not sure that I +can go quite so far as that. If we had no war at all, perchance our +swords might rust, and our skill, for want of practice, might fail us in +the hour of need. Besides, how could men in that case hope to dwell +with Odin in Valhalla's bright and merry halls? But I agree with thee +in wishing that we had less of war and more of peace _at home_." + +"I fear," said Hilda, "we seem likely to have more of war and less of +peace than usual, if rumours be true. Have you heard that Danish +vikings have been seen among the islands?" + +"Aye, truly, I have heard of them, and it is that which has sent me to +the smithy this morning to hasten forward my battle-axe; for I love not +too light a weapon. You see, Hilda, when it has not weight one must +sometimes repeat the blow; especially if the mail be strong. But with a +heavy axe and a stout arm there is no need for that. I had begun this +weapon," continued the youth, as if he were musing aloud rather than +speaking to his companion, "with intent to try its metal on the head of +the King; but I fear me it will be necessary to use it in cracking a +viking's headpiece before it cleaves a royal crown." + +"The King!" exclaimed Hilda, with a look of surprise, not unmingled with +terror, "Erling, has ambition led thee to this?" + +"Not so; but self-preservation urges me to it." + +The maiden paused a few seconds, ere she replied in a meditative +voice--"The old man who came among us a year ago, and who calls himself +Christian, tells me that his god is not a god of war, like Odin; he says +that his god permits no war to men, save that of self-defence; but, +Erling, would slaying the King be indeed an act of self-preservation?" + +"Aye, in good sooth would it," replied the youth quickly, while a dark +frown crossed his brow. + +"How can that be?" asked the maiden. + +"Hast such small love for gossip, Hilda, that the foul deeds and +ambitious projects of Harald Haarfager have not reached thine ear?" + +"I have heard," replied Hilda, "that he is fond of war, which, truly, is +no news, and that he is just now more busy with his bloody game than +usual; but what does that matter to thee?" + +"Matter!" cried the youth impatiently, as he seized the lump of metal on +which he had been at work, and, thrusting it into the smouldering +charcoal, commenced to blow the fire energetically, as if to relieve his +feelings. "Know ye not that the King--this Harald Fairhair--is not +satisfied with the goodly domains that of right belong to him, and the +kingly rule which he holds, according to law, over all Norway, but that +he means to subdue the whole land to himself, and trample on our necks +as he has already trampled on our laws?" + +"I know somewhat of this," said Hilda. + +"No one," pursued Erling vehemently, and blowing the fire into a fervent +heat--"no one denies to Harald the right to wear the crown of Norway. +That was settled at the Ore Thing [see note 1] in Drontheim long ago; +but everyone denies his right to interfere with our established laws and +privileges. Has he not, by mere might and force of arms, slain many, +and enslaved others, of our best and bravest men? And now he proposes +to reduce the whole land to slavery, or something like it, and all +because of the foolish speech of a proud girl, who says she will not wed +him until he shall first subdue to himself the whole of Norway, and rule +over it as fully and freely as King Eric rules over Sweden, or King Gorm +over Denmark. He has sworn that he will neither clip nor comb his hair, +until he has subdued all the land with scatt [taxes] and duties and +domains, or die in the attempt. Trust me! he is like to die in the +attempt; and since his Kingship is to be so little occupied with his +hair, it would please me well if he would use his time and his shears in +clipping the tongue of the wench that set him on so foul an errand. All +this thou knowest, Hilda, as well as I; but thou dost not know that men +have been at the stede to-day, who tell us that the King is advancing +north, and is victorious everywhere. Already King Gandalf and Hako are +slain; the two sons of King Eystein have also fallen, and many of the +upland kings have been burned, with most of their men, in a house at +Ringsager. It is not many days since Harald went up Gudbrandsdal, and +north over the Doverfielde, where he ordered all the men to be slain, +and everything wide around to be given to the flames. King Gryting of +Orkadal and all his people have sworn fidelity to him, and now--worst +news of all--it is said he is coming over to pay us a visit in +Horlingdal. Is not here cause for fighting in self-defence, or rather +for country, and laws and freedom, and wives, and children, and--" + +The excited youth stopped abruptly, and, seizing the tongs, whirled the +white mass of semi-molten steel upon the anvil, and fell to belabouring +it with such goodwill that a bright shower of sparks drove Hilda +precipitately out of the workshop. + +The wrongs which roused the young Norseman's indignation to such a pitch +are matters of history. + +The government of the country at that time involved the democratic +element very largely. No act or expedition of any importance could be +done or undertaken without the previous deliberation and consent of a +"Thing", or assembly of landed proprietors. There were many different +Things--such as General Things, District Things, House Things of the +King's counsellors, and Herd Things of the Court, etcetera, and to such +of these there was a distinct and well-known trumpet call. There were +also four great Things which were legislative, while the small district +Things were only administrative. In addition to which there was the Ore +Thing of Drontheim, referred to by Erling. At these Things the King +himself possessed no greater power than any of the bonders. He was only +a "Thing-man" at a Thing. + +No wonder, then, that the self-governing and warlike Norsemen could not +bring themselves tamely to submit to the tyranny of Harald Haarfager, or +Fairhair, King of Norway by hereditary right, when he cast aside all the +restraints of ancient custom, and, in his effort to obtain more power, +commenced those bloody wars with his subjects, which had the effect of +causing many of his chief men to expatriate themselves and seek new +homes in the islands of the great western sea, and which ultimately +resulted in the subjugation (at least during that reign) of all the +petty kings of Norway. These small kings, be it observed, were not at +that time exercising any illegal power, or in the occupation of any +unwarrantable position, which could be pleaded by King Harald in +justification of his violent proceedings against them. The title of +king did not imply independent sovereignty. They were merely the +hereditary lords of the soil, who exercised independent and rightful +authority over their own estates and households, and modified authority +over their respective districts, subject, however, to the laws of the +land--laws which were recognised and perfectly understood by the people +and the king, and which were admitted by people and king alike to have +more authority than the royal will itself. By law the small kings were +bound to attend the meetings of the Stor Things or Parliaments, at the +summons of the sovereign, and to abide by the decisions of those +assemblies, where all men met on an equal footing, but where, of course, +intellectual power and eloquence led the multitude, for good or for +evil, then just as they do now, and will continue to do as long as, and +wherever, free discussion shall obtain. To say that the possession of +power, wealth, or influence was frequently abused to the overawing and +coercing of those assemblies, is simply to state that they were composed +of human beings possessed of fallen natures. + +So thoroughly did the Northmen appreciate the importance of having a +right to raise their voices and to vote in the national parliaments, and +so jealously did they assert and maintain their privileges, that the +King himself--before he could, on his accession, assume the crown--was +obliged to appear at the "Thing", where a freeborn landholder proposed +him, and where his title to the crown was investigated and proved in due +form. No war expedition on a large scale could be undertaken until a +Thing had been converged, and requisition legally made by the King for a +supply of men and arms; and, generally, whenever any act affecting +national or even district interests was contemplated, it was necessary +to assemble a Thing, and consult with the people before anything could +be done. + +It may be easily understood, then, with what an outburst of indignation +a free and warlike race beheld the violent course pursued by Harald +Fairhair, who roamed through the country with fire and sword, trampling +on their cherished laws and privileges, subduing the petty kings, and +placing them, when submissive, as Jarls, i.e. earls or governors over +the districts to collect the scatt or taxes, and manage affairs in his +name and for his behoof. + +It is no wonder that Erling the Bold gathered his brow into an ominous +frown, pressed his lips together, tossed his locks impatiently while he +thought on these things and battered the iron mass on his anvil with the +amount of energy that he would have expended in belabouring the head of +King Harald himself, had opportunity offered. + +Erling's wrath cooled, however, almost instantly on his observing +Hilda's retreat before the fiery shower. He flung down his hammer, +seized his battle-axe, and throwing it on his shoulder as he hurried +out, speedily overtook her. + +"Forgive my rude manners," he said. "My soul was chafed by the thoughts +that filled my brain, and I scare knew what I did." + +"Truly, thou man of fire," replied the girl, with an offended look, "I +am of half a mind not to pardon thee. See, my kirtle is destroyed by +the shower thou didst bestow upon me so freely." + +"I will repay thee that with such a kirtle as might grace a queen the +next time I go on viking cruise." + +"Meantime," said Hilda, "I am to go about like a witch plucked somewhat +hastily from the fire by a sympathising crone." + +"Nay; Herfrida will make thee a new kirtle of the best wool at +Haldorstede." + +"So thy mother, it seems, is to work and slave in order to undo thy +mischief?" + +"Then, if nothing else will content thee," said Erling gaily, "I will +make thee one myself; but it must be of leather, for I profess not to +know how to stitch more delicate substance. But let me carry thy +pitcher, Hilda. I will go to Ulfstede to hold converse with thy father +on these matters, for it seemed to me that the clouds are gathering +somewhat too thickly over the dale for comfort or peace to remain long +with us." + +As the young man and maiden wended their way down the rocky path that +skirted the foaming Horlingdal river, Hilda assumed a more serious tone, +and sought to convince her companion of the impropriety of being too +fond of fighting, in which attempt, as might be supposed, she was not +very successful. + +"Why, Hilda," said the youth, at the close of a speech in which his fair +companion endeavoured to point out the extreme sinfulness of viking +cruises in particular, "it is, as thou sayest, unjust to take from +another that which belongs to him if he be our friend; but if he is our +enemy, and the enemy of our country, that alters the case. Did not the +great Odin himself go on viking cruise and seize what prey he chose?" + +Erling said this with the air of a man who deemed his remark +unanswerable. + +"I know not," rejoined Hilda. "There seems to me much mystery in our +thoughts about the gods. I have heard it said that there is no such god +as Odin." + +The maiden uttered this in a subdued voice, and her cheek paled a little +as she glanced up at Erling's countenance. The youth gazed at her with +an expression of extreme surprise, and for a few minutes they walked +slowly forward without speaking. + +There was reason for this silence on both sides. Hilda was naturally of +a simple and trustful nature. She had been brought up in the religion +of her fathers, and had listened with awe and with deep interest on many +a long winter night to the wild legends with which the scalds, or poets +of the period, were wont to beguile the evening hours in her father's +mansion; but about a year before the time of which we write, an aged +stranger had come from the south, and taken up his abode in the valley, +in a secluded and dilapidated hut, in which he was suffered to dwell +unmolested by its owner, Haldor the Fierce; whose fierceness, by the +way, was never exhibited except in time of war and in the heat of +battle! + +With this hermit Hilda had held frequent converse, and had listened with +horror, but with a species of fascination which she could not resist, to +his calm and unanswerable reasoning on the fallacy of the religion of +Odin, and on the truth of that of Jesus Christ. At first she resolved +to fly from the old man, as a dangerous enemy, who sought to seduce her +from the paths of rectitude; but when she looked at his grave, sad face, +and listened to the gentle and--she knew not why--persuasive tones of +his voice, she changed her mind, and resolved to hear what he had to +say. Without being convinced of the truth of the new religion--of which +she had heard rumours from the roving vikings who frequented +Horlingdal--she was much shaken in regard to the truth of her own, and +now, for the first time, she had ventured to hint to a human being what +was passing in her mind. + +At this period Christianity had not penetrated into Norway, but an +occasional wanderer or hermit had found his way thither from time to +time to surprise the inhabitants with his new doctrines, and then, +perchance, to perish as a warlock because of them. Erling had heard of +this old man, and regarded him with no favour, for in his sea rovings he +had met with so-called Christians, whose conduct had not prepossessed +him in their favour. As for their creed, he knew nothing whatever about +it. + +His mind, however, was of that bold, straightforward, self-reliant, and +meditative cast, which happily has existed in all ages and in all +climes, and which, in civilised lands, usually brings a man to honour +and power, while in barbarous countries and ages, if not associated with +extreme caution and reticence, it is apt to bring its possessor into +trouble. + +It was with astonishment that Erling heard sentiments which had long +been harboured in his own mind drop from the lips of one whose natural +character he knew to be the reverse of sceptical in matters of faith, or +speculative in matters of opinion. Instead of making a direct reply to +Hilda's remark, he said, after a pause: + +"Hilda, I have my doubts of the old man Christian; men say he is a +warlock, and I partly believe them, for it is only such who shun the +company of their fellows. I would caution thee against him. He +believes not in Odin or Thor, which is matter of consideration mainly to +himself, but methinks he holdeth fellowship with Nikke, [Satan, or the +Evil One] which is matter of consideration for all honest men, aye, and +women too, who would live in peace; for if the Evil Spirit exists at +all, as I firmly believe he does, in some shape or other, it were well +to keep as far from him as we may, and specially to avoid those erring +mortals who seem to court his company." + +"The old man is misjudged, believe me," replied the girl earnestly; "I +have spoken much with him and oft. It may be he is wrong in some +things--how can a woman judge of such matters?--but he is gentle, and +has a kind heart." + +"I like him not," was Erling's curt reply. + +The youth and maiden had now reached a part of the valley where a small +footpath diverged from the main track which led to Ulf's dwelling. The +path ran in the direction of the hayfields that bordered the fiord. +Just as they reached it, Hilda observed that her father was labouring +there with his thralls. + +"See," she exclaimed, stopping abruptly, and taking her pitcher from +Erling, "my father is in the hayfield." + +The youth was about to remonstrate and insist on being allowed to carry +the pitcher to the house before going to the field; but on second +thoughts he resigned his slight burden, and, saying "farewell", turned +on his heel and descended the path with rapid step and a somewhat +burdened heart. + +"She loves me not," he muttered to himself, almost sternly. "I am a +brother, nothing more." + +Indulging in these and kindred gloomy reflections, he advanced towards a +rocky defile where the path diverged to the right. Before taking the +turn he looked back. Hilda was standing on the spot where they had +parted, but her face was not directed towards her late companion. She +was looking steadily up the valley. Presently the object which +attracted her attention appeared in view, and Erling felt a slight +sensation of anger, he scarce knew why, on observing the old man who had +been the subject of their recent conversation issue from among the +rocks. His first impulse was to turn back, but, checking himself, he +wheeled sharply round and hurried away. + +Scarcely had he taken three steps, however, when he was arrested by a +sound that resembled a crash of thunder. Glancing quickly upwards, he +beheld an enormous mass of rock, which had become detached from the +mountain side, descending in shattered fragments into the valley. + +The formation of Horlingdal at that particular point was peculiar. The +mountain ranges on either side, which rose to a height of at least four +thousand feet, approached each other abruptly, thus forming a dark +gloomy defile of a few hundred yards in width, with precipitous cliffs +on either side, and the river roaring in the centre of the pass. The +water rushed in white-crested billows through its rock-impeded bed, and +terminated in a splendid foss, or fall, forty or fifty feet high, which +plunged into a seething caldron, whence it issued in a troubled stream +to the plain that opened out below. It here found rest in the level +fields of Ulfstede, that lay at the head of the fiord. The open +amphitheatre above this pass, with its circlet of grand glacier-capped +mountains, was the abode of a considerable number of small farmers, in +the midst of whose dwellings stood the residence of Haldor, where the +meeting in the smithy just described took place. + +It was in this narrow defile that the landslip happened, a catastrophe +which always has been and still is of frequent occurrence in the +mountain regions of Norway. + +Hilda and the old man (whom we shall henceforth call Christian) cast +their eyes hastily upwards on hearing the sound that had arrested +Erling's steps so suddenly. The enormous mass of rock was detached from +the hill on the other side of the river, but the defile was so narrow +that falling rocks often rebounded quite across it. The slip occurred +just opposite the spot on which Hilda and the old man stood, and as the +terrible shower came on, tearing down trees and rocks, the heavier +masses being dashed and spurned from the hillside in innumerable +fragments, it became evident that to escape beyond the range of the +chaotic deluge was impossible. + +Hilda understood the danger so well that she was panic stricken and +rooted to the spot. Erling understood it also, and, with a sudden cry, +dashed at full speed to the rescue. His cry was one almost of despair, +for the distance between them was so great that he had no chance, he +knew, of reaching her in time. + +In this extremity the hermit looked round for a crevice or a rock which +might afford protection, but no such place of safety was at hand. The +side of the pass rose behind them like a wall to a height of several +hundred feet. Seeing this at a glance the old man planted himself +firmly in front of Hilda. His lips moved, and the single word "Jesus" +dropped from them as he looked with a calm steady gaze at the avalanche. + +Scarcely had he taken his stand when the first stones leaped across the +gorge, and, striking on the wall of rock behind, burst into fragments +and fell in a shower around them. Some of the smaller _debris_ struck +the old man's breast, and the hands which he had raised to protect his +face; but he neither blanched nor flinched. In another instant the +greater part of the hurling rubbish fell with a terrible crash and tore +up the earth in all directions round them. Still they stood unhurt! +The height from which the ruin had descended was so great that the +masses were scattered, and although they flew around over, and close to +them, the great shock passed by and left them unscathed. + +But the danger was not yet past. Several of the smaller masses, which +had been partially arrested in their progress by bushes, still came +thundering down the steep. The quick eye of the hermit observed one of +these flying straight towards his head. Its force had been broken by a +tree on the opposite hill, but it still retained tremendous impetus. He +knew that there was no escape for him. To have moved aside would have +exposed Hilda to almost certain destruction. Once again he murmured the +Saviour's name, as he stretched out both hands straight before his face. +The rock struck full against them, beat them down on his forehead, and +next instant old man and maid were hurled to the ground. + +Well was it for Erling that all this occurred so quickly that the danger +was past before he reached the spot. Part of the road he had to +traverse was strewn so thickly with the rocky ruin that his destruction, +had he been a few seconds sooner on the ground, would have been +inevitable. He reached Hilda just in time to assist her to rise. She +was slightly stunned by the shock, but otherwise unhurt. + +Not so the hermit. He lay extended where he had fallen; his grey beard +and thin scattered locks dabbled with blood that flowed from a gash in +his forehead. Hilda kneeled at his side, and, raising his head, she +laid it in her lap. + +"Now the gods be praised," said Erling, as he knelt beside her, and +endeavoured to stanch the flow of blood from the wound; "I had thought +thy last hour was come, Hilda; but the poor old man, I fear much he will +die." + +"Not so; he recovers," said the girl; "fetch me some water from the +spring." + +Erling ran to a rill that trickled down the face of the rock at his +side, dipped his leathern bonnet into it, and, quickly returning, +sprinkled a little on the old man's face, and washed the wound. + +"It is not deep," he remarked, after having examined the cut. "His +hands are indeed badly bruised, but he will live." + +"Get thee to the stede, Erling, and fetch aid," said Hilda quickly; "the +old man is heavy." + +The youth smiled. "Heavy he is, no doubt, but he wears no armour; +methinks I can lift him." + +So saying Erling raised him in his strong arms and bore him away to +Ulfstede, where, under the tender care of Hilda and her foster-sister +Ada, he speedily revived. + +Erling went out meanwhile to assist in the hayfield. + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +Note 1. The great assembly, or parliament, which was considered the +only "Thing" which could confer the sovereignty of the whole of Norway, +the other Things having no right or powers beyond their circles. It was +convened only for the special purpose of examining and proclaiming the +right of the aspirant to the crown, but the King had still to repair to +each Law Thing or Small Thing to obtain its acknowledgement of his right +and the power of a sovereign within its jurisdiction. + + + +CHAPTER THREE. + +SHOWS HOW CHIEF FRIENDS MAY BECOME FOES, AND CROSS-PURPOSES MAY PRODUCE +CROSS CONSEQUENCES, INVOLVING WORRY AND CONFUSION. + +When Christian had been properly cared for, Hilda sent Ada to the +hayfield, saying that she would follow her in a short time. Now it so +happened, by one of those curious coincidences which are generally +considered unaccountable, that as Ada ascended the track which led to +the high field above the foss, Glumm the Gruff descended towards the +same point from an opposite direction, so that a meeting between the +two, in the secluded dell, where the tracks joined, became inevitable. + +Whether or not this meeting was anticipated we cannot tell. If it was, +the young man and maiden were inimitable actors by nature, for they +appeared to be wholly unconscious of aught save the peculiar formation +of the respective footpaths along which they slowly moved. There was, +indeed, a twinkle in Ada's eyes; but then Ada's eyes were noted +twinklers; besides, a refractory eyelash might account for such an +expression. + +As for Glumm, he frowned on the path most unamiably while he sauntered +along with both hands thrust into the breast of his tunic, and the point +of his sword rasping harshly against rocks and bushes. Glumm was +peculiar in his weapons. He wore a double-handed and double-edged +sword, which was so long that he was obliged to sling it across his back +in order to keep it off the ground. The handle projected above his left +shoulder, and the blade, lying diagonally across his person, extended +beyond his right calf. The young man was remarkably expert in the use +of this immense weapon, and was not only a terror to his foes, but, +owing to the enormous sweep of its long blade, an object of some anxiety +to his friends when they chanced to be fighting alongside of him. He +wore a knife or dagger at his girdle on the right side, which was also +of unusual size; in all probability it would have been deemed a pretty +good sword by the Romans. There were only two men in the dale who could +wield Glumm's weapons. These were Erling and his father, Haldor. The +latter was as strong a man as Glumm, Erling was even stronger; though, +being an amiable man he could not be easily persuaded to prove his +strength upon his friends. Glumm wore his hair very short. It was +curly, and lay close to his head. + +As he sauntered along he kicked the stones out of his way savagely, and +appeared to find relief to his feelings in so doing, as well as by +allowing his sword to rasp across the rocks and shrubs at his side. It +might have been observed, however, that Glumm only kicked the little +stones out of his way; he never kicked the big ones. It is interesting +to observe how trifling a matter will bring out a trait of human nature! +Men will sometimes relieve their angry feelings by storming violently +at those of their fellows who cannot hurt them, but, strangely enough, +they manage to obtain relief to these same feelings without storming, +when they chance to be in the company of stronger men than themselves, +thereby proving that they have powers of self-restraint which prudence-- +not to say fear--can call into exercise! commend this moral reflection +particularly to the study of boys. + +After Glumm had kicked all the _little_ stones out of his way, carefully +letting the big ones alone, he came suddenly face to face with Ada, who +saluted him with a look of startled surprise, a slight blush, and a +burst of hearty laughter. + +"Why, Glumm," exclaimed the maiden, with an arch smile, "thou must have +risen off thy wrong side this morning. Methinks, now, were I a man, I +should have to look to my weapons, for that long blade of thine seems +inclined to fight with the rocks and shrubs of its own accord." + +Poor Glumm blushed as red as if he had been a young girl, at being thus +unexpectedly caught giving vent to his ill-humour; he stammered +something about bad dreams and evil spirits, and then, breaking into a +good-humoured smile, said: + +"Well, Ada, I know not what it is that ails me, but I do feel somewhat +cross-grained. Perchance a walk with thee may cure me, I see thou art +bound for the hayfield. But hast thou not heard the news? The Danish +vikings are off the coast, burning and murdering wherever they go. It +is rumoured, too, that their fleet is under that king of scoundrels, +Skarpedin the Red. Surely there is reason for my being angry." + +"Nay, then, if thou wert a bold man thou wouldst find reason in this for +being glad," replied Ada. "Is not the chance of a fight the joy of a +true Norseman's heart? Surely a spell must have been laid on thee, if +thy brow darkens and thy heart grows heavy on hearing of a stout enemy. +It is not thus with Erling the Bold. His brow clears and his eye +sparkles when a foe worthy of--But what seest thou, Glumm? Has the Dane +appeared in the forest that thy brow becomes so suddenly clouded? I +pray thee do not run away and leave me unprotected." + +"Doubtless if I did, Erling the Bold would come to thine aid," replied +the young man with some asperity. + +"Nay, do not be angry with me, Glumm," said the girl, laughing, as they +reached the field where Haldor and his stout son were busily at work +assisting Ulf, who, with all his thralls and freemen, was engaged in +cutting and gathering in his hay. + +"Hey! here come cloud and sunshine hand in hand," cried Erling, pausing +in his work, as Glumm and his pretty companion approached the scene of +labour. + +"Get on with thy work, then, and make the hay while I am shining," +retorted Ada, bestowing on the youth a bright smile, which he returned +cheerfully and with interest. + +This was the wicked Ada's finishing touch. Glumm saw the exchange of +smiles, and a pang of fierce jealousy shot through his breast. + +"The cloud sometimes darts out lightning," he muttered angrily, and, +turning on his heel, began to toss the hay with all his might in order +to relieve his feelings. + +Just then Hilda entered the field, and Glumm, putting strong constraint +on himself, accosted her with extreme cheerfulness and respect--resolved +in his heart to show Ada that there were other girls in Horlingdal worth +courting besides herself. In this game he was by no means successful as +regarded Ada, who at once discerned his intention, but the shaft which +flew harmlessly past her fixed itself deep in the breast of another +victim. Glumm's unusual urbanity took the kind-hearted Hilda so much by +surprise, that she was interested, and encouraged him, in what she +conceived to be a tendency towards improvement of disposition, by +bestowing on him her sweetest smiles during the course of the day, +insomuch that Erling the Bold became much surprised, and at last +unaccountably cross. + +Thus did these two men, who had for many years been fast and loving +friends, become desperately jealous, though each sought to conceal the +fact from the other. But the green-eyed monster having obtained a +lodgment in their bosoms, could not be easily cast out. Yet the good +sense of each enabled him to struggle with some success against the +passion, for Glumm, although gruff, was by no means a bad man. + +The presence of those conflicting feelings did not, however, interrupt +or retard the work of the field. It was a truly busy scene. Masters, +unfreemen, and thralls, mistresses and maidens, were there, cutting and +turning and piling up the precious crop with might and main; for they +knew that the weather could not be trusted to, and the very lives of +their cattle depended on the successful ingathering of the hay. + +As we have here mentioned the three different classes that existed in +Norway, it may be well to explain that the masters were peasants or +"bonders", but not by any means similar to peasants in other lands; on +the contrary, they were the udal-born proprietors of the soil--the +peasant-nobility, so to speak, the Udallers, or freeholders, without any +superior lord, and were entitled to attend and have a voice in the +"Things" or assemblies where the laws were enacted and public affairs +regulated. The next class was that of the "unfreemen". These were +freed slaves who had wrought out or purchased their freedom, but who, +although personally free, and at liberty to go where and serve whom they +pleased, were not free to attend the legislative assemblies. They were +unfree of the Things, and hence their apparently contradictory +designation. They, however, enjoyed the protection and civil rights +imparted by the laws, and to their class belonged all the cottars on the +land paying a rent in work on the farm of the bonder or udaller, also +the house-carles or freeborn indoormen, and the tradesmen, labourers, +fishermen, etcetera, about villages and farms. Thralls were slaves +taken in war, over whom the owners had absolute control. They might +sell them, kill them, or do with them as they pleased. Thralls were +permitted to purchase their freedom--and all the descendants of those +freed thralls, or unfreemen, were free. + +The clothing of the unfreemen was finer than that of the thralls. The +legs and arms of nearly all were bare from the knees and elbows +downward, though a few had swathed their limbs in bands of rough woollen +cloth, while others used straw for this purpose. Nearly all the men +wore shoes of untanned leather, and caps of the same material, or of +rough homespun cloth, resembling in form the cap of modern fishermen. +The udallers, such as Haldor, Ulf, and their children, were clad in +finer garments, which were looped and buttoned with brooches and +pendants of gold and silver, the booty gathered on those viking cruises, +against which Hilda inveighed so earnestly. + +The work went on vigorously until the sun began to sink behind the +mountain range that lay to the north-westward of the dale. By this time +the hay was all cut, and that portion which was sufficiently dry piled +up, so Ulf and Haldor left the work to be finished by the younger hands, +and stood together in the centre of the field chatting and looking on. + +Little change had taken place in the personal appearance of Ulf of +Romsdal since the occasion of that memorable duel related in the first +chapter of our story. Some of his elasticity, but none of his strength, +was gone. There was perhaps a little more thought in his face, and a +few more wrinkles on his swarthy brow, but his hair was still black and +his figure straight as the blade of his good sword. His old enemy but +now fast friend, Haldor the Fierce, had changed still less. True, his +formerly smooth chin and cheeks were now thickly covered with luxuriant +fair hair, but his broad forehead was still unwrinkled, and his clear +blue eye was as bright as when, twenty years before, it gleamed in +youthful fire at Ulf. Many a battle had Haldor fought since then, at +home and abroad, and several scars on his countenance and shoulders gave +evidence that he had not come out of these altogether scathless; but war +had not soured him. His smile was as free, open, and honest, and his +laugh as loud and hearty, as in days of yore. Erling was the +counterpart of his father, only a trifle taller and stouter. At a short +distance they might have been taken for twin brothers, and those who did +not know them could scarcely have believed that they were father and +son. + +Close to the spot where the two friends stood, a sturdy thrall was +engaged in piling up hay with an uncommon degree of energy. This man +had been taken prisoner on the coast of Ireland by Ulf, during one of +his sea-roving expeditions. He had a huge massive frame, with a +profusion of red hair on his head and face, and a peculiarly humorous +twinkle in his eye. His name was Kettle Flatnose. We have reason to +believe that the first part of this name had no connection with that +domestic utensil which is intimately associated with tea! It was a mere +accidental resemblance of sound no doubt. As to the latter part, that +is easily explained. In those days there were no surnames. In order to +distinguish men of the same name from each other, it was usual to +designate them by their complexions, or by some peculiarity of person or +trait of character. A blow from a club in early life had destroyed the +shape of Kettle's nose, and had disfigured an otherwise handsome and +manly countenance. Hence his name. He was about thirty-five years of +age, large-boned, broad-shouldered, and tall, but lean in flesh, and +rather ungainly in his motions. Few men cared to grapple with the huge +Irish slave, for he possessed a superabundant share of that fire and +love of fight which are said to characterise his countrymen even at the +present time. He was also gifted with a large share of their +characteristic good humour and joviality; which qualities endeared him +to many of his companions, especially to the boys of the neighbourhood. +In short, there was not a better fellow in the dale than Kettle +Flatnose. + +"Thy labour is not light, Kettle," observed Ulf to the thrall as he +paused for a few moments in the midst of his work to wipe his heated +brow. + +"Ill would it become me, master," replied the man, "to take my work easy +when my freedom is so nearly gained." + +"Right, quite right," replied Ulf with an approving nod, as the thrall +set to work again with redoubled energy. + +"That man," he added, turning to Haldor, "will work himself free in a +few weeks hence. He is one of my best thralls. I give my slaves, as +thou knowest, leave to work after hours to purchase their freedom, and +Kettle labours so hard that he is almost a free man already, though he +has been with me little more than two years and a half. I fear the +fellow will not remain with me after he is free, for he is an unsettled +spirit. He was a chief in his own land, it seems, and left a bride +behind him, I am told. If he goes, I lose a man equal to two, he is so +strong and willing.--Ho! Kettle," continued Ulf, turning to the man, +who had just finished the job on which he had been engaged, "toss me +yonder stone and let my friend Haldor see what thou art made of." + +Kettle obeyed with alacrity. He seized a round stone as large as his +own head, and, with an unwieldy action of his great frame, cast it +violently through the air about a dozen yards in advance of him. + +"Well cast, well cast!" cried Haldor, while a murmur of applause rose +from the throng of labourers who had been instantly attracted to the +spot. "Come, I will try my own hand against thee." + +Haldor advanced, and, lifting the stone, balanced it for a few moments +in his right hand, then, with a graceful motion and an apparently slight +effort, hurled it forward. It fell a foot beyond Kettle's mark. + +Seeing this the thrall leaped forward, seized the stone, ran back to the +line, bent his body almost to the ground, and, exerting himself to the +utmost, threw it into the same hollow from which he had lifted it. + +"Equal!" cried Ulf. "Come, Haldor, try again." + +"Nay, I will not try until he beats me," replied Haldor with a +good-natured laugh. "But do thou take a cast, Ulf. Thine arm is +powerful, as I can tell from experience." + +"Not so," replied Ulf. "It becomes men who are past their prime to +reserve their strength for the sword and battle-axe. Try it once more, +Kettle. Mayhap thou wilt pass the mark next time." + +Kettle tried again and again, but without gaining a hair's-breadth on +Haldor's throw. The stalwart thrall had indeed put forth greater force +in his efforts than Haldor, but he did not possess his skill. + +"Will no young man make trial of his strength and skill?" said Haldor, +looking round upon the eager faces of the crowd. + +"Glumm is no doubt anxious to try his hand," said Erling, who stood +close to the line, with his arms resting on the head of his long-hafted +battle-axe. "The shining of the Sunbeam will doubtless warm thy heart +and nerve thine arm." + +Erling muttered the latter part of his speech in a somewhat bitter tone, +alluding to Hilda's smiles; but the jealous and sulky Glumm could +appreciate no sunbeams save those that flashed from Ada's dark eyes. He +understood the remark as a triumphant and ironical taunt, and, leaping +fiercely into the ring formed by the spectators, exclaimed: + +"I will cast the stone, but I must have a better man than thou, Kettle, +to strive with. If Erling the Bold will throw--" + +"I will not balk thee," interrupted the other quickly, as he laid down +his axe and stepped up to the line. + +Glumm now made a cast. Everyone knew well enough that he was one of the +best throwers of the stone in all the dale, and confidently anticipated +an easy victory over the thrall. But the unusual tumult of conflicting +feelings in the young man's breast rendered him at the time incapable of +exerting his powers to the utmost in a feat, to excel in which requires +the union of skill with strength. At his first throw the stone fell +short about an inch! + +At this Ada's face became grave, and her heart began to flutter with +anxiety; for although willing enough to torment her lover a little +herself, she could not brook the idea of his failing in a feat of +strength before his comrades. + +Furious with disappointment and jealousy, and attributing Ada's +expression to anxiety lest he should succeed, Glumm cast again with +passionate energy, and sent the stone just an inch beyond the thrall's +mark. There was a dispute on the point, however, which did not tend to +soothe the youth's feelings, but it was ultimately decided in his +favour. + +Erling now stood forth; and as he raised his tall form to its full +height, and elevated the stone above his head, he seemed (especially to +Hilda) the _beau-ideal_ of manly strength and beauty. + +He was grieved, however, at Glumm's failure, for he knew him to be +capable of doing better than he had done. He remembered their old +friendship too, and pity for his friend's loss of credit caused the +recently implanted jealousy for a moment to abate. He resolved, +therefore, to exert himself just sufficiently to maintain his credit. + +But, unhappily for the successful issue of this effort of self-denial, +Erling happened to cast his eye towards the spot where Hilda stood. The +tender-hearted maiden chanced at that moment to be regarding Glumm with +a look of genuine pity. Of course Erling misconstrued the look! Next +moment the huge stone went singing through the air, and fell with a +crash full two yards beyond Glumm's mark. Happening to alight on a +piece of rock, it sprang onward, passed over the edge of the hill or +brae on the summit of which the field lay, and gathering additional +impetus in its descent, went bounding down the slope, tearing through +everything in its way, until it found rest at last on the sea beach +below. + +A perfect storm of laughter and applause greeted this unexpected feat, +but high above the din rose the voice of Glumm, who, now in a towering +passion, seized his double-handed sword, and shouting-- + +"Guard thee, Erling!" made a furious blow at his conqueror's head. + +Erling had fortunately picked up his axe after throwing the stone. He +immediately whirled the heavy head so violently against the descending +sword that the blade broke off close to the hilt, and Glumm stood before +him, disarmed and helpless, gazing in speechless astonishment at the +hilt which remained in his hands. + +"My good sword!" he exclaimed, in a tone of deep despondency. + +At this Erling burst into a hearty fit of laughter. "My bad sword, thou +must mean," said he. "How often have I told thee, Glumm, that there was +a flaw in the metal! I have advised thee more than once to prove the +blade, and now that thou hast consented to do so, behold the result! +But be not so cast down, man; I have forged another blade specially for +thyself, friend Glumm, but did not think to give it thee so soon." + +Glumm stood abashed, and had not a word to reply. Fortunately his +feelings were relieved by the attention of the whole party being +attracted at that moment to the figure of a man on the opposite side of +the valley, who ran towards them at full speed, leaping over almost +every obstacle that presented itself in his course. In a few minutes he +rushed, panting, into the midst of the throng, and presented a baton or +short piece of wood to Ulf, at the same time exclaiming: "Haste! King +Harald holds a Thing at the Springs. Speed on the token." + +The import of this message and signal were well understood by the men of +Horlingdal. When an assembly or Thing was to be convened for discussing +civil matters a wooden truncheon was sent round from place to place by +fleet messengers, each of whom ran a certain distance, and then +delivered over his "message-token" to another runner, who carried it +forward to a third, and so on. In this manner the whole country could +be roused and its chief men assembled in a comparatively short time. +When, however, the Thing was to be assembled for the discussion of +affairs pertaining to war, an arrow split in four parts was the +message-token. When the split arrow passed through the land men were +expected to assemble armed to the teeth, but when the baton went round +it was intended that they should meet without the full panoply of war. + +As soon as the token was presented, Ulf looked about for a fleet man to +carry forward the message. Several of the youths at once stepped +forward offering their services. Foremost among them was a stout, +deep-chested active boy of about twelve years of age, with long flaxen +curls, a round sunburnt face, a bold yet not forward look, a merry +smile, and a pair of laughing blue eyes. This was Erling's little +brother Alric--a lad whose bosom was kept in a perpetual state of stormy +agitation by the conflict carried on therein between a powerful tendency +to fun and mischief, and a strong sense of the obedience due to parents. + +"I will go," said the boy eagerly, holding out his hand for the token. + +"Thou, my son?" said Haldor, regarding him with a look of ill-suppressed +pride. "Go to thy mother's bower, boy. What if a fox, or mayhap even a +wolf, met thee on the fell?" + +"Have I not my good bow of elm?" replied Alric, touching the weapon, +which, with a quiver full of arrows, was slung across his back. + +"Tush! boy; go pop at the squirrels till thou be grown big enough to +warrant thy boasting." + +"Father," said Alric with a look of glee, "I'm sure I did not boast. I +did but point to my poor weapons. Besides, I have good legs. If I +cannot fight, methinks I can run." + +"Out upon thee--" + +"Nay, Haldor," said Ulf, interrupting the discussion, "thou art too hard +on the lad. Can he run well?" + +"I'll answer for that," said Erling, laying his large hand on his +brother's flaxen head. "I doubt if there is a fleeter foot in all the +dale." + +"Away then," cried Ulf, handing the token to Alric, "and see that ye +deserve all this praise. And now, sirs, let us fare to the hall to sup +and prepare for our journey to the Springs." + +The crowd at once broke up and hurried away to Ulfstede in separate +groups, discussing eagerly as they went, and stepping out like men who +had some pressing business on hand. Alric had already darted away like +a hunted deer. + +Erling turned hastily aside and went away alone. As soon as he reached +a spot where the rugged nature of the ground concealed him from his late +companions, he started up the valley at his utmost speed, directing his +course so as to enable him to overshoot and intercept his brother. He +passed a gorge ahead of the boy; and then, turning suddenly to the left, +bore down upon him. So well did he calculate the distance, that on +turning round the edge of a jutting cliff he met him face to face, and +the two ran somewhat violently into each other's arms. + +On being relieved from this involuntary embrace, Alric stepped back and +opened his eyes wide with surprise, while Erling roared with laughter. + +"Ye are merry, my brother," said Alric, relaxing into a grin, "but I +have seen thee often thus, and may not stop to observe thee now, seeing +that it is nothing new." + +"Give me an arrow, thou rogue! There," said Erling, splitting the shaft +into four parts, handing it back to the boy, and taking the baton from +him. "Get thee gone, and use thy legs well. We must not do the King +the dishonour to appear before him without our weapons in these +unsettled times. Let the token be sent out north, south, east, and +west; and, harkee, lad, say nothing to anyone about the object of the +assembly." + +Alric's countenance became grave, then it again relaxed into a broad +grin. Giving his brother an emphatic wink with one of his large blue +eyes, he darted past him, and was soon far up the glen, running with the +speed of a deer and waving the war-token over his head. + + + +CHAPTER FOUR. + +DESCRIBES WARLIKE PREPARATIONS, AND A NORSE HALL IN THE OLDEN TIME-- +TELLS ALSO OF A SURPRISE. + +Instead of returning to Ulfstede, Erling directed his steps homeward at +a brisk pace, and in a short space of time reached the door of his +forge. Here he met one of his father's thralls. + +"Ho! fellow," said he, "is thy mistress at home?" + +"Yes, master, she is in the hall getting supper ready against your +father's return." + +"Go tell her there will be no men to eat supper in the hall to-night," +said Erling, unfastening the door of the forge. "Say that I am in the +forge, and will presently be in to speak with her. Go also to Thorer, +and tell him to get the house-carles busked for war. When they are +ready let him come hither to me; and, harkee, use thine utmost speed; +there may be bloody work for us all to do this night before the birds +are on the wing. Away!" + +The man turned and ran to the house, while Erling blew up the +smouldering fire of the forge. Throwing off his jerkin, he rolled up +his sleeves, and seizing the axe on which he had been engaged when Hilda +interrupted him, he wrought so vigorously at the stubborn metal with the +great forehammer that in the course of half an hour it was ready to fit +on the haft. There was a bundle of hafts in a corner of the workshop. +One of these, a tough thick one without knot or flaw, and about five +feet long, he fitted to the iron head with great neatness and skill. +The polishing of this formidable weapon he deferred to a period of +greater leisure. Having completed this piece of work, Erling next +turned to another corner of the forge and took up the huge two-handed +sword which he had made for his friend Glumm. + +The weapon was beautifully executed, and being highly polished, the +blade glittered with a flashing light in the ruddy glare of the forge +fire. The young giant sat down on his anvil and put a few finishing +touches to the sword, regarding it the while with a grim smile, as if he +speculated on the probability of his having formed a weapon wherewith +his own skull was destined to be cloven asunder. While he was thus +engaged his mother Herfrida entered. + +The soft-eyed dame could scarcely be called a matronly personage. +Having married when about sixteen, she was now just thirty-eight years +of age; and though the bloom of maidenhood was gone, the beauty of a +well-favoured and healthy woman still remained. She wore a cloak of +rich blue wool, and under it a scarlet kirtle with a silver girdle. + +"How now, my son," she said; "why these warlike preparations?" + +"Because there is rumour of war; I'm sure that is neither strange nor +new to you, mother." + +"Truly no; and well do I know that where war is, there my husband and my +son will be found." + +Herfrida said this with a feeling of pride, for, like most of the women +of that time and country, she esteemed most highly the men who were +boldest and could use their weapons best. + +"'Twere well if we were less noted in that way, and more given to +peace," said Erling half-jestingly. "For my own part, I have no liking +for war, but you women will be for ever egging us on!" + +Herfrida laughed. She was well aware of what she was pleased to term +her son's weakness, namely, an idea that he loved peace, while he was +constantly proving to the world that he was just cut out for war. Had +he ever shown a spark of cowardice she would have regarded those +speeches of his with much anxiety, but as it was she only laughed at +them. + +"Erling, my boy," she said suddenly, as her eye fell on the axe at his +side,--"what terrible weapon is this? Surely thou must have purchased +Thor's hammer. Can ye wield such a thing?" + +"I hope so, mother," said Erling curtly; "if not, I shall soon be in +Valhalla's halls." + +"What are these rumours of war that are abroad just now?" asked +Herfrida. + +Erling replied by giving his mother an account of King Harald's recent +deeds, and told her of the calling of the Thing, and of the appearance +of the Danish vikings off the coast. + +"May good spirits attend thee, my son!" she said, kissing the youth's +forehead fervently, as a natural gush of tenderness and womanly anxiety +filled her breast for a moment. But the feeling passed away as quickly +as it came; for women who are born and nurtured in warlike times become +accustomed and comparatively indifferent to danger, whether it threatens +themselves or those most dear to them. + +While mother and son were conversing, Thorer entered the smithy, bearing +Erling's armour. + +"Are the lads all a-boun?" [armed and ready] enquired Erling as he +rose. + +"Aye, master; and I have brought your war-gear." + +The man who thus spoke was Haldor's chief house-carle. He was a very +short and extremely powerful man of about forty-five years of age, and +so sturdy and muscular as to have acquired the title of Thorer the +Thick. He wore a shirt of scale armour, rather rusty, and somewhat the +worse of having figured in many a tough battle by land and sea. A +triangular shield hung at his back, and his headpiece was a simple +peaked helmet of iron, with a prolongation in front that guarded his +nose. Thorer's offensive armour consisted of a short straight sword, a +javelin and a bow, with a quiver of arrows. + +"How many men hast thou assembled, Thorer?" asked Erling as he donned +his armour. + +"Seventy-five, master; the rest are up on the fells, on what errand I +know not." + +"Seventy-five will do. Haste thee, carle, and lead them to my longship +the Swan. Methinks we will skate upon the ocean to-night. [Longships, +or war-vessels, were sometimes called ocean-skates.] I will follow thee. +Let every man be at his post, and quit not the shore till I come on +board. Now fare away as swiftly as may be, and see that everything be +done stealthily; above all, keep well out of sight of Ulfstede." + +Thus admonished, Thorer quickly left the forge; and a few seconds later +the clanking tread of armed men was heard as Erling's followers took +their way to the fiord. + +"Now I will to the hall, my son, and pray that thou mayst fare well," +said Herfrida, once more kissing the forehead which the youth lowered to +receive the parting salute. The mother retired, and left her son +standing in the forge gazing pensively at the fire, the dying flames of +which shot up fitfully now and then, and gleamed on his shining mail. + +If Erling the Bold was a splendid specimen of a man in his ordinary +costume, when clad in the full panoply of war he was truly magnificent. +The rude but not ungraceful armour of the period was admirably fitted to +display to advantage the elegant proportions of his gigantic figure. A +shirt or tunic of leather, covered with steel rings, hung loosely--yet, +owing to its weight, closely--on his shoulders. This was gathered in at +the waist by a broad leathern belt, studded with silver ornaments, from +which hung a short dagger. A cross belt of somewhat similar make hung +from his right shoulder, and supported a two-edged sword of immense +weight, which was quite as strong, though not nearly so long, as that +which he had forged for Glumm. It was intended for a single-handed +weapon, though men of smaller size might have been constrained, in +attempting to wield it, to make use of both hands. The youth's lower +limbs were clothed in closely-fitting leather leggings, and a pair of +untanned leather shoes, laced with a single thong, protected his feet. +On his head he wore a small skull-cap, or helmet, of burnished steel, +from the top of which rose a pair of hawk's wings expanded, as if in the +act of flight. No gloves or gauntlets covered his hands, but on his +left arm hung a large shield, shaped somewhat like an elongated heart, +with a sharp point at its lower end. Its top touched his shoulder, and +the lower part reached to his knee. + +This shield was made of several plies of thick bull-hide, with an outer +coat of iron--the whole being riveted firmly together with iron studs. +It was painted pure white, without device of any kind, but there was a +band of azure blue round it, near the margin--the rim itself being of +polished steel. In addition to his enormous axe, sword, and dagger, +Erling carried at his back a short bow and a quiver full of arrows. + +The whole of this war gear bore evidence of being cherished with the +utmost care and solicitude. Every ring on the tunic was polished as +highly as the metal would admit of, so that the light appeared to +trickle over it as its wearer moved. The helmet shone like a globe of +quicksilver, and lines of light gleamed on the burnished edge of the +shield, or sparkled on the ornamental points of the more precious metals +with which the various parts of his armour were decorated. Above all +hung a loose mantle or cloak of dark-blue cloth, which was fastened on +the right shoulder with a large circular brooch of silver. + +The weight of this panoply was enormous, but long habit had so inured +the young Norseman to the burthen of his armour that he moved under it +as lightly as if it had been no heavier than his ordinary habiliments. +Indeed, so little did it impede his movements that he could spring over +chasms and mountain streams almost as well with as without it; and it +was one of the boasts of his admiring friends that "he could leap his +own height with all his war gear on!" + +We have already referred to Erling's partiality for the axe as an +offensive weapon. This preference was in truth--strange though the +assertion may appear--owing to the peculiar adaptation of that +instrument to the preservation of life as well as the taking of it! + +There are exceptions to all rules. The rule among the Northmen in +former years was to slay and spare not. Erling's tendency, and +occasionally his practice, was to spare and not to slay, if he could do +so with propriety. From experience he found that, by a slight motion of +his wrist, the edge of his axe could be turned aside, and the blow which +was delivered by its flat side was invariably sufficient, without +killing, to render the recipient utterly incapable of continuing or +renewing the combat--at least for a few days. With the sword this +delicate manoeuvre could not be so easily accomplished, for a blow from +the flat of a sword was not sufficiently crushing, and if delivered with +great force the weapon was apt to break. Besides, Erling was a blunt, +downright, straightforward man, and it harmonised more with his +feelings, and the energy of his character, to beat down sword and shield +and headpiece with one tremendous blow, than to waste time in fencing +with a lighter weapon. + +Having completed his toilet and concluded his meditations--which latter +filled him with much perplexity, if one might judge from the frequency +with which he shook his head--Erling the Bold hung Glumm's long sword at +his back, laid his huge axe on his shoulder, and, emerging from the +smithy, strode rapidly along the bridle path that led to the residence +of Ulf of Romsdal. + +Suddenly it occurred to him that he had not yet tried the temper of his +new weapon, so he stopped abruptly before a small pine tree, about as +thick as a man's arm. It stood on the edge of a precipice along the +margin of which the track skirted. Swaying the axe once round his head, +he brought it forcibly down on the stem, through which it passed as if +it had been a willow wand, and the tree went crashing into the ravine +below. The youth looked earnestly at his weapon, and nodded his head +once or twice as if the result were satisfactory. A benignant smile +played on his countenance as he replaced it on his shoulder and +continued on his way. + +A brisk walk of half an hour brought him to Ulfstede, where he found the +men of the family making active preparations for the impending journey +to the Thing. In the great hall of the house, his father held earnest +discussion with Ulf. The house-carles busied themselves in burnishing +their mail and sharpening their weapons, while Ada and Hilda assisted +Dame Astrid, Ulf's wife, to spread the board for the evening meal. + +Everything in the hall was suggestive of rude wealth and barbarous +warlike times. The hall itself was unusually large--capable of feasting +at least two hundred men. At one end a raised hearth sustained a fire +of wood that was large enough to have roasted an ox. The smoke from +this, in default of a chimney, found an exit through a hole in the roof. +The rafters were, of course, smoked to a deep rich coffee colour, and +from the same cause the walls also partook not a little of that hue. +All round these walls hung, in great profusion, shields, spears, swords, +bows, skins, horns, and such like implements and trophies of war and the +chase. The centre of the hall was open, but down each side ran two long +tables, which were at this time groaning with great haunches of venison, +legs of mutton, and trenchers of salmon, interspersed with platters of +wild fowl, and flanked by tankards and horns of mead and ale. Most of +the drinking cups were of horn, but many of these were edged with a rim +of silver, and, opposite the raised seats of honour, in the centre of +each table, the tankards were of solid silver, richly though rudely +chased--square, sturdy, and massive, like the stout warriors who were +wont to quaff their foaming contents. + +"I tell thee, Ulf," said Haldor, "thou wilt do wrong to fare to the +Thing with men fully armed when the token was one of peace. The King is +in no mood just now to brook opposition. If we would save our +independence we must speak him smoothly." + +"I care not," replied Ulf gruffly; "this is no time to go about +unarmed." + +"Nay, I did not advise thee to go unarmed, but surely a short sword +might suffice, and--" + +At this moment Erling entered, and Ulf burst into a loud laugh as he +interrupted his friend: "Aye, a short sword--something like that," he +said, pointing to the huge hilt which rose over the youth's shoulder. + +"Hey! lad," exclaimed his father, "art going to fight with an axe in one +hand and a sword in the other?" + +"The sword is for Glumm, father. I owe him one after this morning's +work. Here, friend Glumm, buckle it on thy shoulder. The best wish +that thou and I can exchange is, that thy sword and my axe may never +kiss each other." + +"Truly, if they ever do, I know which will fare worst," said Haldor, +taking the axe and examining it, "Thou art fond of a weary arm, my lad, +else ye would not have forged so weighty a weapon. Take my advice and +leave it behind thee." + +"Come, come," interrupted Ulf; "see, the tables are spread; let us use +our jaws on food and drink, and not on words, for we shall need both to +fit us for the work before us, and perchance we may have no longer need +of either before many days go by. We can talk our fill at the Thing, an +it so please us." + +"That will depend on the King's pleasure," replied Haldor, laughing. + +"So much the more reason for taking our arms with us, in order that we +may have the means of talking the King's pleasure," retorted Ulf with a +frown; "but sit ye down at my right hand, Haldor, and Hilda will wait +upon thee. Come, my men all--let us fall to." + +It is scarcely necessary to say that this invitation was accepted with +alacrity. In a few minutes about fifty pairs of jaws were actively +employed in the manner which Ulf recommended. + +Meanwhile Erling the Bold seated himself at the lower end of one of the +tables, in such a position that he could keep his eye on the outer door, +and, if need be, steal away unobserved. He calculated that his little +brother must soon return from his flying journey, and he expected to +hear from him some news of the vikings. In this expectation he was +right; but when Alric did come, Erling saw and heard more than he looked +for. + +The meal was about half concluded, and Ulf was in the act of pledging, +not absent, but defunct, friends, when the door opened slowly, and Alric +thrust his head cautiously in. His hair, dripping and tangled, bore +evidence that his head at least had been recently immersed in water. + +He caught sight of Erling, and the head was at once withdrawn. Next +moment Erling stood outside of the house. + +"How now, Alric, what has befallen thee? Hey! thou art soaking all +over!" + +"Come here; I'll show you a fellow who will tell you all about it." + +In great excitement the boy seized his brother's hand and dragged rather +than led him round the end of the house, where the first object that met +his view was a man whose face was covered with blood, which oozed from a +wound in his forehead, while the heaving of his chest, and an occasional +gasp, seemed to indicate that he had run far and swiftly. + + + +CHAPTER FIVE. + +THE VIKING RAID--ALRIC'S ADVENTURE WITH THE DANE--ERLING'S CUTTER, AND +THE BATTLE IN THE PASS. + +"Whom have we here?" exclaimed Erling, looking close into the face of +the wounded man. "What! Swart of the Springs!" + +Erling said this sternly, for he had no liking for Swart, who was a +notorious character, belonging to one of the neighbouring fiords--a wild +reckless fellow, and, if report said truly, a thief. + +"That recent mischief has cost thee a cracked crown?" asked Erling, a +little more gently, as he observed the exhausted condition of the man. + +"Mischief enough," said Swart, rising from the stone on which he had +seated himself, and wiping the blood, dust, and sweat from his haggard +face, while his eyes gleamed like coals of fire; "Skarpedin the Dane has +landed in the fiord, my house is a smoking pile, my children and most of +the people in the stede are burned, and the Springs run blood!" + +There was something terrible in the hoarse whisper in which this was +hissed out between the man's teeth. Erling's tone changed instantly as +he laid his hand on Swart's shoulder. + +"Can this be true?" he answered anxiously; "are we too late? are _all_ +gone?" + +"_All_," answered Swart, "save the few fighting men that gained the +fells." The man then proceeded to give a confused and disjointed +account of the raid, of which the following is the substance. + +Skarpedin, a Danish viking, noted for his daring, cruelty, and success, +had taken it into his head to visit the neighbourhood of Horlingdal, and +repay in kind a visit which he had received in Denmark the previous +summer from a party of Norsemen, on which occasion his crops had been +burned, his cattle slaughtered, and his lands "herried", while he +chanced to be absent from home. + +It must be observed that this deed of the Northmen was not deemed +unusually wicked. It was their custom, and the custom also of their +enemies, to go out every summer on viking cruise to plunder and ravage +the coasts of Denmark, Sweden, Britain, and France, carrying off all the +booty they could lay hold of, and as many prisoners as they wanted or +could obtain. Then, returning home, they made slaves or "thralls" of +their prisoners, often married the women, and spent the winter in the +enjoyment of their plunder. + +Among many other simple little habits peculiar to the times was that +called "Strandhug". It consisted in a viking, when in want of +provisions, landing with his men on any coast--whether that of an enemy +or a countryman--and driving as many cattle as he required to the shore, +where they were immediately slaughtered and put on board without leave +asked or received! + +Skarpedin was influenced both by cupidity and revenge. Swart had been +one of the chief leaders of the expedition which had done him so much +damage. To the Springs therefore he directed his course with six +"longships", or ships of war, and about five hundred men. + +In the afternoon of a calm day he reached the fiord at the head of which +were the Springs and Swart's dwelling. There was a small hamlet at the +place, and upon this the vikings descended. So prompt and silent were +they, that the men of the place had barely time to seize their arms and +defend their homes. They fought like lions, for well they knew that +there was no hope of mercy if they should be beaten. But the odds +against them were overwhelming. They fell in heaps, with many of their +foes underneath them. The few who remained to the last retreated +fighting, step by step, each man towards his own dwelling, where he fell +dead on its threshold. Swart himself, with a few of the bravest, had +driven back that part of the enemy's line which they attacked. Thus +they were separated for a time from their less successful comrades, and +it was not till the smoke of their burning homesteads rose up in dense +clouds that they became aware of the true state of the fight. At once +they turned and ran to the rescue of their families, but their retreat +was cut off by a party of the enemy, and the roar of the conflagration +told them that they were too late. They drew together, therefore, and, +making a last desperate onset, hewed their way right through the ranks +of their enemies, and made for the mountains. All were more or less +wounded in the _melee_, and only one or two succeeded in effecting their +escape. Swart dashed past his own dwelling in his flight, and found it +already down on the ground in a blazing ruin. He killed several of the +men who were about it, and then, bounding up the mountain side, sought +refuge in a ravine. + +Here he lay down to rest a few moments. During the brief period of his +stay he saw several of his captured friends have their hands and feet +chopped off by the marauders, while a terrible shriek that arose once or +twice told him all too plainly that on a few of them had been +perpetrated the not uncommon cruelty of putting out the eyes. + +Swart did not remain many moments inactive. He descended by a +circuitous path to the shore, and, keeping carefully out of sight, set +off in the direction of Horlingdal. The distance between the two places +was little more than nine or ten miles, but being separated from each +other by a ridge of almost inaccessible mountains, that rose to a height +of above five thousand feet, neither sight nor sound of the terrible +tragedy enacted at the Springs could reach the eyes or ears of the +inhabitants of Ulfstede. Swart ran round by the coast, and made such +good use of his legs that he reached the valley in little more than an +hour. Before arriving at Ulfstede his attention was attracted and his +step arrested by the sight of a warship creeping along the fiord close +under the shadow of the precipitous cliffs. He at once conjectured that +this was one of the Danish vessels which had been dispatched to +reconnoitre Horlingdal. He knew by its small size (having only about +twenty oars) that it could not be there for the purpose of attack. He +crouched, therefore, among the rocks to escape observation. + +Now, it happened at this very time that Erling's brother Alric, having +executed his commission by handing the war-token to the next messenger, +whose duty it was to pass it on, came whistling gaily down a +neighbouring gorge, slashing the bushes as he went with a stout stick, +which in the lad's eyes represented the broadsword or battle-axe he +hoped one day to wield, in similar fashion, on the heads of his foes. +Those who knew Erling well could have traced his likeness in every act +and gesture of the boy. The vikings happened to observe Alric before he +saw them, as was not to be wondered at, considering the noise he made. +They therefore rowed close in to the rocks, and their leader, a stout +red-haired fellow, leaped on shore, ascended the cliffs by a narrow +ledge or natural footpath, and came to a spot which overhung the sea, +and round which the boy must needs pass. Here the man paused, and +leaning on the haft of his battle-axe, awaited his coming up. + +It is no disparagement to Alric to say that, when he found himself +suddenly face to face with this man, his mouth opened as wide as did his +eyes, that the colour fled from his cheeks, that his heart fluttered +like a bird in a cage, and that his lips and tongue became uncommonly +dry! Well did the little fellow know that one of the Danish vikings was +before him, for many a time had he heard the men in Haldorstede describe +their dress and arms minutely; and well did he know also that mercy was +only to be purchased at the price of becoming an informer as to the +state of affairs in Horlingdal--perhaps a guide to his father's house. +Besides this, Alric had never up to that time beheld a _real_ foe, even +at a distance! He would have been more than mortal, therefore, had he +shown no sign of trepidation. + +"Thou art light of heart, lad," said the Dane with a grim smile. + +Alric would perhaps have replied that his heart was the reverse of light +at that moment, but his tongue refused to fulfil its office, so he +sighed deeply, and tried to lick his parched lips instead. + +"Thou art on thy way to Ulfstede or Haldorstede, I suppose?" said the +man. + +Alric nodded by way of reply. + +"To which?" demanded the Dane sternly. + +"T-to--to Ulf--" + +"Ha!" interrupted the man. "I see. I am in want of a guide thither. +Wilt guide me, lad?" + +At this the truant blood rushed back to Alric's cheeks. He attempted to +say no, and to shake his head, but the tongue was still rebellious, and +the head would not move--at least not in that way--so the poor boy +glanced slightly aside, as if meditating flight. The Dane, without +altering his position, just moved his foot on the stones, which act had +the effect of causing the boy's eyes to turn full on him again with that +species of activity which cats are wont to display when expecting an +immediate assault. + +"Escape is impossible," said the Dane, with another grim smile. + +Alric glanced at the precipice on his left, full thirty feet deep, with +the sea below; at the precipice on his right, which rose an unknown +height above; at the steep rugged path behind, and at the wild rugged +man in front, who could have clutched him with one bound; and admitted +in his heart that escape _was_ impossible. + +"Now, lad," continued the viking, "thou wilt go with me and point out +the way to Ulfstede and Haldorstede; if not with a good will, torture +shall cause thee to do it against thy will; and after we have plundered +and burnt both, we will give thee a cruise to Denmark, and teach thee +the use of the pitchfork and reaping-hook." + +This remark touched a chord in Alric's breast which at once turned his +thoughts from himself, and allowed his native courage to rise. During +the foregoing dialogue his left hand had been nervously twitching the +little elm bow which it carried. It now grasped the bow firmly as he +replied: + +"Ulfstede and Haldorstede may burn, but thou shalt not live to see it." + +With that he plucked an arrow from his quiver, fitted it to the string, +and discharged it full at the Dane's throat. Quick as thought the man +of war sprang aside, but the shaft had been well and quickly aimed. It +passed through his neck between the skin and the flesh. + +A cry of anger burst from him as he leaped on the boy and caught him by +the throat. He hastily felt for the hilt of his dagger, and in the heat +of his rage would assuredly have ended the career of poor Alric then and +there; but, missing the hilt at the first grasp, he suddenly changed his +mind, lifted the boy as if he had been a little dog, and flung him over +the precipice into the sea. + +A fall of thirty feet, even though water should be the recipient of the +shock, is not a trifle by any means, but Alric was one of those vigorous +little fellows--of whom there are fortunately many in this world--who +train themselves to feats of strength and daring. Many a time had he, +when bathing, leaped off that identical cliff into the sea for his own +amusement, and to the admiration and envy of many of his companions, +and, now that he felt himself tumbling in the air against his will, the +sensation, although modified, was nothing new. He straightened himself +out after the manner of a bad child that does not wish to sit on nurse's +knee, and went into the blue fiord, head foremost, like a javelin. + +He struck the water close to the vessel of his enemies, and on rising to +the surface one of them made a plunge at him with an oar, which, had it +taken effect, would have killed him on the spot; but he missed his aim, +and before he could repeat it, the boy had dived. + +The Dane was sensible of his error the instant he had tossed Alric away +from him, so he hastened to his boat, leaped into it, and ordered the +men to pull to the rocks near to which Alric had dived; but before they +could obey the order a loud ringing cheer burst from the cliffs, and in +another moment the form of Swart was seen on a ledge, high above, in the +act of hurling a huge mass of rock down on the boat. The mass struck +the cliff in its descent, burst into fragments, and fell in a shower +upon the Danes. + +At the same time Swart waved his hand as if to someone behind him, and +shouted with stentorian voice: + +"This way, men! Come on! Down into the boats and give chase! huzza!" + +The enemy did not await the result of the order, but pulled out into the +fiord as fast as possible, while Swart ran down to the edge of the water +and assisted Alric to land. It was not until they heard both man and +boy utter a cheer of defiance, and burst into a fit of laughter, and saw +them hastening at full speed towards Horlingdal, that the vikings knew +they had been duped. It was too late, however, to remedy the evil. +They knew, also, that they might now expect an immediate attack, so, +bending to the oars with all their might, they hastened off to warn +their comrades at the Springs. + +"Now, Swart," said Erling, after hearing this tale to its conclusion, +"if ye are not too much exhausted to--" + +"Exhausted!" cried Swart, springing up as though he had but risen from a +refreshing slumber. + +"Well, I see thou art still fit for the fight. Revenge, like love, is a +powerful stirrer of the blood. Come along then; I will lead the way, +and do thou tread softly and keep silence. Follow us, Alric, I have yet +more work for thee, lad." + +Taking one of the numerous narrow paths that ran from Ulfstede to the +shores of the fiord, Erling led his companions to a grassy mound which +crowned the top of a beetling cliff whose base was laved by deep water. +Although the night was young--probably two hours short of midnight--the +sun was still high in the heavens, for in most parts of Norway that +luminary, during the height of summer, sinks but a short way below the +horizon--they have daylight all night for some time. In the higher +latitudes the sun, for a brief period, shines all the twenty-four hours +round. Erling could therefore see far and wide over the fiord, as well +as if it were the hour of noon. + +"Nothing in sight!" he exclaimed in a tone of chagrin. "I was a fool to +let thee talk so long, Swart; but there is still a chance of catching +the boat before it rounds the ness. Come along." + +Saying this hurriedly, the youth descended into what appeared to be a +hole in the ground. A rude zigzag stair cut in the rock conducted them +into a subterranean cavern, which at first seemed to be perfectly dark; +but in a few seconds their eyes became accustomed to the dim light, and +as they advanced rapidly over a bed of pebbles, Swart, who had never +been there before, discovered that he was in an ocean-made cave, for the +sound of breaking ripples fell softly on his ears. On turning round a +corner of rock the opening of the cave towards the sea suddenly appeared +with a dazzling light like a great white gem. + +But another beautiful sight met his astonished gaze. This was Erling's +ship of war, the Swan, which, with its figurehead erect, as though it +were a living thing, sat gracefully on the water, above its own +reflected image. + +"All ready?" asked Erling, as a man stepped up to him. + +"All ready," replied Thorer. + +"Get on board, Swart," said Erling; "we will teach these Danes a lesson +they will not forget as long as the Springs flow. Here, Alric--where +are ye, lad?" + +Now, unfortunately for himself, as well as for his friend, Alric was +almost too self-reliant in his nature. His active mind was too apt to +exert itself in independent thought in circumstances where it would have +been wiser to listen and obey. Erling had turned with the intention of +telling his little brother that he had started thus quietly in order +that he might have the pleasure of capturing the scouting boat, and of +beginning the fight at the Springs with a small band of tried men, thus +keeping the enemy in play until reinforcements should arrive; for he +shrewdly suspected that if the whole valley were to go out at once +against the vikings, they would decline the combat and make off. He had +intended, therefore, to have warned Alric to watch the Swan past a +certain point before sounding the alarm at Ulfstede. But Alric had +already formed his own opinions on the subject, and resolved to act on +them. + +He suspected that Erling, in his thirst for glory, meant to have all the +fun to himself, and to attack the Danes with his single boat's crew of +fifty or sixty men. He knew enough of war to be aware that sixty men +against six hundred would have very small chance of success--in fact, +that the thing was sheer madness--so he resolved to balk, and by so +doing to save, his headstrong brother. + +When Erling turned, as we have said, he beheld Alric running into the +cave at full speed. Instantly suspecting the truth, he dashed after +him, but the boy was fleet, and Erling was heavily armed. The result +was, that the former escaped, while the latter returned to the beach and +embarked in the Swan in a most unenviable state of mind. + +Erling's "longship" was one of the smaller-sized war vessels of the +period. It pulled twenty oars--ten on each side--and belonged to the +class named Snekiars, or cutters, which usually had from ten to twenty +rowers on a side. To each oar three men were apportioned--one to row, +one to shield the rower, and one to throw missiles and fight, so that +her crew numbered over sixty men. The forecastle and poop were very +high, and the appearance of height was still further increased by the +figurehead--the neck and head of a swan--and by a tail that rose from +the stern-post, over the steersman's head. Both head and tail were +richly gilt; indeed, the whole vessel was gaudily painted. All round +the gunwales, from stem to stern, hung a row of shining red and white +shields, which resembled the scaly sides of some fabulous creature, so +that when the oars, which gave it motion, and not inaptly represented +legs, were dipped, the vessel glided swiftly out of the cavern, like +some antediluvian monster issuing from its den and crawling away over +the dark blue sea. A tall heavy mast rose from the centre of the ship. +Its top was also gilded, as well as the tips of the heavy yard attached +to it. On this they hoisted a huge square sail, which was composed of +alternate stripes of red, white, and blue cloth. + +It need scarcely be said that Erling's crew pulled with a will, and that +the waters of the fiord curled white upon the breast of the Swan that +night; but the vikings' boat had got too long a start of them, so that, +when they doubled the ness and pulled towards the Springs, they +discovered the enemy hurrying into their ships and preparing to push off +from the land. + +Now, this did not fall in with Erling's purpose at all, for he was well +aware that his little Swan could do nothing against such an overwhelming +force, so he directed his course towards the mouth of a small stream, +beside which there was a spit of sand, and, just behind it, a piece of +level land, of a few acres in extent, covered with short grass. The +river was deep at its mouth. About a hundred yards upstream it flowed +out of a rugged pass in the mountains or cliffs which hemmed in the +fiord. Into this dark spot the Northman rowed his vessel and landed +with his men. + +The vikings were much surprised at this manoeuvre, and seemed at a loss +how to act, for they immediately ceased their hurried embarkation and +held a consultation. + +"Methinks they are mad," said Skarpedin, on witnessing the movements of +the Swan. "But we will give them occasion to make use of all the spirit +that is in them. I had thought there were more men in the dale, but if +they be few they seem to be bold. They have wisely chosen their ground. +Rocks, however, will not avail them against a host like ours. Methinks +some of us will be in Valhalla to-night." + +Saying this Skarpedin drew up his men in order of battle on the little +plain before referred to, and advanced to the attack. Erling, on the +other hand, posted his men among the rocks in such a way that they could +command the approach to the pass, which their leader with a few picked +men defended. + +On perceiving the intention of the Danes to attack him, Erling's heart +was glad, because he now felt sure that to some extent he had them in +his power. If they had, on his first appearance, taken to their ships, +they might have easily escaped, or some of the smaller vessels might +have pulled up the river and attacked his ship, which, in that case, +would have had to meet them on unequal terms; but, now that they were +about to attack him on land, he knew that he could keep them in play as +long as he pleased, and that if they should, on the appearance of +reinforcements, again make for their ships, he could effectively harass +them, and retard their embarkation. + +Meditating on these things the young Norseman stood in front of his men +leaning on his battle-axe, and calmly surveying the approaching foe +until they were within a few yards of him. + +"Thorer," he said at length, raising his weapon slowly to his shoulder, +"take thou the man with the black beard, and leave yonder fellow with +the red hair to me." + +Thorer drew his sword and glanced along its bright blade without +replying. Indeed, there was scarce time for reply. Next moment the +combatants uttered a loud shout and met with a dire crash. For some +time the clash of steel, the yells of maddened men, the shrieks of the +wounded, and the wails of the dying, resounded in horrible commotion +among the echoing cliffs. The wisdom of Erling's tactics soon became +apparent. It was not until the onset was made, and the battle fairly +begun, that the men whom he had placed among the rocks above the +approach to the pass began to act. These now sent down such a shower of +huge stones and masses of rock that many of the foe were killed, and by +degrees a gap was made, so that those who were on the plain dared not +advance to the succour of those who were fighting in the pass. + +Seeing this, Erling uttered his war-cry, and, collecting his men +together, acted on the offensive. Wherever his battle-axe swung, or +Thorer's sword gleamed, there men fell, and others gave way, till at +last they were driven completely out of the pass and partly across the +plain. Erling took care, however, not to advance too far, although +Skarpedin, by retreating, endeavoured to entice him to do so; but drew +off his men by sound of horn, and returned to his old position--one man +only having been killed and a few wounded. + +Skarpedin now held a council of war with his chiefs, and from the length +of time they were about it, Erling was led to suspect that they did not +intend to renew the attack at the same point or in the same manner. He +therefore sent men to points of vantage on the cliffs to observe the +more distant movements of the enemy, while he remained to guard the +pass, and often gazed anxiously towards the ness, round which he +expected every minute to see sweeping the longships of Ulf and his +father. + + + +CHAPTER SIX. + +EVENING IN THE HALL--THE SCALD TELLS OF GUNDALF'S WOOING--THE FEAST +INTERRUPTED AND THE WAR CLOUDS THICKEN. + +It is necessary now that we should turn backwards a little in our story, +to that point where Erling left the hall at Ulfstede to listen to the +sad tale of Swart. + +Ulf and his friends, not dreaming of the troubles that were hanging over +them, continued to enjoy their evening meal and listen to the songs and +stories of the Scald, or to comment upon the doings of King Harald +Haarfager, and the prospects of good or evil to Norway that were likely +to result therefrom. + +At the point where we return to the hall, Ulf wore a very clouded brow +as he sat with compressed lips beside his principal guest. He grasped +the arm of his rude chair with his left hand, while his right held a +large and massive silver tankard. Haldor, on the other hand, was all +smiles and good humour. He appeared to have been attempting to soothe +the spirit of his fiery neighbour. + +"I tell thee, Ulf, that I have as little desire to see King Harald +succeed in subduing all Norway as thou hast, but in this world wise men +will act not according to what they wish so much, as according to what +is best. Already the King has won over or conquered most of the small +kings, and it seems to me that the rest will have to follow, whether +they like it or no. Common sense teaches submission where conquest +cannot be." + +"And does not patriotism teach that men may die?" said Ulf sternly. + +"Aye, when by warring with that end in view anything is to be gained for +one's country; but where the result would be, first, the embroiling of +one's district in prolonged bloody and hopeless warfare, and, after +that, the depriving one's family of its head and of the King's favour, +patriotism says that to die would be folly, not wisdom." + +"Tush, man; folk will learn to call thee Haldor the Mild. Surely years +are telling on thee. Was there ever anything in this world worth having +gained without a struggle?" + +"Thou knowest, Ulf, that I am not wont to be far from the front wherever +or whenever a struggle is thought needful, but I doubt the propriety of +it in the present case. The subject, however, is open to discussion. +The question is, whether it would be better for Norway that the kings of +Horlingdal should submit to the conqueror for the sake of the general +good, or buckle on the sword in the hope of retrieving what is lost. +Peace or war--that is the question." + +"I say war!" cried Ulf, striking the board so violently with his +clenched fist that the tankards and platters leaped and rang again. + +At this a murmur of applause ran round the benches of the friends and +housemen. + +"The young blades are ever ready to huzza over their drink at the +thought of fighting; but methinks it will not strengthen thy cause much, +friend Ulf, thus to frighten the women and spill the ale." + +Ulf turned round with a momentary look of anger at this speech. The man +who uttered it was a splendid specimen of a veteran warrior. His +forehead was quite bald, but from the sides and back of his head flowed +a mass of luxuriant silky hair which was white as the driven snow. His +features were eminently firm and masculine, and there was a hearty +good-humoured expression about the mouth, and a genial twinkle in his +eyes, especially in the wrinkled corners thereof, that rendered the +stout old man irresistibly attractive. His voice was particularly rich, +deep, and mellow, like that of a youth, and although his bulky frame +stooped a little from age, there was enough of his youthful vigour left +to render him a formidable foe, as many a poor fellow had learned to his +cost even in days but recently gone by. He was an uncle of Ulf, and on +a visit to the stede at that time. The frown fled from Ulf's brow as he +looked in the old man's ruddy and jovial countenance. + +"Thanks, Guttorm," said he, seizing his tankard, "thanks for reminding +me that grey hairs are beginning to sprinkle my beard; come, let us +drink success to the right, confusion to the wrong! thou canst not +refuse that, Haldor." + +"Nay," said Haldor, laughing; "nor will I refuse to fight in thy cause +and by thy side, be it right or wrong, when the Thing decides for war." + +"Well said, friend! but come, drink deeper. Why, I have taken thee down +three pegs already!" said Ulf, glancing into Haldor's tankard. "Ho! +Hilda; fetch hither more ale, lass, and fill--fill to the brim." The +toast was drunk with right good will by all--from Ulf down to the +youngest house-carle at the lowest end of the great hall. + +"And now, Guttorm," continued Ulf, turning to the bluff old warrior, +"since thou hast shown thy readiness to rebuke, let us see thy +willingness to entertain. Sing us a stave or tell us a saga, kinsman, +as well thou knowest how, being gifted with more than a fair share of +the scald's craft." + +The applause with which this proposal was received by the guests and +house-carles who crowded the hall from end to end proved that they were +aware of Guttorm's gifts, and would gladly hear him. Like a sensible +man he complied at once, without affecting that air of false diffidence +which is so common among modern songsters and story-tellers. + +"I will tell you," said the old man--having previously wet his lips at a +silver tankard, which was as bluff and genuine as himself--"of King +Gundalf's wooing. Many years have gone by since I followed him on +viking cruise, and Gundalf himself has long been feasting in Odin's +hall. I was a beardless youth when I joined him. King Gundalf of +Orkedal was a goodly man, stout and brisk, and very strong. He could +leap on his horse without touching stirrup with all his war gear on; he +could fight as well with his left hand as with his right, and his +battle-axe bit so deep that none who once felt its edge lived to tell of +its weight. He might well be called a Sea-king, for he seldom slept +under a sooty roof timber. Withal he was very affable to his men, +open-hearted, and an extremely handsome man. + +"One summer he ordered us to get ready to go on viking cruise. When we +were all a-boun we set sail with five longships and about four hundred +men, and fared away to Denmark, where we forayed and fought a great +battle with the inhabitants. King Gundalf gained the victory, +plundered, wasted, and burned far and wide in the land, and made +enormous booty. He returned with this to Orkedal. Here he found his +wife at the point of death, and soon after she died. Gundalf felt his +loss so much that he had no pleasure in Raumsdal after that. He +therefore took to his ships and went again a-plundering. We herried +first in Friesland, next in Saxland, and then all the way to Flanders; +so sings Halfred the scald:-- + + "`Gundalf's axe of shining steel + For the sly wolf left many a meal. + The ill-shaped Saxon corpses lay + Heap'd up--the witch-wife's horses' prey. + She rides by night, at pools of blood, + Where Friesland men in daylight stood, + Her horses slake their thirst, and fly + On to the field where Flemings lie.'" + +[Note. Ravens were the witch-wife's horses.] + +The old warrior half recited half sang these lines in a rich full voice, +and then paused a few seconds, while a slight murmur arose from the +earnest listeners around him. + +"Thereafter," resumed Guttorm, "we sailed to England, and ravaged far +and wide in the land. We sailed all the way north to Northumberland, +where we plundered, and thence to Scotland, where we marauded far and +wide. Then we went to the Hebrides and fought some battles, and after +that south to Man, which we herried. We ravaged far around in Ireland, +and steered thence to Bretland, which we laid waste with fire and +sword--also the district of Cumberland. Then we went to Valland, [the +west coast of France] from which we fared away for the south coast of +England, but missed it and made the Scilly Isles. After that we went to +Ireland again, and came to a harbour, into which we ran--but in a +friendly way, for we had as much plunder as our ships could carry. + +"Now, while we were there, a summons to a Thing went through the +country, and when the Thing was assembled, a queen called Gyda came to +it. She was a sister of Olaf Quarram, who was King of Dublin. Gyda was +very wealthy, and her husband had died that year. In the territory +there was a man called Alfin, who was a great champion and single-combat +man. He had paid his addresses to Gyda, but she gave for answer that +she would choose a husband for herself; and on that account the Thing +was assembled, that she might choose a husband. Alfin came there +dressed out in his best clothes, and there were many well-dressed men at +the meeting. Gundalf and some of his men had gone there also, out of +curiosity, but we had on our bad-weather clothes, and Gundalf wore a +coarse over-garment. We stood apart from the rest of the crowd, Gyda +went round and looked at each, to see if any appeared to her a suitable +man. Now when she came to where we were standing, she passed most of us +by with a glance; but when she passed me, I noticed that she turned half +round and gave me another look, which I have always held was a proof of +her good judgment. However, Gyda passed on, and when she came to King +Gundalf she stopped, looked at him straight in the face, and asked what +sort of a man he was. + +"He said, `I am called Gundalf, and am a stranger here!' + +"Gyda replies, `Wilt thou have me if I choose thee?' He answered, `I +will not say No to that;' then he asked her what her name was, and her +family and descent. + +"`I am called Gyda,' said she, `and am daughter of the King of Ireland, +and was married in this country to an earl who ruled over this district. +Since his death I have ruled over it, and many have courted me, but +none to whom I would choose to be married.' + +"She was a young and handsome woman. They afterwards talked over the +matter together and agreed, and so Gundalf and Gyda were betrothed. + +"Alfin was very ill pleased with this. It was the custom there, as it +is sometimes here, if two strove for anything, to settle the matter by +holm-gang. [Note: or single combat: so called because the combatants in +Norway went to a holm, or uninhabited isle, to fight.] And now Alfin +challenged Gundalf to fight about this business. The time and place of +combat were settled, and it was fixed that each should have twelve men. +I was one of the twelve on our side. When we met, Gundalf told us to do +exactly as we saw him do. He had a large axe, and went in advance of +us, and when Alfin made a desperate cut at him with his sword, he hewed +away the sword out of his hand, and with the next blow hit Alfin on the +crown with the flat of his axe and felled him. We all met next moment, +and each man did his best; but it was hard work, for the Irishmen fought +well, and two of them cut down two of our men, but one of these I +knocked down, and Gundalf felled the other. Then we bound them all +fast, and carried them to Gundalf's lodging. But Gundalf did not wish +to take Alfin's life. He ordered him to quit the country and never +again to appear in it, and he took all his property. In this way +Gundalf got Gyda in marriage, and he lived sometimes in England and +sometimes in Ireland. Thikskul the scald says in regard to this:-- + + "`King Gundalf woo'd Queen Gyda fair, + With whom no woman could compare, + And won her, too, with all her lands, + By force of looks and might of hands + From Ireland's green and lovely isle + He carried off the Queen in style. + He made proud Alfin's weapon dull, + And flattened down his stupid skull-- + This did the bold King Gundalf do + When he went o'er the sea to woo.'" + +The wholesale robbery and murder which was thus related by the old Norse +viking appeared quite a natural and proper state of things in the eyes +of all save two of those assembled in the hall, and the saga was +consequently concluded amid resounding applause. It is to be presumed +that, never having seen or heard of any other course of life, and having +always been taught that such doings were quite in accordance with the +laws of the land, the consciences of the Northmen did not trouble them. +At all events, while we do not for a moment pretend to justify their +doings, we think it right to point out that there must necessarily have +been a wide difference between their spirits and feelings, and the +spirits and feelings of modern pirates, who know that they are +deliberately setting at defiance the laws of both God and man. + +It has been said there were two in the hall at Ulfstede who did not +sympathise with the tale of the old warrior. The reader will scarce +require to be told that one of these was Hilda the Sunbeam. The other +was Christian the hermit. The old man, although an occasional visitor +at the stede, never made his appearance at meal-times, much less at the +nightly revels which were held there; but on that day he had arrived +with important news, just as Guttorm began his story, and would have +unceremoniously interrupted it had not one of the young house-carles, +who did not wish to lose the treat, detained him forcibly at the lower +end of the hall until it was ended. The moment he was released the +hermit advanced hastily, and told Ulf that from the door of his hut on +the cliff he had observed bands of men hastening in all directions down +the dale. + +"Thy news, old man, is no news," said Ulf; "the token for a Thing has +been sent out, and it is natural that the bonders should obey the +summons. We expect them. But come, it is not often thou favourest us +with thy company. Sit down by me, and take a horn of mead." + +The hermit shook his head. + +"I never taste strong liquor. Its tendency is to make wise men +foolish," he said. + +"Nay, then, thou wilt not refuse to eat. Here, Hilda, fetch thy friend +a platter." + +"I thank thee, but, having already supped, I need no more food. I came +but to bring what I deemed news." + +"Thou art churlish, old man," exclaimed Ulf angrily; "sit down and +drink, else--" + +"Come, come," interrupted Haldor, laying his hand on Ulf's arm, "Let the +old man be; he seems to think that he has something worth hearing to +tell of; let him have his say out in peace." + +"Go on," said Ulf gruffly. + +"Was the token sent out a baton or a split arrow?" asked the hermit. + +"A baton," said Ulf. + +"Then why," rejoined the other, "do men come to a peaceful Thing with +all their war gear on?" + +"What say ye? are they armed?" exclaimed Ulf, starting up. "This must +be looked to. Ho! my carles all, to arms--" + +At that moment there was a bustle at the lower end of the hall, and +Alric was seen forcing his way towards Ulf's high seat. + +"Father," he said eagerly, addressing Haldor, "short is the hour for +acting, and long the hour for feasting." + +Haldor cast his eyes upon his son and said-- + +"What now is in the way?" + +"The Danes," said Alric, "are on the fiord--more than six hundred men. +Skarpedin leads them. One of them pitched me into the sea, but I marked +his neck to keep myself in his memory! They have plundered and burnt at +the Springs, and Erling has gone away to attack them all by himself, +with only sixty house-carles. You will have to be quick, father." + +"Quick, truly," said Haldor, with a grim smile, as he drew tight the +buckle of his sword-belt. + +"Aye," said Ulf, "with six hundred Danes on the fiord, and armed men +descending the vale, methinks--" + +"Oh! I can explain that" cried Alric, with an arch smile; "Erling made +me change the baton for the split arrow when I was sent round with the +token." + +"That is good luck," said Haldor, while Ulf's brow cleared a little as +he busked himself for the fight; "we shall need all our force." + +"Aye, and all our time too," said Guttorm Stoutheart, as he put on his +armour with the cheerful air of a man who dons his wedding dress. +"Come, my merry men all. Lucky it is that my longships are at hand just +now ready loaded with stones:-- + + "`O! a gallant sight it is to me, + The warships darting o'er the sea, + A pleasant sound it is to hear + The war trump ringing loud and clear.'" + +Ulf and his friends and house-carles were soon ready to embark, for in +those days the Norseman kept his weapons ready to his hands, being +accustomed to sudden assaults and frequent alarms. They streamed out of +the hall, and while some collected stones, to be used as missiles, +others ran down to the shore to launch the ships. Meanwhile Ulf, +Haldor, Guttorm, and other chief men held a rapid consultation, as they +stood and watched the assembling of the men of the district. + +It was evident that the split arrow had done its duty. From the grassy +mound on which they stood could be seen, on the one hand, the dark +recesses of Horlingdal, which were lost in the mists of distance among +the glaciers on the fells; and, on the other hand, the blue fiord with +branching inlets and numerous holms, while the skerries of the coast +filled up the background--looming faint and far off on the distant sea. +In whatever direction the eye was turned armed men were seen. From +every distant gorge and valley on the fells they issued, singly, or in +twos and threes. As they descended the dale they formed into groups and +larger bands; and when they gained the more level grounds around +Haldorstede, the heavy tread of their hastening footsteps could be +distinctly heard, while the sun--for although near midnight now it was +still above the horizon--flashed from hundreds of javelins, spears, +swords, and bills, glittered on steel headpieces and the rims of +shields, or trickled fitfully on suits of scale armour and shirts of +ring mail. On the fiord, boats came shooting forth from every inlet or +creek, making their appearance from the base of precipitous cliffs or +dark-mouthed caves as if the very mountains were bringing forth warriors +to aid in repelling the foe. These were more sombre than those on the +fells, because the sun had set to them by reason of the towering hills, +and the fiord was shrouded in deepest gloom. But all in the approaching +host--on water and land--were armed from head to foot, and all converged +towards Ulfstede. + +When they were all assembled they numbered five hundred fighting men-- +and a stouter or more valiant band never went forth to war. Six +longships were sufficient to embark them. Three of these were of the +largest size--having thirty oars on each side, and carrying a hundred +men. One of them belonged to Haldor, one to Ulf, and one--besides +several smaller ships--to Guttorm, who chanced to be on viking cruise at +the time he had turned aside to visit his kinsman. The warlike old man +could scarce conceal his satisfaction at his unexpected good fortune in +being so opportunely at hand when hard blows were likely to be going! +Two of the other ships were cutters, similar to Erling's Swan, and +carrying sixty men each, and one was a little larger, holding about +eighty men. It belonged to Glumm the Gruff; whose gruffness, however, +had abated considerably, now that there was a prospect of what we +moderns would call "letting the steam off" in a vigorous manner. + +Soon the oars were dipped in the fiord, and the sails were set, for a +light favourable wind was blowing. In a short time the fleet rounded +the ness, and came in sight of the ground where Erling and Skarpedin +were preparing to renew the combat. + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN. + +THE TALE RETURNS TO THE SPRINGS--DESCRIBES A GREAT LAND FIGHT, AND TELLS +OF A PECULIAR STYLE OF EXTENDING MERCY TO THE VANQUISHED. + +In a previous chapter we left Skarpedin discussing with his chiefs the +best mode of attacking the small band of his opponents in the pass of +the Springs. They had just come to a decision, and were about to act on +it, when they suddenly beheld six warships sweeping round the ness. + +"Now will we have to change our plans," said Skarpedin. + +Thorvold agreed with this, and counselled getting on board their ships +and meeting the enemy on the water; but the other objected, because he +knew that while his men were in the act of embarking, Erling would sally +forth and kill many of them before they could get away. + +"Methinks," said he, "I will take forty of my best men, and try to +entice that fox out of his hole, before he has time to see the ships." + +"Grief only will come of that," says Thorvold. + +Skarpedin did not reply, but choosing forty of his stoutest carles he +went to the pass and defied Erling to come out and fight. + +"Now here am I, Erling, with forty men. Wilt thou come forth? or is thy +title of Bold ill bestowed, seeing thou hast more men than I?" + +"Ill should I deserve the title," replies Erling, "if I were to meet +thee with superior force." + +With that he chose thirty men, and, running down to the plain, gave the +assault so fiercely that men fell fast on every side, and the Danes gave +back a little. When they saw this, and that Erling and Thorer hewed men +down wherever they went, the Danes made a shield circle round Skarpedin, +as was the custom when kings went into battle; because they knew that if +he fell there would be no one so worthy to guide them in the fight with +the approaching longships. Thus they retreated, fighting. When Erling +and his men had gone far enough, they returned to the pass, and cheered +loudly as they went, both because of the joy of victory, and because +they saw the warships of their friends coming into the bay. + +King Haldor and his companions at once ran their ships on the beach near +the mouth of the river, and, landing, drew them up, intending to fight +on shore. Skarpedin did not try to prevent this, for he was a bold man, +and thought that with so large a force he could well manage to beat the +Northmen, if they would fight on level ground. He therefore drew up his +men in order of battle at one end of the plain, and Haldor the Fierce, +to whom was assigned the chief command, drew up the Northmen at the +other end. Erling joined them with his band, and then it was seen that +the two armies were not equal--that of the Northmen being a little +smaller than the other. + +Then Haldor said, "Let us draw up in a long line that they may not turn +our flanks, as they have most men." + +This was done, and Haldor advanced into the plain and set up his banner. +The Danes in like manner advanced and planted their banner, and both +armies rushed to the attack, which was very sharp and bloody. Wherever +the battle raged most fiercely there King Haldor and Erling were seen, +for they were taller by half a head than most other men. Being clothed +alike in almost every respect, they looked more like brothers than +father and son. Each wore a gilt helmet, and carried a long shield, the +centre of which was painted white, but round the edge was a rim of +burnished steel. Each had a sword by his side, and carried a javelin to +throw, but both depended chiefly on their favourite weapon, the +battle-axe, for, being unusually strong, they knew that few men could +withstand the weight of a blow from that. The defensive armour of +father and son was also the same--a shirt of leather, sewed all over +with small steel rings. Their legs were clothed in armour of the same +kind, and a mantle of cloth hung from the shoulders of each. + +Most of the chief men on both sides were armed in a similar way, though +not quite so richly, and with various modifications; for instance, the +helmet of Thorvold was of plain steel, and for ornament had the tail of +the ptarmigan as its crest. Skarpedin's, on the other hand, was quite +plain, but partly gilded; his armour was of pieces of steel like fish +scales sewed on a leathern shirt, and over his shoulders he wore as a +mantle the skin of a wolf. His chief weapon was a bill--a sort of hook +or short scythe fixed to a pole, and it was very deadly in his hands. +Most of the carles and thralls were content to wear thick shirts of wolf +and other skins, which were found to offer good resistance to a +sword-cut, and some of them had portions of armour of various kinds. +Their arms were spears, bows, arrows with stone heads, javelins, swords, +bills, and battle-axes and shields. + +When both lines met there was a hard fight. The combatants first threw +their spears and javelins, and then drew their swords and went at each +other in the greatest fury. In the centre Haldor and Erling went +together in advance of their banner, cutting down on both sides of them. +Old Guttorm Stoutheart went in advance of the right wing, also hewing +down right and left. With him went Kettle Flatnose, for that ambitious +thrall could not be made to remember his position, and was always +putting himself in front of his betters in war; yet it is due to him to +say that he kept modestly in the background in time of peace. To these +was opposed Thorvold, with many of the stoutest men among the Danes. + +Now, old Guttorm and Kettle pressed on so hard that they were almost +separated from their men; and while Guttorm was engaged with a very tall +and strong man, whom he had wounded severely more than once, another +stout fellow came between him and Kettle, and made a cut at him with his +sword. Guttorm did not observe him, and it seemed as if the old +Stoutheart should get his death-wound there; but the thrall chanced to +see what was going on. He fought with a sort of hook, like a +reaping-hook, fixed at the end of a spear handle, with the cutting edge +inside. The men of Horlingdal used to laugh at Kettle because of his +fondness for this weapon, which was one of his own contriving; but when +they did so, he was wont to reply that it was better than most other +weapons, because it could not only make his friends laugh, but his +enemies cry! + +With this hook the thrall made a quick blow at the Dane; the point of it +went down through his helmet into his brain, and that was his deathblow. + +"Well done, Kettle!" cried old Guttorm, who had just cleft the skull of +his opponent with his sword. + +At this Thorvold ran forward and said: + +"Well done it may be, but well had it been for the doer had it not been +done. Come on, thou flatnose!" + +"Now, thou must be a remarkably clever man," retorted Kettle, with much +of that rich tone of voice which, many centuries later, came to be known +as "the Irish brogue", "for it is plain ye know my name without being +told it!" + +So saying, with a sudden quick movement he got his hook round Thorvold's +neck. + +"That is an ugly grip," said Thorvold, making a fierce cut at the haft +with his sword; but Kettle pulled the hook to him, and with it came the +head, and that was Thorvold's end. + +While this was going on at the right wing, the left wing was led by Ulf +of Romsdal and Glumm the Gruff; but Ulf's men were not so good as +Haldor's men, for he was not so wise a man as Haldor, and did not manage +his house so well. + +It was a common saying among the people of Horlingdal that Haldor had +under him the most valiant men in Norway--and as the master was, so were +the men. Haldor never went to sea with less than a fully-manned ship of +thirty benches of rowers, and had other large vessels and men to man +them as well. One of his ships had thirty-two benches of rowers, and +could carry at least two hundred men. He had always at home on his farm +thirty slaves or thralls, besides other serving people, and about two +hundred house-carles. He used to give his thralls a certain day's work; +but after it was done he gave them leave and leisure to work in the +twilight and at night for themselves. He gave them arable land to sow +corn in, and let them apply their crops to their own use. He fixed a +certain quantity of work, by the doing of which his slaves might work +themselves free; and this put so much heart into them that many of them +worked themselves free in one year, and all who had any luck or pluck +could work themselves free in three years. Ulf did this too, but he was +not so wise nor yet so kind in his way of doing it. With the money thus +procured Haldor bought other slaves. Some of his freed people he taught +to work in the herring fishery; to others he taught some handicraft; in +short, he helped all of them to prosperity; so that many of the best of +them remained fast by their old master, although free to take service +where they chose. Thus it was that his men were better than those of +his neighbour. + +Ulf's men were, nevertheless, good stout fellows, and they fought +valiantly; but it so happened that the wing of the enemy to which they +were opposed was commanded by Skarpedin, of whom it was said that he was +equal to any six men. In spite, therefore, of the courage and the +strength of Ulf and Glumm, the Northmen in that part of the field began +slowly to give back. Ulf and Glumm were so maddened at this that they +called their men cowards, and resolved to go forward till they should +fall. Uttering their war-cry, they made a desperate charge, hewing down +men like stalks of corn; but although this caused the Danes to give way +a little, they could not advance, not being well backed, but stood +fighting, and merely kept their ground. + +Now it had chanced shortly before this, that Haldor stayed his hand and +drew back with Erling. They went out from the front of the fight, and +observed the left wing giving way. + +"Come, let us aid them," cried Haldor. + +Saying this he ran to the left wing, with Erling by his side. They two +uttered a war-cry that rose high above the din of battle like a roar of +thunder, and, rushing to the front, fell upon the foe. Their gilt +helmets rose above the crowd, and their ponderous axes went swinging +round their heads, continually crashing down on the skulls of the Danes. +With four such men as Haldor, Erling, Ulf and Glumm in front, the left +wing soon regained its lost ground and drove back the Danes. Nothing +could withstand the shock. Skarpedin saw what had occurred, and +immediately hastened to the spot where Haldor stood, sweeping down all +who stood in his way. + +"I have been searching for thee, Erling," he cried, going up to Haldor, +and launching a javelin. + +Haldor caught it on his shield, which it pierced through, but did him no +hurt. + +"Mistaken thou art, but thou hast found me now," cried Erling, thrusting +his father aside and leaping upon the Dane. + +Skarpedin changed his bill to his left hand, drew his sword, and made +such a blow at his adversary, that the point cut right through his +shield. With a quick turn of the shield, Erling broke the sword short +off at the hilt. Skarpedin seized his bill and thrust so fiercely that +it also went through the shield and stuck fast. Erling forced the lower +end or point of his shield down into the earth, and so held it fast, +dropped his axe, drew his sword, and made it flash so quick round his +head that no one could see the blade. It fell upon Skarpedin's neck and +gave him a grievous wound, cutting right through his armour and deep +into his shoulder blade. + +A great cry arose at this. The Danes made a rush towards their chief, +and succeeded in dragging him out of the fight. They put him on his +shield and bore him off to his ship, which was launched immediately. +This was the turning-point in the day. Everywhere the Danes fled to +their ships pursued by the victors. Some managed to launch their +vessels, others were not so fortunate, and many fell fighting, while a +few were taken prisoners. + +Foreseeing that this would be the result, Haldor and Erling called off +their men, hastened on board their ships, and gave chase, while the rest +of the force looked after the prisoners and the booty, and dressed their +own and their comrades' wounds. + +"A bloody day this," said Ulf to Guttorm, as the latter came up, wiping +the blade of his sword. + +"I have seen worse," observed the old warrior, carefully returning his +weapon to its scabbard. + +"The Danes will long remember it," observed Glumm. "The ravens will +have a good feast to-night." + +"And Odin's halls a few more tenants," said Guttorm: + + "The Danes came here all filled with greed, + And left their flesh the crows to feed. + +"But what is to be done with these?" he added, pointing to the +prisoners, about twenty of whom were seated on a log with their feet +tied together by a long rope, while their hands were loose. + +"Kill them, I suppose," said Ulf. + +There were thirty men seated there, and although they heard the words, +they did not show by a single glance that they feared to meet their +doom. + +Just then Swart of the Springs came up. He had a great axe in his +hands, and was very furious. + +"Thou hast killed and burned my wife, children, and homestede," he said +fiercely, addressing the prisoner who sat at the end of the log, "but +thou shalt never return to Denmark to tell it." + +He cut at him with the axe as he spoke, and the man fell dead. One +after another Swart killed them. There was one who looked up and said-- + +"I will stick this fish bone that I have in my hand into the earth, if +it be so that I know anything after my head is cut off." + +His head was immediately cut off, but the fish bone fell from his hand. + +Beside him there sat a very handsome young man with long hair, who +twisted his hair over his head, stretched out his neck, and said, "Don't +make my hair bloody." + +A man took the hair in his hands and held it fast. Then Swart hewed +with his axe, but the Dane twitched his head back so strongly, that he +who was holding his hair fell forward; the axe cut off both his hands, +and stuck fast in the earth. + +"Who is that handsome man?" asked Ulf. + +The man replied with look of scorn, "I am Einar, the son of King Thorkel +of Denmark; and know thou for a certainty that many shall fall to avenge +my death." + +Ulf said, "Art thou certainly Thorkel's son? Wilt thou now take thy +life and peace?" + +"That depends," replied the Dane, "upon who it is that offers it." + +"He offers who has the power to give it--Ulf of Romsdal." + +"I will take it," says he, "from Ulf's hands." + +Upon that the rope was loosed from his feet, but Swart, whose vengeance +was still unsatisfied, exclaimed-- + +"Although thou shouldst give all these men life and peace, King Ulf, yet +will I not suffer Einar to depart from this place with life." + +So saying he ran at him with uplifted axe, but one of the viking +prisoners threw himself before Swart's feet, so that he tumbled over +him, and the axe fell at the feet of a viking named Gills. Gills caught +the axe and gave Swart his death-wound. + +Then said Ulf, "Gills, wilt thou accept life?" + +"That will I," said he, "if thou wilt give it to all of us." + +"Loose them from the rope," said Ulf. + +This was done, and the men were set free. + +Eighteen of the Danish vikings were killed, and twelve got their lives +upon that occasion. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT. + +TELLS OF DISCUSSIONS AND EXCITING DEEDS AT ULFSTEDE. + +While the fight at the Springs which we have just described was going +on, Christian the hermit sat in the hall at Ulfstede conversing with +Hilda and Dame Astrid, and some of the other women. All the fighting +men of the place had been taken away--only one or two old men and Alric +were left behind--for Ulf, in his impetuosity, had forgotten to leave a +guard at home. + +"I hope it will fare well with our men at the Springs," said Hilda, +looking up with an anxious expression from the mantle with which her +nimble fingers were busy. + +"I hope so too," said Christian, "though I would rather that there had +been no occasion to fight." + +"No occasion to fight!" exclaimed Alric, who was dressing the feathers +on an arrow which he had made to replace the one he lost in shooting at +the Dane,--and the losing of which, by the way, he was particularly +careful to bring to remembrance as often as opportunity offered-- +sometimes whether opportunity offered or not. "No occasion to fight! +What would be the use of weapons if there were no fighting! Where +should we get our plunder if there were no fighting, and our slaves? +why, what would Northmen find to _do_ if there were no fighting?" + +The hermit almost laughed at the impetuosity of the boy as he replied-- + +"It would take a wiser head than mine, lad, to answer all these +questions, more particularly to answer them to thy satisfaction. +Notwithstanding, it remains true that peace is better than war." + +"That may be so," said Dame Astrid; "but it seems to me that war is +necessary, and what is necessary must be right." + +"I agree with that," said Ada, with a toss of her pretty head--for it +would seem that that method of expressing contempt for an adversary's +opinion was known to womankind at least a thousand years ago, if not +longer. "But _thou_ dost not fight, Christian: what has war done to +thee that thou shouldst object to it so?" + +"What has war done for me?" exclaimed the old man, springing up with +sudden excitement, and clasping his lean hands tight together; "has it +not done all that it could do? Woman, it has robbed me of all that +makes life sweet, and left me only what I did not want. It has robbed +me of wife and children, and left a burdened life. Yet no--I sin in +speaking thus. Life was left because there was something worth living +for; something still to be done: the truth of God to be proclaimed; the +good of man to be compassed. But sometimes I forget this when the past +flashes upon me, and I forget that it is my duty as well as my joy to +say, `The Lord gave, and the Lord hath taken away; blessed be the name +of the Lord.'" + +The old man sat down again, and leaned his brow on his hand. The women, +although sympathetic, were puzzled by some of his remarks, and therefore +sat in silence for a little, but presently the volatile Ada looked up +and said-- + +"What thinkest thou, Hilda, in regard to war?" + +"I know not what to think," replied Hilda. + +"Nay, then, thy spirit must be flying from thee, for thou wert not wont +to be without an opinion on most things. Why, even Erling's sister, +Ingeborg, has made up her mind about war I doubt not, though she is too +modest to express it." + +Now this was a sly hit at Ingeborg, who was sitting by, for she was well +known to have a shrewish temper, and to be self-willed and opinionated, +in so much that most men kept out of her way. She was very unlike +Erling, or her father and mother, or her little sisters, in this +respect. + +"I can express my opinion well enough when I have a mind," said Ingeborg +sharply; "and as to war, it stands to reason that a Sea-king's daughter +must approve of a Sea-king's business. Why, the beautiful cloths, and +gold and jewels, that are so plentiful in the dale, would never have +delighted our eyes if our men had not gone on viking cruise, and fallen +in with those rich traders from the far south lands. Besides, war makes +our men brisk and handsome." + +"Aye," exclaimed Alric, laughing, "especially when they get their noses +cut off and their cheeks gashed!" + +"Sometimes it takes them from us altogether," observed a poor woman of +the household, the widow of a man who had been slain on a viking cruise, +after having had his eyes put out, and being otherwise cruelly treated. + +"That is the other side of the question," said Astrid. "Of course +everything has two sides. We cannot change the plans of the gods. +Sunshine and rain, heat and cold, come as they are sent. We must accept +them as they are sent." + +"That is true," said Christian, "and thou sayest wisely that we must +accept things as they are sent; but can it be said that war is sent to +us when we rush into it of our own accord? Defensive warfare, truly, is +right--else would this world be left in the sole possession of the +wicked; but aggressive warfare is not right. To go on viking cruise and +take by force that which is not our own is sinful. There is a good way +to prove the truth of these things. Let me ask the question, Astrid,-- +How would thy husband like to have thee and all his property taken from +him, and Ulfstede burned about his ears?" + +"Methinks he would like it ill." + +"Then why should he do that to others which he would not like done to +himself?" + +"These are strange words," said Astrid in surprise; "I know not that I +have ever heard the like before." + +"Truly no," said Christian, "because the Word of God has not yet been +sounded in the dale. Thou saidst just now that we cannot change the +plans of the gods; that would be true if ye had said `the plans of God,' +for there is but one God, and His ways are unchangeable. But what if +God had revealed some of His plans to man, and told him that this +revelation was sufficient to guide him in his walk through this life, +and to prepare him for the next?" + +"Then would I think it man's wisdom to follow that guide carefully," +replied Astrid. + +"Such plans do exist, such a revelation has been made," said the hermit, +"and the name that stands on the forefront of it is Jesus Christ." + +As he spoke the hermit drew from his bosom a scroll of parchment, which +he unrolled slowly. This, he said, was a copy, made by himself, of part +of the Gospel. He had meant, he said, to have copied the whole of it, +but war had put an end to his labours at the same time that it deprived +him of his earthly joys, and drove him from his native land to be a +wanderer on the earth. + +"But if," he continued, "the Lord permits me to preach His gospel of +truth and love and peace in Norway, I shall count the sufferings of this +present time as nothing compared with the glory yet to be revealed." + +"Christian," said Astrid, who appeared to have been struck by some +reminiscence, "methinks I have heard Ulf talk of a religion which the +men of the south profess. He saw something of it when he went on viking +cruise to the great fiord that runs far into the land, [the +Mediterranean] and if my memory is faithful he said that they called +themselves by a name that sounds marvellously like thine own." + +"I suppose Ulf must have met with Christians, after whom I call myself, +seeing that my own name is of consequence to no one," said the hermit. +"What said he about them?" + +"That they were a bad set," replied Astrid,--"men who professed love to +their fellows, but were guilty of great cruelty to all who did not +believe their faith." + +"All who call themselves Christians deserve not the name, Astrid; some +are hypocrites and deceivers, others are foolish and easily deceived." + +"They all make the same profession, I am told," said Dame Astrid. + +"The men of Norway are warriors," returned the hermit, "and all profess +courage,--nay, when they stand in the ranks and go forth to war, they +all show the same stern face and front, so that one could not know but +that all were brave; yet are they not all courageous, as thou knowest +full well. Some, it may be very few, but some are cowards at heart, and +it only requires the test of the fight to prove them. So is it with +professing Christians. I would gladly tell the story of Jesus if ye +will hear me, Dame Astrid." + +The matron's curiosity was excited, so she expressed her willingness to +listen; and the hermit, reading passages from his manuscript copy of the +New Testament, and commenting thereon, unfolded the "old old story" of +God's wonderful love to man in Jesus Christ. + +While he was yet in the midst of his discourse the door of the hall was +burst violently open, and one of the serving-girls, rushing in, +exclaimed that the Danes were approaching from the fiord! + +The Danes referred to composed a small party who had been sent off in a +cutter by Skarpedin Redbeard to survey the coast beyond Horlingdal +fiord, as he had intended, after herrying that district, to plunder +still farther north. This party in returning had witnessed, unseen, the +departure of the fleet of Northmen. Thinking it probable that the place +might have been left with few protectors, they waited until they deemed +it safe to send out scouts, and, on their report being favourable, they +landed to make an attack on the nearest village or farm. + +On hearing the news all was uproar in Ulfstede. The women rushed about +in a distracted state, imploring the few helpless old men about the +place to arm and defend them. To do these veteran warriors justice they +did their best. They put the armour that was brought to them on their +palsied limbs, but shook their heads sadly, for they felt that although +they might die in defence of the household, they could not save it. + +Meanwhile Christian and Alric proved themselves equal to the occasion. +The former, although advanced in years, retained much of his strength +and energy; and the latter, still inflated with the remembrance of the +fact that he had actually drawn blood from a full-grown bearded Dane, +and deeply impressed with the idea that he was the only able-bodied +warrior in Ulfstede at this crisis, resolved to seize the opportunity +and prove to the whole world that his boasting was at all events not +"empty!" + +"The first thing to be done is to bar the doors," he cried, starting up +on hearing the serving-girl's report. "Thou knowest how to do it, +Christian; run to the south door, I will bar the north." + +The hermit smiled at the lad's energy, but he was too well aware of the +importance of speed to waste time in talking. He dropped his outer +garment and ran to the south door, which was very solid. Closing it, +and fastening the ponderous wooden bar which stretched diagonally across +it, he turned and ran to the chamber in which the weapons were kept. On +the way he was arrested by a cry from Alric-- + +"Here! here, quick, Christian, else we are lost!" + +The hermit sprang to the north door with the agility of a youth. He was +just in time. Poor Alric, despite the strength of his bold heart and +will, had not strength of muscle enough to close the door, which had +somehow got jammed. Through the open doorway Christian could see a band +of Danish vikings running towards the house at full speed. He flung the +door forward with a crash, and drew the bar across just as the vikings +ran against it. + +"Open, open without delay!" cried a voice outside, "else will we tear +out the heart of every man and child under this roof." + +"We will not open; we will defend ourselves to the last; our trust is in +God," replied Christian. + +"And as to tearing out our hearts," cried Alric, feeling emboldened now +that the stout door stood between him and his foes, "if ye do not make +off as fast as ye came, we will punch out your eyes and roast your +livers." + +The reply to this was a shower of blows on the door, so heavy that the +whole building shook beneath them, and Alric almost wished that his +boastful threat had been left unsaid. He recollected at that moment, +however, that there was a hole under the eaves of the roof just above +the door. It had been constructed for the purpose of preventing attacks +of this kind. The boy seized his bow and arrows and dashed up the +ladder that led to the loft above the hall. On it he found one of the +old retainers of the stede struggling up with a weighty iron pot, from +which issued clouds of steam. + +"Let me pass, old Ivor; what hast thou there?" + +"Boiling water to warm them," gasped Ivor, "I knew we should want it ere +long. Finn is gone to the loft above the south door with another pot." + +Alric did not wait to hear the end of this answer, but pushing past the +old man, hastened to the trap-door under the eaves and opened it. He +found, however, that he could not use his bow in the constrained +position necessary to enable him to shoot through the hole. In +desperation he seized a barrel that chanced to be at hand, and +overturned its contents on the heads of the foe. It happened to contain +rye-flour, and the result was that two of the assailants were nearly +blinded, while two others who stood beside them burst into a loud laugh, +and, seizing the battle-axes which the others had been using, continued +their efforts to drive in the door. By this time old Ivor had joined +Alric. He set down the pot of boiling water by the side of the hole, +and at once emptied its contents on the heads of the vikings, who +uttered a terrific yell and leaped backward as the scalding water flowed +over their heads and shoulders. A similar cry from the other door of +the house told that the defence there had been equally successful. +Almost at the same moment Alric discovered a small slit in the roof +through which he could observe the enemy. He quickly sent through it an +arrow, which fixed itself in the left shoulder of one of the men. This +had the effect of inducing the attacking party to draw off for the +purpose of consultation. + +The breathing-time thus afforded to the assailed was used in +strengthening their defences and holding a hurried council of war. +Piling several heavy pieces of furniture against the doors, and +directing the women to make additions to these, Christian drew Alric +into the hall, where the ancient retainers were already assembled. + +"It will cost them a long time and much labour to drive in the doors, +defended as they are," said the hermit. + +"They will not waste time nor labour upon them," said Ivor, shaking his +hoary head. "What think ye, Finn?" + +The women, who had crowded round the men, looked anxiously at Finn, who +was a man of immense bulk, and had been noted for strength in his +younger days, but who was now bent almost double with age. "Fire will +do the work quicker than the battle-axe," answered Finn, with grim +smile, which did not improve the expression of a countenance already +disfigured by the scars of a hundred fights, and by the absence of an +eye--long ago gouged out and left to feed the ravens of a foreign shore! +"If this had only come to pass a dozen years ago," he added, while a +gleam of light illumined the sound eye, "I might have gone off to +Valhalla with a straight hack and some credit. But mayhap a good onset +will straighten it yet, who knows?--and I do feel as if I had strength +left to send at least _one_ foe out of the world before me." + +Ivor the Old nodded. "Yes," he said; "I think they will burn us out." + +"I had already feared this," said Christian, with a look of perplexity. +"What wouldst thou recommend should be done, Ivor?" + +"Nothing more can be done than to kill as many as possible before we +die." + +"I pray the Lord to help us in our extremity," said Christian; "but I +believe it to be His will to help those who are willing to help +themselves, depending upon Him for strength, courage, and victory. It +may be that Ulf and his men will soon return from the Springs, so that +if we could only hold out for a short time all might be well. Have ye +nothing to suggest?" + +"As to Ulf and the men returning from the Springs," said Finn, "there is +small chance of that before morning. With regard to holding out, I know +of nothing that will cause fire to burn slow once it is well kindled. +An hour hence and Ulfstede will be in ashes, as that sound surely +tells." + +He referred to a crashing blow which occurred just then at the north +door. Nearly all present knew full well that it was the first bundle of +a pile of faggots with which the assailants meant to set the house on +fire. + +"Had this arm retained but a little of the strength it once knew," +continued Finn bitterly, as he stretched out the huge but withered limb, +"things had not come to this pass so quickly. I remember the day, now +forty years ago, when on the roof of this very house I stood alone with +my bow and kept thirty men at bay for two full hours. But I could not +now draw an arrow of Alric's little bow to its head, to save the lives +of all present." + +"But _I_ can do it," cried Alric, starting forward suddenly; "and if +thou wilt show me the window in the roof I will--" + +"Brave boy," said old Ivor, with a kindly smile, as he laid his hand on +Alric's head, "thy heart is large, and it is sad that one so full of +promise should come to such an end; but it needs not that ye should fall +before thy time. These shafts may do against the crows, but they would +avail nothing against men in mail." + +"Is there not a warrior's bow in the house?" asked Christian quickly. + +"There is," replied Ivor, "but who will use it?" + +"I will." + +"Thou?" exclaimed Ivor, with a slight touch of contempt in his tone. + +"Hold thy peace, Ivor," said Hilda quickly. "This man has saved my life +once, as thou knowest, and well assured am I that what he undertakes to +do he will accomplish." + +"Now thanks to thee, Hilda, for that," said the hermit heartily; "not +that I boast of being sure to accomplish what I undertake, yet I never +offer to attempt what I have not some reasonable hope of being able to +do. But it is not strange that this old warrior should doubt of the +courage or capacity of one who preaches the gospel of peace. +Nevertheless, when I was a youth I fought in the army of the great +Thorfin, and was somewhat expert in the use of the bow. It is possible +that some of my ancient skill may remain, and I am willing to use it in +a good cause. I pray thee, therefore, let us not waste more time in +useless talk, but fetch me a bow and quiver, and show me the window in +the roof." + +Ivor went at once to the place where the armour was kept, and brought +out the desired weapons, which he placed in the hands of the hermit, and +watched his mode of handling them with some curiosity. Christian, +unconscious of the look, strung the bow and examined one of the arrows +with the air of a man who was thoroughly accustomed to such weapons. +Ivor regarded him with increased respect as he conducted him to the +loft, and opened the window. + +The hermit at once stepped out, and was instantly observed by the Danes, +who of course seized the opportunity and let fly several arrows at him, +which grazed him or stuck quivering in the roof close to the spot where +he stood. He was not slow to reply. One of the vikings, who was +approaching the house at the moment with a bundle of faggots on his +back, received a shaft in his shoulder, which caused him to drop his +bundle and fly to the woods, where he took shelter behind a tree. +Almost before that shaft had reached its mark another was on the string, +and, in another instant, transfixed the biceps muscle of the right arm +of one of the vikings who was preparing to discharge an arrow. He also +sought shelter behind a tree, and called to a comrade to come and assist +him to extract the shaft. + +"Mine ancient skill," said the hermit in an undertone, as if the remark +were made half to himself and half to Ivor, whose head appeared at the +window, and whose old countenance was wrinkled with a grin of delight at +this unexpected display of prowess; "mine ancient skill, it would seem, +has not deserted me, for which I am thankful, for it is an awful thing, +Ivor, more awful than thou thinkest, to send a human being into eternity +unforgiven. I am glad, therefore, to be able thus to render our +assailants unfit for war without taking away their lives--ha! that was +better aimed than usual," he added, as an arrow passed through his +jerkin, and stuck deep into the roof. "The man shoots well, he would +soon end the fight if I did not--stop--that." + +At the second-last word the hermit bent his bow; at the last, which was +uttered with emphasis, he let the arrow fly, and sent it through the +left hand of his adversary, who instantly dropped his bow. At the same +moment it seemed as though the whole band of vikings had become suddenly +convinced that they stood exposed to the shafts of a man who could use +them with unerring certainty, for they turned with one consent and fled +into the woods--each man seeking shelter behind the nearest tree. + +Here they called to one another to stand forth and shoot at the hermit. + +"Go thou, Arne," cried the leader; "thine aim is true. Surely one old +man is not to keep us all at bay. If my left hand were unscathed I +would not trouble thee to do it, thou knowest." + +"I have no desire to get an arrow in mine eye," cried Arne; "see, I did +but show the tip of my right elbow just now, and the skin of it is cut +up as though the crows had pecked it." + +In the excess of his wrath Arne extended his clenched fist and shook it +at the hermit, who instantly transfixed it with an arrow, causing the +foolish man to howl with pain and passion. + +"I have always held and acted on the opinion," said Christian to Ivor, +who was now joined by his comrade Finn, "that whatever is worth doing at +all, is worth doing well. Thou seest," he continued, wiping his brow +with the sleeve of his coat, "it is only by being expert in the use of +this weapon that I have succeeded in driving bark the Danes without the +loss of life. There is indeed a passage in the Book of God (which I +hope to be spared to tell thee more about in time to come), where this +principle of thoroughness in all things is implied, if not absolutely +taught--namely, `Whatever thy hand findeth to do, do it with thy +might.'" + +"A just maxim," said Finn, shading his one eye with his hands and gazing +earnestly into the woods, "and if acted upon, makes a man fit for every +duty that falls upon him; but it seems to me that while we are talking +here, there is some movement going on. See, Christian (since that is +thy name), they are retiring in haste, and exposing themselves. Now, I +pray thee, as thine eye is so sure, do drop a shaft on the nape of +yonder fellow's neck, that we may have something to show of this night's +work." + +"I told thee, Finn, that my desire is to avoid taking life." + +"Humph," said Finn testily, "whatever thy desire may be matters little +now, for he is beyond range. Hark! That shout accounts for the flight +of the Danes. Ulf must have returned." + +As he spoke, a loud cry, as if of men in conflict, arose from the fiord. +Immediately after, the vikings who had not already taken to flight left +their places of shelter and dashed into the underwood. The hermit let +them go without moving a hand; but Alric, who was actuated by no +merciful principles, suddenly opened the north door, sprang out, and let +fly an arrow with so true an aim that it struck one of the Danes between +the shoulders. Fortunately for him, the Dane had, in accordance with +the usual custom of the time, hung his shield on his back when he took +to flight, so that the shaft rebounded from it and fell harmless to the +ground. + +By this time the hermit had descended from the roof. Running out he +seized Alric, and, dragging him into the house, reclosed the door. + +"Ye know not, foolish boy, whether or not this is Ulf whom we hear." + +As he spoke, the tramp of approaching footsteps and the voices of +excited men were heard outside. The door flew open, and Ulf, Erling, +and Haldor, with a number of the house-carles, strode into the hall and +flung down their arms. + +"Not much too soon, it would seem," said Ulf, with a look of stern joy. + +"Thou wouldst have been altogether too late, Ulf," said Astrid, "had not +Christian been here to save us." + +"How so?" exclaimed Ulf, turning with an enquiring look to the hermit; +"hast turned warrior after all thy preaching of peace? But thou art +pale. Ho! fetch a horn of ale here; fighting has disagreed with thy +stomach, old man." + +"I think," said Christian, pressing his hand to his side, "that one of +these arrows must have--" + +He paused suddenly, and would have fallen to the ground had not Erling +caught him. Letting him gently down at full length, our hero raised his +head on his knee, while Hilda came forward with a horn of ale. As she +kneeled by the old man's side she glanced anxiously at her lover's face, +which was covered with blood and dust, and presented anything but an +attractive appearance. + +"Hast thou been wounded?" whispered Hilda. + +"No, not wounded," muttered Erling, "but--" + +"Not wounded!" exclaimed Ulf, who overheard the words, but misunderstood +their application, "not wounded! Why, Erling, where have thy wits gone? +The man is wellnigh dead from loss of blood. See, his jerkin is +soaking. Bring hither bandages; come, let me see the wound. If the old +man has indeed saved Ulfstede this day, eternal disgrace would be our +due did we let his life slip out under our roof-tree for want of proper +care. And hark'ee; get ready all the dressings thou hast, for wounded +men enough will be here ere long, and let the boards be spread with the +best of meat and ale, for we have gone through hard work to-day, and +there is harder yet in store for us, I trow." + +Thus admonished, the women went to make preparation for the reception of +the wounded, and the entertainment of those who had been more fortunate +in the recent conflict. Meanwhile the hermit was conveyed to Ulf's own +bed, and his wound, which proved to be less serious than had been +feared, was carefully dressed by Hilda, to whom Erling, in the most +attentive and disinterested manner, acted the part of assistant-surgeon. + + + +CHAPTER NINE. + +SHOWS HOW THE ANCIENT SEA-KINGS TRANSACTED NATIONAL BUSINESS. + +Scant was the time allowed the men of Horlingdal for refreshment and +rest after the battle of the Springs, for the assembling of Thingsmen +armed to the teeth, as well as the news that King Harald threatened a +descent on them, rendered it necessary that a District Thing or Council +should be held without delay. + +Accordingly, after brief repose, Haldor the Fierce, who had returned +with Erling to his own house up the dale, arose and ordered the horn to +be sounded for a Thing. + +Several hundreds of men had by that time assembled, and when they all +came together they formed an imposing band of warriors, whom any wise +king would have deemed it advisable to hold converse with, if possible, +on friendly terms. + +When the Thing was seated Haldor rose, and, amid profound silence, said: + +"Men of Horlingdal, King Harald Haarfager has sent round the +message-token for a Thing to be held at the Springs. The token sent was +one of peace. The token of war was sent round instead, as ye know. +Whether this was wise or not does not much concern us now, as ye have +seen with your own eyes that there was good fortune in the change; for +we knew not, when the token was forwarded, of the urgent need that +should arise at the Springs for our weapons. But, now that the Danes +have been sent home--excepting that goodly number who have gone to +Valhalla's halls to keep company with Odin and departed warriors--it +seems to me that we should meet the King in the manner which he desires +until he shall give us occasion to assume arms in defence of our laws. +And I would here remind you that Harald is our rightful King, udal-born +to the Kingdom of Norway, his title having been stated and proved at all +the District Things, beginning with the Ore Thing of Drontheim, and +having been approved by all the people of Norway. I therefore counsel +pacific measures, and that we should go to the Springs unarmed." + +When Haldor sat down there was a slight murmur of assent, but most of +those present remained silent, wishing to hear more. + +Then up started Ulf, and spoke with great heat. + +"I agree not with Haldor," he said sternly. "Who does not know that +Harald is rightful King of Norway; that he is descended in a direct line +from the godars who came over from the east with Odin, and has been +fairly elected King of Norway? But who does not know also, that our +laws are above our King, that Harald is at this time trampling on these +laws, and is everywhere setting at defiance the small kings, who are as +truly udal-born to their rights and titles as himself?" + +At this point Ulf's indignation became so great that he found he could +not talk connectedly, so he concluded by counselling that they should go +to the Springs fully armed, and ready to brave the worst. There was a +loud shout of approval, and then Erling started up. His manner and tone +were subdued, but his face was flushed; and men could see, as he went +on, that he was keeping down his wrath and his energy. + +"I like it ill," he said, "to disagree on this point with my father; but +Ulf is right. We all know that Harald is King of Norway by _law_, and +we do not meet here to dispute his title; but we also know that kings +are not gods. Men create a law and place it over their own heads, so +that the lawmakers as well as those for whom it is made must bow before +it; but when it is found that the law works unfairly, the lawmaker may +repeal it, and cast it aside as useless or unworthy. So kings were +created for the sole purpose of guiding nations and administering laws, +in order that national welfare might be advanced. The moment they cease +to act their part, that moment they cease to be worthy kings, and become +useless. But if, in addition to this, they dare to ignore and break the +laws of the land, then do they become criminal; they deserve not only to +be cast aside, but punished. If, in defence of our rights, we find it +necessary to dethrone the King, we cannot be charged with disloyalty, +because the King has already dethroned himself!" + +Erling paused a moment at this point, and a murmur of approval ran +through the circle of his auditors. + +"When Harald Haarfager's father," he resumed, "Halfdan the Black, ruled +over Norway, he made laws which were approved by the people. He obeyed +them himself, and obliged others to observe them; and, that violence +should not come in the place of the laws, he himself fixed the number of +criminal acts in law, and the compensations, mulcts, or penalties, for +each case, according to everyone's birth and dignity, from the King +downwards; so that when disputes were settled at the Things the utmost +fair play prevailed--death for death, wound for wound; or, if the +parties chose, matters could be adjusted by payments in money--each +injury being valued at a fixed scale; or matters might be settled and +put right by single combat. All this, ye know full well, Halfdan the +Black compassed and settled in a _legal manner_, and the good that has +flowed from his wise and legal measures (for I hold that a king is not +entitled to pass even wise laws illegally) has been apparent to us ever +since. But now all this is to be overturned--with or without the +consent of the Things--because a foolish woman, forsooth, has the power +to stir up the vanity of a foolish king! Shall this be so? Is our +manhood to be thus riven from us, and shall we stand aloof and see it +done, or, worse still, be consenting unto it? Let death be our portion +first! It has been rumoured that the people of southern lands have done +this--that they have sold themselves to their kings, so that one man's +voice is law, and paid troops of military slaves are kept up in order +that this one man may have his full swing, while his favourites and his +soldier-slaves bask in his sunshine and fatten on the people of the +land! It is impossible for us of Norway to understand the feelings or +ideas of the men who have thus sold themselves--for we have never known +such tyranny--having, as the scalds tell us, enjoyed our privileges, +held our Things, and governed ourselves by means of the collective +wisdom of the people ever since our forefathers came from the East; but +I warn ye that if this man, Harald Haarfager, is allowed to have his +will, our institutions shall be swept away, our privileges will depart, +our rights will be crushed, and the time will come when it shall be said +of Norsemen that they have utterly forgotten that they once were free! +Again I ask, shall we tamely stand aside and suffer this to be? Shall +our children ever have it in their power to say, `There was a time when +our mean-spirited forefathers might have easily stopped the leak that +caused the flood by which we are now borne irresistibly downward?' I +repeat, let us rather perish! Let us go armed to the Springs and tell +the King that he--equally with ourselves--is subject to the laws of the +land!" + +Erling delivered the last sentence in a voice of thunder, and with a +fierce wave of the hand, that drew forth shouts of enthusiastic +applause. + +Instantly Glumm started up, forgetful, in the heat of the moment, of the +jealousy that had so recently sprung up between him and his friend. + +"I am not a speaker," he shouted gruffly, "but poor is the man who +cannot back up and egg on his friend. Erling speaks the truth; and all +I have to suggest is that he should be sent by us to tell all this to +King Harald Haarfager's face!" + +Glumm sat down with the prompt decision of a man who has thoroughly +delivered himself of all that he intends to say; and many in the +assembly testified their approval of his sentiments. + +At this point Ivor the Old arose and gave it as his opinion that the +sooner the King should be brought off his high horse the better; +whereupon Finn the One-eyed suggested, with a laugh, that the old hermit +should be sent with his bow and arrow to teach him due submission to the +laws. Then there was a good deal of confused, and not a little +passionate discussion, which waxed louder and more vehement until +Guttorm Stoutheart stood up, and, although not a dalesman, requested the +attention of the assembly for a few minutes. + +"It is obvious," he said in the hearty tones of a man who knows that he +is sure of carrying a large portion of his audience along with him--"it +is obvious that you are all pretty much of one mind as to the principle +on which we should act at this time; and my good friend Haldor the +Fierce (who seems of late to have changed his nature, and should, +methinks, in future, be styled Haldor the Mild) is evidently on the +losing side. The only thing that concerns us, it seems to me, is the +manner in which we shall convey our opinion to the King--how we shall +best, as the scald says:-- + + "`Whisper in the King's unwilling ear + That which is wholesome but unsweet to hear.' + +"Now, to the quick-witted among you various methods will doubtless have +already been suggested; and I am perchance only echoing the sentiments +of many here, when I say that it would be worthy of the men of +Horlingdal that they should fight the King at once, and put a stop to +the burnings, hangings, torturings, jarl-makings, and subduings of which +he has been so guilty of late, and which I confess is so unlike his +free, generous, manly character, that I have found it hard to believe +the reports which have reached my ears, and which, after all, can only +be accounted for by the fact that he is at present led by the nose by +that worst of all creatures, a proud imperious girl, who has the +passions of a warrior and the brains of a bairn! Another method, which +would signify at least our contempt for Harald's principles, would be +the sending of a thrall to him with a reaping-hook, and a request that +he would cut off his own head and give it to us in token that, having +ceased to be a king, he is resolved no longer to continue to be a +dishonoured man! And that reminds me of one of Ulf's thralls named +Kettle Flatnose, who could assist Harald nobly in the work of beheading +himself, for last night, when he and I fought side by side against the +Danes, he used a hook of his own making, with such effect, that I was +fain to pause and laugh, while myself in the very act of splitting an +iron headpiece. But perchance that is not a suitable method of +compassing our ends, besides it would cost the thrall his life, and I +should be sorry to aid in bringing about the death of Kettle Flatnose, +whose island is a happy one if it counts many such clear-headed and +able-bodied warriors. + +"But another plan was proposed by Glumm the Gruff, which seemed to me to +have the approval of many present, and assuredly it has mine, that we +should send King Erling at once to Harald, to tell him our opinions to +his face, to sound him as to his intentions, and to bring back the news +as fast as possible, so that we may go armed or unarmed to the Springs, +as prudence may direct. Moreover, as it would be unfair to send a man +alone on such a dangerous errand, I would suggest that he should have a +comrade to keep him company and share his fortunes, and that for this +end none better could be found than Glumm the Gruff himself." + +This speech settled the mind of the meeting. After a little more talk +it was finally arranged that Erling and Glumm should go at once to meet +King Harald, who could not yet, it was thought, have arrived at the +Springs, and endeavour to find out his temper of mind in regard to the +men of Horlingdal. After that the Thing broke up, and the members +dispersed to partake of "midag-mad", or dinner, in the dwellings of +their various friends. + + + +CHAPTER TEN. + +PROVES THAT THE BEST OF FRIENDS MAY QUARREL ABOUT NOTHING, AND THAT WAR +HAS TWO ASPECTS. + +"Now, Erling," said Glumm, with a face so cheerful, that had the +expression been habitual, he never would have been styled the Gruff, "I +will go home with thee and wait until thou art busked, after which we +will go together to my house and have a bite and a horn of mead before +setting out on this expedition. I thank the Stoutheart for suggesting +it, for the business likes me well." + +"Thou wert ever prone to court danger, Glumm," said Erling with a laugh, +as they hurried towards Haldorstede, "and methinks thou art going to be +blessed with a full share of it just now, for this Harald Haarfager is +not a man to be trifled with. Although thou and I could hold our own +against some odds, we shall find the odds too much for us in the King's +camp, should he set his face against us. However, the cause is a good +one, and to say truth, I am not sorry that they had the goodness to +pitch on thee and me to carry out the plan." + +Thus conversing they arrived at Ulfstede, where Herfrida met them at the +door, and was soon informed of their mission. She immediately went to +an inner closet, where the best garments and arms were kept, and brought +forth Erling's finest suit of armour, in order that he might appear with +suitable dignity at court. + +She made him change his ordinary shoes for a pair made of tanned +leather, on which he bound a pair of silver spurs, which had been taken +from a cavalier of southern lands in one of Haldor's viking cruises. +She brought, and assisted him to put on, a new suit of mail, every ring +of which had been brightly polished by the busy hands of Ingeborg, who +was unusually fond of meddling with everything that pertained to the art +of war; also a new sword-belt of yellow leather, ornamented with gold +studs. On his head she placed a gilt helmet with his favourite crest, a +pair of hawk's wings expanded upwards, and a curtain of leather covered +with gilt-steel rings to defend the neck. Over his shoulders she flung +a short scarlet cloak, which was fastened at the throat by a large +silver brooch, similar to the circular brooches which are still to be +found in the possession of the rich bonders of Norway. Then she +surveyed her stalwart son from head to foot, and said that he would +stand comparison with any king in the land, small or great. + +At this Erling laughed, and asked for his sword. + +"Which one, my son?" + +"The short one, mother. I had indeed thought of taking my good old axe +with me, but that would not look well in a man bent on a mission of +peace. Would it, Glumm? And if I should have to fight, why, my short +sword is not a light one, and by putting to a little more force I can +make it bite deep enough. So now, Glumm, I am ready for the road. +Farewell, mother." + +The young men went out and hastened down the valley to Glummstede, near +Horlingend. + +Now it chanced that Hilda and her foster-sister Ada had resolved, about +that time of the day, to walk up the dale together, and as there was +only one road on that side of the river, of necessity they were met by +their lovers; and it so fell out that the meeting took place in a +picturesque part of the dale, where the road passed between two high +precipitous cliffs. + +The instant that Ada's eyes fell on Glumm her active brain conceived the +idea of treating him to a disappointment, so she said hurriedly to her +friend: + +"Hilda, wilt thou manage to lead Glumm aside and keep talking to him for +a short time, while I speak with Erling? I want to ask him something +about that sword-belt which I am making for Glumm, and which I intend to +send him as the gift of an enemy." + +"I will do as ye desire," replied Hilda, with a feeling of +disappointment; "but with what truth canst thou send it, Ada, as an +enemy's gift?" + +"Simple Hilda!" said the other, with a laugh, "am I not an enemy to his +peace of mind? But hush! they will overhear us." + +It chanced that Hilda was on the same side of the road with Erling, and +Ada on that with Glumm, and both youths observed this fact with secret +satisfaction as they approached and wished the maids "good day"; but +just as they were about to shake hands Ada crossed in front of her +companion, and taking Erling's outstretched hand said: + +"Erling, I am glad to meet thee, because I have a knotty point which I +wish thine aid to disentangle. I will turn and walk with thee a short +way, because I know thy business is pressing. It is always so with men, +is it not?" + +"I know not," answered Erling, smiling at the girl's arch look, despite +his surprise and chagrin at the unexpected turn affairs had taken, for +he had noted the readiness with which Hilda had turned towards Glumm, +and almost, as he imagined, led him aside purposely! "But it seems to +me, Ada, that, however pressing a man's business may be, woman has the +power to delay it." + +"Nay, then, if thine is indeed so pressing just now," said Ada, with a +toss of the head (which Glumm, who walked behind with Hilda, took +particular note of), "I will not presume to--" + +"Now, Ada," said Erling, with a light laugh, "thou knowest that it is +merely waste of time to affect indignation. I know thee too well to be +deceived. Come, what is it that ye would consult me about? not the +forging of a battle-axe or spear-head, I warrant me." + +"Nay, but a portion of armour scarce less important, though not so +deadly. What say you to a sword-belt?" + +"Well, I am somewhat skilled in such gear." + +"I am ornamenting one for a friend of thine, Erling, but I will not tell +his name unless I have thy promise not to mention to him anything about +our conversation." + +"I promise," said Erling, with an amused glance. + +"It is for Glumm." + +"For Glumm!" repeated Erling in surprise; "does Glumm then know--" + +"Know what?" asked Ada, as Erling stopped abruptly. + +"Does he know that thou art making this belt for him?" + +"Know it? why, how could it be a secret if he knew it?" + +"Ah, true, I--well?" + +"Besides," continued Ada, "I am not _making_ it; I said I was going to +ornament it. Now it is with reference to that I would consult thee." + +Here Ada became so deeply absorbed in the mysteries of ornamental armour +that she constrained Erling at least to appear interested, although, +poor man, his heart was behind him, and he had much difficulty in +resisting the desire to turn round when he heard Hilda's voice--which, +by the way, was heard pretty constantly, for Glumm was so uncommonly +gruff and monosyllabic in his replies that she had most of the talking +to herself. + +This unpleasant state of things might have lasted a considerable time, +had not the party reached the path which diverged to the left, and, +crossing the river over a narrow bridge composed of two tall trees +thrown across, led to Glummstede. Here Erling stopped suddenly, and +wheeling round, said: + +"I regret that we cannot go farther down the dale to-day, as Glumm and I +must fare with all speed to the Springs to meet King Harald." + +"I trust thine errand is one of peace?" said Hilda in a slightly anxious +tone. + +"To judge by their looks," said Ada, glancing expressively at Glumm, "I +should say that their intentions were warlike!" + +"Despite our looks," replied Erling, with a laugh, "our business with +the King is of a peaceful nature, and as it is pressing, ye will excuse +us if--" + +"Oh! it _is_ pressing, after all," cried Ada; "come, sister, let us not +delay them." + +So saying, she hurried away with her friend, and the two youths strode +on to Glummstede in a very unenviable frame of mind. + +Having refreshed themselves with several cuts of fresh salmon--drawn +that morning from the foaming river--and with a deep horn of home-brewed +ale, the young warriors mounted a couple of active horses, and rode up +the mountain path that led in a zigzag direction over the fells to the +valley of the Springs. They rode in silence at first--partly because +the nature of the track compelled them to advance in single file, and +partly because each was in the worst possible humour of which his nature +was capable, while each felt indignant at the other, although neither +could have said that his friend had been guilty of any definable sin. + +It may here be mentioned in passing, that Glumm had clothed and armed +himself much in the same fashion as his companion, the chief difference +being that his helmet was of polished steel, and the centre of his +shield was painted red, while that of Erling was white. His only +offensive weapons were a dagger and the long two-handed sword which had +been forged for him by his friend, which latter was slung across his +back. + +An hour and a half of steady climbing brought the youths to the level +summit of the hills, where, after giving their steeds a few minutes to +breathe, they set off at a sharp gallop. Here they rode side by side, +but the rough nature of the ground rendered it necessary to ride with +care, so that conversation, although possible, was not, in the +circumstances, very desirable. The silence, therefore, was maintained +all the way across the fells. When they came to descend on the other +side they were again obliged to advance in single file, so that the +silence remained unbroken until they reached the base of the mountains. + +Here Erling's spirit revived a little, and he began to realise the +absurdity of the conduct of himself and his friend. + +"Why, Glumm," he exclaimed at last, "a dumb spirit must have got hold of +us! What possesses thee, man?" + +"Truly it takes two to make a conversation," said Glumm sulkily. + +"That is as thou sayest, friend, yet I am not aware that I refused to +talk with thee," retorted Erling. + +"Nor I with thee," said Glumm sharply, "and thy tongue was glib enough +when ye talked with Ada in Horlingdal." + +A light flashed upon Erling as his friend spoke. + +"Why, Glumm," he said lightly, "a pretty girl will make most men's +tongues wag whether they will or no." + +Glumm remembered his own obstinate silence while walking with Hilda, and +deeming this a studied insult he became furious, reined up and said: + +"Come, Erling, if ye wish to settle this dispute at once we need fear no +interruption, and here is a piece of level sward." + +"Nay, man, be not so hot," said Erling, with a smile that still more +exasperated his companion; "besides, is it fair to challenge me to fight +with this light weapon while thou bearest a sword so long and deadly?" + +"That shall be no bar," cried the other, unslinging his two-handed +sword; "thou canst use it thyself, and I will content me with thine." + +"And pray, how shall we give account of our mission," said Erling, "if +you and I cut each other's heads off before fulfilling it?" + +"That would then concern us little," said Glumm. + +"Nay, thou art more selfish than I thought thee, friend. For my part, I +would not that _she_ should think me so regardless of her welfare as to +leave undelivered a message that may be the means of preventing the ruin +of Horlingdal. My regard for Ada seems to sit more heavily on me than +on thee." + +At this Glumm became still more furious. He leaped off his horse, drew +his sword, and flinging it down with the hilt towards Erling, cried in a +voice of suppressed passion: + +"No longer will I submit to be trifled with by man or woman. Choose thy +weapon, Erling. This matter shall be settled now and here, and the one +who wins her shall prove him worthy of her by riding forth from this +plain alone. If thou art bent on equal combat we can fall to with +staves cut from yonder tree, or, for the matter of that, we can make +shift to settle it with our knives. What! has woman's love unmanned +thee?" + +At this Erling leaped out of the saddle, and drew his sword. + +"Take up thy weapon, Glumm, and guard thee. But before we begin, +perhaps it would be well to ask for whose hand it is that we fight." + +"Have we not been talking just now of Ada the Dark-eyed?" said Glumm +sternly, as he took up his sword and threw himself into a posture of +defence, with the energetic action of a man thoroughly in earnest. + +"Then is our combat uncalled for," said Erling, lowering his point, "for +I desire not the hand of Ada, though I would fight even to the death for +her blue-eyed sister, could I hope thereby to win her love." + +"Art thou in earnest?" demanded Glumm in surprise. + +"I never was more so in my life," replied Erling; "would that Hilda +regarded me with but half the favour that Ada shows to thee!" + +"There thou judgest wrongly," said Glumm, from whose brow the frown of +anger was passing away like a thundercloud before the summer sun. "I +don't pretend to understand a girl's thoughts, but I have wit enough to +see what is very plainly revealed. When I walked with Hilda to-day I +noticed that her eye followed thee unceasingly, and although she talked +to me glibly enough, her thoughts were wandering, so that she uttered +absolute nonsense at times--insomuch that I would have laughed had I not +been jealous of what I deemed the mutual love of Ada and thee. No, +Erling, thy suit will prosper, depend on't. It is I who have reason to +despond, for Ada loves me not." + +Erling, who heard all this with a certain degree of satisfaction, +smiled, shook his head, and said: + +"Nay, then, Glumm, thou too art mistaken. The dark-eyed Ada laughs at +everyone, and besides, I have good reason to know that her interest in +thee is so great that she consulted me to-day about--about--a--" + +The promise of secrecy that he had made caused Erling to stammer and +stop. + +"About what?" asked Glumm. + +"I may not tell thee, friend. She bound me over to secrecy, and I must +hold by my promise; but this I may say, that thou hast fully greater +cause for hope than I have." + +"Then it is my opinion," said Glumm, "that we have nothing to do but +shake hands and proceed on our journey." + +Erling laughed heartily, sheathed his sword, and grasped his friend's +hand, after which they remounted and rode forward; but they did not now +ride in silence. Their tongues were effectually loosened, and for some +time they discussed their respective prospects with all the warmth and +enthusiasm of youthful confidants. + +"But Ada perplexes me," suddenly exclaimed Glumm, in the midst of a +brief pause; "I know not how to treat her." + +"If thou wilt take my advice, Glumm, I will give it thee." + +"What is that?" asked Glumm. + +"There is nothing like fighting a woman with her own weapons." + +"A pretty speech," said Glumm, "to come from the lips of a man who never +regards the weapons of his foes, and can scarce be prevailed on to carry +anything but a beloved battle-axe." + +"The case is entirely the reverse when one fights with woman," replied +Erling. "In war I confess that I like everything to be straightforward +and downright, because when things come to the worst a man can either +hew his way by main force through thick and thin, or die. Truly, I +would that it were possible to act thus in matters of love also, but +this being impossible--seeing that women will not have it so, and insist +on dallying--the next best thing to be done is to act on their own +principles. Fight them with their own weapons. If a woman is outspoken +and straightforward, a man should be the same--and rejoice, moreover, +that he has found a gem so precious. But if she _will_ play fast and +loose, let a man--if he does not give her up at once--do the same. Give +Ada a little taste of indifference, Glumm, and thou wilt soon bring her +down. Laugh at her as well as with her. Show not quite so much +attention to her as has been thy wont; and be more attentive to the +other girls in the dale--" + +"To Hilda, for instance," said Glumm slyly. + +"Aye, even so, an it please thee," rejoined Erling; "but rest assured +thou wilt receive no encouragement in that quarter; for Hilda the +Sunbeam is the very soul of innocence, truth, and straightforwardness." + +"Not less so is Ada," said Glumm, firing up at the implied contrast. + +Erling made a sharp rejoinder, to which Glumm made a fierce reply; and +it is probable that these hot-blooded youths, having quarrelled because +of a misunderstanding in regard to their mistresses, would have come to +blows about their comparative excellence, had they not come suddenly +upon a sight which, for the time, banished all other thoughts from their +minds. + +During the discussion they had been descending the valley which +terminated in the plain where the recent battle of the Springs had been +fought. Here, as they galloped across the field, which was still strewn +with the bodies of the slain, they came upon the blackened ruins of a +hut, around which an old hag was moving, actively engaged, apparently, +in raking among the ashes with a forked stick for anything that she +could draw forth. + +Near to her a woman, who had not yet reached middle age, was seated on +the burnt earth, with her hands tightly clasped, and her bloodshot eyes +gazing with a stony stare at a blackened heap which lay on her lap. As +the young men rode up they saw that part of the head and face of a child +lay in the midst of the charred heap, with a few other portions of the +little one that had been only partially consumed in the fire. + +The Northmen did not require to be told the cause of what they saw. The +story was too plainly written in everything around them to admit of +uncertainty, had they even been ignorant of the recent fight and its +consequences. These were two of the few survivors of that terrible +night, who had ventured to creep forth from the mountains and search +among the ashes for the remains of those whose smiles and voices had +once made the sunshine of their lives. The terrible silence of these +voices and the sight of these hideous remains had driven the grandmother +of the household raving mad, and she continued to rake among the still +smouldering embers of the old house, utterly regardless of the two +warriors, and only complaining, in a querulous tone now and then, that +her daughter should sit there like a stone and leave her unaided to do +the work of trying to save at least some of the household from the +flames. But the daughter neither heard nor cared for her. She had +found what was left of her idol--her youngest child--once a ruddy, +fearless boy, with curly flaxen hair, who had already begun to carve +model longships and wooden swords, and to talk with a joyous smile and +flashing eye of war! but now--the fair hair gone, and nothing left save +a blackened skull and a small portion of his face, scarcely enough--yet +to a mother far more than enough--to recognise him by. + +Erling and Glumm dismounted and approached the young woman, but received +no glance of recognition. To a remark made by Erling no reply was +given. He therefore went close to her, and, bending down, laid his +large hand on her head, and gently smoothed her flaxen hair, while he +spoke soothingly to her. Still the stricken woman took no notice of him +until a large hot tear, which the youth could not restrain, dropped upon +her forehead, and coursed down her cheek. She then looked suddenly up +in Erling's face and uttered a low wail of agony. + +"Would ye slay her too?" shrieked the old woman at that moment, coming +forward with the pole with which she had been raking in the ashes, as if +she were going to attack them. + +Glumm turned aside the point of the pole, and gently caught the old +woman by the arm. + +"Oh! spare her," she cried, falling on her knees and clasping her +withered hands; "spare her, she is the last left--the last. I tried to +save the others--but, but, they are gone--all gone. Will ye not spare +_her_?" + +"They won't harm us, mother," said the younger woman huskily. "They are +friends. I _know_ they are friends. Come, sit by me, mother." + +The old woman, who appeared to have been subdued by exhaustion, crept on +her hands and knees to her side, and laying her head on her daughter's +breast, moaned piteously. + +"We cannot stay to aid thee," said Erling kindly; "but that matters not +because those will soon be here who will do their best for thee. Yet if +thou canst travel a few leagues, I will give thee a token which will +ensure a good reception in my father's house. Knowest thou Haldorstede +in Horlingdal?" + +"I know it well," answered the woman. + +"Here is a ring," said Erling, "which thou wilt take to Herfrida, the +wife of Haldor, and say that her son Erling sent thee, and would have +thee and thy mother well cared for." + +He took from his finger, as he spoke, a gold ring, and placed it in the +woman's hand, but she shook her head sadly, and said in an absent tone: +"I dare not go. Swart might come back and would miss me." + +"Art thou the wife of Swart of the Springs?" + +"Yes; and he told me not to quit the house till he came back. But that +seems so long, long ago, and so many things have happened since, that--" + +She paused and shuddered. + +"Swart is dead," said Glumm. + +On hearing this the woman uttered a wild shriek, and fell backward to +the earth. + +"Now a plague on thy gruff tongue," said Erling angrily, as he raised +the woman's head on his knee. "Did you not see that the weight was +already more than she could bear? Get thee to the spring for water, +man, as quickly as may be." + +Glumm, whose heart had already smitten him for his inconsiderate haste, +made no reply, but ran to a neighbouring spring, and quickly returned +with his helmet full of water. A little of this soon restored the poor +woman, and also her mother. + +"Now haste thee to Horlingdal," said Erling, giving the woman a share of +the small supply of food with which he had supplied himself for the +journey. "There may be company more numerous than pleasant at the +Springs to-morrow, and a hearty welcome awaits thee at Haldorstede." + +Saying this he remounted and rode away. + +"I was told last night by Hilda," said Erling, "that, when we were out +after the Danes, and just before the attack was made by the men of their +cutter on Ulfstede, the hermit had been talking to the women in a +wonderful way about war and the God whom he worships. He thinks that +war is an evil thing; that to fight in self-defence--that is, in defence +of home and country--is right, but that to go on viking cruise is wrong, +and displeasing to God." + +"The hermit is a fool," said Glumm bluntly. + +"Nay, he is no fool," said Erling. "When I think of these poor women, I +am led to wish that continued peace were possible." + +"But it is, happily, _not_ possible; therefore it is our business to +look upon the bright side of war," said Glumm. + +"That may be thy business, Glumm, but it is my business to look upon +_both_ sides of everything. What would it avail thee to pitch and paint +and gild the outside of thy longship, if no attention were given to the +timbering and planking of the inside?" + +"That is a different thing," said Glumm. + +"Yes, truly; yet not different in this, that it has two sides, both of +which require to be looked at, if the ship is to work well. I would +that I knew what the men of other lands think on this point, for the +hermit says that there are nations in the south where men practise +chiefly defensive warfare, and often spend years at a time without +drawing the sword." + +"Right glad am I," said Glumm, with a grim smile, "that my lot has not +fallen among these." + +"Do you know," continued Erling, "that I have more than once thought of +going off on a cruise far and wide over the world to hear and see what +men say and do? But something, I know not what, prevents me." + +"Perchance Hilda could tell thee!" said Glumm. + +Erling laughed, and said there was some truth in that; but checked +himself suddenly, for at that moment a man in the garb of a thrall +appeared. + +"Ho! fellow," cried Glumm, "hast heard of King Harald Haarfager of +late?" + +"The King is in guest-quarters in Updal," answered the thrall, "in the +house of Jarl Rongvold, my master." + +"We must speed on," said Erling to Glumm, "if we would speak with the +King before supper-time." + +"If you would speak with the King at all," said the thrall, "the less +you say to him the better, for he is in no mood to be troubled just now. +He sets out for the Springs to-morrow morning." + +Without making a reply the youths clapped spurs to their horses and +galloped away. + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN. + +DESCRIBES OUR HERO'S INTERVIEW WITH JARL RONGVOLD AND KING HARALD +HAARFAGER. + +Late in the evening, Erling and Glumm arrived in the neighbourhood of +the house of Jarl Rongvold, where King Harald Haarfager was staying in +guest-quarters with a numerous retinue. + +In the days of which we write there were no royal palaces in Norway. +The kings spent most of their time--when not engaged in war or out on +viking cruises--in travelling about the country, with a band of +"herd-men", or men-at-arms, in "guest-quarters". Wherever they went the +inhabitants were bound by law to afford them house-room and good cheer +at their own cost, and the kings usually made this tax upon their people +as light as possible by staying only a few days at each place. + +Rongvold, who entertained the King at this time, was one of those Jarls +or Earls--rulers over districts under himself--of whom he had recently +created many throughout the land, to supersede those small independent +kings who refused to become subject to him. He was a stout warrior, an +able courtier, and a very dear friend of the King. + +Just before his arrival at Jarl Rongvold's house, King Harald had +completed a considerable part of the programme which he had laid down in +the great work of subduing the whole of Norway to himself. And wild +bloody work it had been. + +Hearing that several of the small kings had called a meeting in the +uplands to discuss his doings, Harald went, with all the men he could +gather, through the forests to the uplands, came to the place of meeting +about midnight without being observed by the watchmen, set the house on +fire, and burnt or slew four kings with all their followers. After that +he subdued Hedemark, Ringerige, Gudbrandsdal, Hadeland, Raumarige, and +the whole northern part of Vingulmark, and got possession of all the +land as far south as the Glommen. It was at this time that he was +taunted by the girl Gyda, and took the oath not to clip his hair until +he had subdued the whole land--as formerly related. After his somewhat +peculiar determination, he gathered together a great force, and went +northwards up the Gudbrandsdal and over the Doverfielde. When he came +to the inhabited land he ordered all the men to be killed, and +everything wide around to be delivered to the flames. The people fled +before him in all directions on hearing of his approach--some down the +country to Orkadal, some to Gaulerdal, and some to the forests; but many +begged for peace, and obtained it on condition of joining him and +becoming his men. He met no decided opposition till he came to Orkadal, +where a king named Gryting gave him battle. Harald won the victory. +King Gryting was taken prisoner, and most of his men were killed. He +took service himself, however, under the King, and thereafter all the +people of Orkadal district swore fidelity to him. + +Many other battles King Harald fought, and many other kings did he +subdue--all of which, however, we will pass over at present, merely +observing that wherever he conquered he laid down the law that all the +udal property should belong to him, and that the bonders--the hitherto +free landholders--both small and great, should pay him land dues for +their possessions. It is due, however, to Harald Fairhair, to say that +he never seems to have aimed at despotic power; for it is recorded of +him that over every district he set an earl, or jarl, to judge +_according to the law of the land and to justice_, and also to collect +the land dues and the fines; and for this each earl received a third +part of the dues and services and fines for the support of his table and +other expenses. Every earl had under him four or more bersers, on each +of whom was bestowed an estate of twenty merks yearly, for which he was +bound to support twenty men-at-arms at his own expense--each earl being +obliged to support sixty retainers. The King increased the land dues +and burdens so much that his earls had greater power and income than the +kings had before, and when this became known at Drontheim many of the +great men of that district joined the King. + +Wherever Harald went, submission or extinction were the alternatives; +and as he carried things with a high hand, using fire and sword freely, +it is not a matter of wonder that his conquests were rapid and complete. +It has been said of Harald Fairhair by his contemporaries, handed down +by the scalds, and recorded in the Icelandic Sagas, that he was of +remarkably handsome appearance, great and strong, and very generous and +affable to his men. + +But to return. + +It was late in the evening, as we have said, when Erling and Glumm +reached the vicinity of Jarl Rongvold's dwelling. Before coming in +sight of it they were met by two of the mounted guards that were posted +regularly as sentries round the King's quarters. These challenged them +at once, and, on being informed that they desired to have speech with +the King on matters of urgency, conveyed them past the inner guard to +the house. + +The state of readiness for instant action in which the men were kept did +not escape the observant eyes of the visitors. Besides an outlying +mounted patrol, which they had managed to pass unobserved, and the +sentries who conducted them, they found a strong guard round the range +of farm buildings where the King and his men lay. These men were all +well armed, and those of them who were not on immediate duty lay at +their stations sound asleep, each man with his helmet on his head, his +sword under it, his right hand grasping the hilt, and his shield serving +the purpose of a blanket to cover him. + +Although the young men observed all this they did not suffer their looks +to betray idle curiosity, but rode on with stern countenances, looking, +apparently, straight before them, until they reined up at the front door +of the house. + +In a few minutes a stout handsome man with white hair came out and +saluted Erling in a friendly way. This was Jarl Rongvold, who was +distantly related to him. + +"I would I could say with truth that I am glad to see thee, cousin," he +said, "but I fear me that thine errand to the King is not likely to end +in pleasant intercourse, if all be true that is reported of the folk in +Horlingdal." + +"Thanks, kinsman, for the wish, if not for the welcome," replied the +youth, somewhat stiffly, as he dismounted; "but it matters little to me +whether our intercourse be pleasant or painful, so long as it is +profitable. The men of Horlingdal send a message to Harald Haarfager; +can my companion and I have speech with him?" + +"I can manage that for thee, yet would I counsel delay, for the King is +not in a sweet mood to-night, and it may go ill with thee." + +"I care not whether the King's mood be sweet or sour," replied Erling +sternly. "Whatever he may become in the future, Harald is not yet the +all-powerful king he would wish to be. The men of Horlingdal have held +a Thing, and Glumm and I have been deputed to see the King, convey to +him their sentiments, and ask his intentions." + +A grim smile played on the jarl's fine features for a moment, as he +observed the blood mantling to the youth's forehead. + +"No good will come to thee or thine, kinsman, by meeting the King with a +proud look. Be advised, Erling," he continued in a more confidential +tone; "it is easier to swim with the stream than against it--and wiser +too, when it is impossible to turn it. Thou hast heard, no doubt, of +Harald's doings in the north." + +"I have heard," said Erling bitterly. + +"Well, be he right or be he wrong, it were easier to make the Glommen +run up the fells than to alter the King's determination; and it seems to +me that it behoves every man who loves his country, and would spare +further bloodshed, to submit to what is inevitable." + +"Every lover of his country deems bloodshed better than slavery," said +Erling, "because the death of a few is not so great an evil as the +slavery of all." + +"Aye, when there is hope that good may come of dying," rejoined the +jarl, "but now there is no hope." + +"That is yet to be proved," said the youth; and Glumm uttered one of +those emphatic grunts with which men of few words are wont to signify +their hearty assent to a proposition. + +"Tut, kinsman," continued Rongvold, with a look of perplexity, "I don't +like the idea of seeing so goodly a youth end his days before his right +time. Let me assure thee that, if thou wilt join us and win over thy +friends in Horlingdal, a splendid career awaits thee, for the King loves +stout men, and will treat thee well; he is a good master." + +"It grieves me that one whose blood flows in my veins should call any +man master!" said Erling. + +"Now a plague on thee, for a stupid hot-blood," cried the jarl; "if thou +art so displeased with the word, I can tell thee that it need never be +used, for, if ye will take service with the King, he will give thee the +charge and the revenues of a goodly district, where thou shalt be master +and a jarl too." + +"I am a king!" said Erling, drawing himself proudly up. "Thinkest thou +I would exchange an old title for a new one, which the giver has no +right to create?" + +Glumm uttered another powerfully emphatic grunt at this point. + +"Besides," continued Erling, "I have no desire to become a +scatt-gatherer." + +The jarl flushed a little at this thrust, but mastering his indignation +said, with a smile-- + +"Nay, then, if ye prefer a warrior's work there is plenty of that at the +disposal of the King." + +"I have no particular love for war," said Erling. Jarl Rongvold looked +at his kinsman in undisguised amazement. + +"Truly thou art well fitted for it, if not fond of it," he said curtly; +"but as thou art bent on following thine own nose, thou art like to have +more than enough of that which thou lovest not.--Come, I will bring thee +to the King." + +The jarl led the two young men into his dwelling, where nearly a hundred +men-at-arms were carousing. The hall was a long, narrow, and high +apartment, with a table running down each side, and one at either end. +In the centre of each table was a raised seat, on which sat the chief +guests, but, at the moment they entered, the highest of these seats was +vacant, for the King had left the table. The fireplace of the hall was +in the centre, and the smoke from it curled up among the rafters, which +it blackened before escaping through a hole in the roof. + +As all the revellers were armed, and many of them were moving about the +hall, no notice was taken of the entrance of the strangers, except that +one or two near whom they passed remarked that Jarl Rongvold owned some +stout men-at-arms. + +The King had retired to one of the sleeping-chambers off the great halt +in which he sat at a small window, gazing dreamily upon the magnificent +view of dale, fell, fiord, and sea, that lay stretched out before the +house. The slanting rays of the sun shone through the window, and +through the heavy masses of the King's golden hair, which fell in +enormous volumes, like a lion's mane, on a pair of shoulders which were +noted, even in that age of powerful men, for enormous breadth and +strength. Like his men, King Harald was armed from head to foot, with +the exception of his helmet, which lay, with his shield, on the low +wolf-skin couch on which he had passed the previous night. + +He did not move when the jarl and the young men entered, but on the +former whispering in his ear he let his clenched fist fall on the window +sill, and, turning, with a frown on his bold, handsome face, looked long +and steadily at Erling. And well might he gaze, for he looked upon one +who bore a singularly strong resemblance to himself. There was the same +height and width and massive strength, the same bold, fearless look in +the clear blue eyes, and the same firm lips; but Erling's hair fell in +softer curls on his shoulders, and his brow was more intellectual. +Being a younger man, his beard was shorter. + +Advancing a step, after Jarl Rongvold had left the room, Erling stated +the sentiments of the men of Horlingdal in simple, blunt language, and +ended by telling the King that they had no wish to refuse due and lawful +allegiance to him, but that they objected to having the old customs of +the land illegally altered. + +During the progress of his statement both Erling and Glumm observed that +the King's face flushed more than once, and that his great blue eyes +blazed with astonishment and suppressed wrath. After he had concluded, +the King still gazed at him in ominous silence. Then he said, sternly: + +"For what purpose camest thou hither if the men of Horlingdal hold such +opinions?" + +"We came to tell you, King Harald, what the men of Horlingdal think, and +to ask what you intend to do." + +There was something so cool in this speech that a sort of grin curled +the King's moustache, and mingled with the wrath that was gathering on +his countenance. + +"I'll tell thee what I will do," he said, drawing his breath sharply, +and hissing the words; "I will march into the dale, and burn and s--" He +stopped abruptly, and then in a soft tone added, "But what will _they_ +do if I refuse to listen to them?" + +"I know not what the men of Horlingdal will do," replied Erling; "but I +will counsel them to defend their rights." + +At this the King leaped up, and drew his sword half out of its scabbard, +but again checked himself suddenly; for, as the Saga tells us, "it was +his invariable rule, whenever anything raised his anger, to collect +himself and let his passion run off, and then take the matter into +consideration coolly." + +"Go," he said, sitting down again at the window, "I will speak with thee +on this subject to-morrow." + +Erling, who during the little burst of passion had kept his blue eyes +unflinchingly fixed on those of the King, bowed and retired, followed by +Glumm, whose admiration of his friend's diplomatic powers would have +been unbounded, had he only wound up with a challenge to the King, then +and there, to single combat! + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE. + +DESCRIBES A TERRIFIC AND UNEQUAL COMBAT. + +"Now, kinsman, let me endeavour to convince thee of thy folly," said +Jarl Rongvold to Erling, on the morning that followed the evening in +which the interview with the King had taken place, as they walked in +front of the house together. + +"It needs no great power of speech to convince me of that," said Erling. +"The fact that I am still here, after what the King let out last night, +convinces me, without your aid, that I am a fool." + +"And pray what said he that has had such powerful influence on thine +obtuse mind?" + +"Truly he said little, but he expressed much. He gave way to an +unreasonable burst of passion when I did but claim justice and assert +our rights; and the man must be slow-witted indeed who could believe +that subdued passion is changed opinion. However, I will wait for +another interview until the sun is in the zenith--after that I leave, +whatever be the consequences. So it were well, kinsman, that you should +see and advise with your _master_." + +The jarl bit his lip, and was on the point of turning away without +replying, when a remarkably stout and tall young man walked up and +accosted them. + +"This is my son Rolf," said the jarl, turning round hastily.--"Our +kinsman, Erling the Bold. I go to attend the King. Make the most of +each other, for ye are not likely to be long in company." + +"Are you that Rolf who is styled Ganger?" enquired Erling with some +interest. + +"Aye," replied the other gruffly. "At least I am Rolf. Men choose to +call me Ganger because I prefer to gang on my legs rather than gang on +the legs of a horse. They say it is because no horse can carry me; but +thou seest that that is a lie, for I am not much heavier than thyself." + +"I should like to know thee better, kinsman," said Erling. + +Rolf Ganger did not respond so heartily to this as Erling wished, and he +felt much disappointed; for, being a man who did not often express his +feelings, he felt all the more keenly anything like a rebuff. + +"What is your business with the King?" asked Rolf, after a short pause. + +"To defy him," said our hero, under the influence of a burst of mingled +feelings. + +Rolf Ganger looked at Erling in surprise. + +"Thou dost not like the King, then?" + +"I hate him!" + +"So do I," said Rolf. + +This interchange of sentiment seemed to break down the barriers of +diffidence which had hitherto existed between the two, for from that +moment their talk was earnest and confidential. Erling tried to get +Rolf to desert the King's cause and join his opponents, but the latter +shook his head, and said that they had no chance of success; and that it +was of no use joining a hopeless cause, even although he had strong +sympathy with it. While they were conversing, Jarl Rongvold came out +and summoned Erling to the presence of the King. + +This was the first and last interview that our hero had with that Rolf +Ganger, whose name--although not much celebrated at that time--was +destined to appear in the pages of history as that of the conqueror of +Normandy, and the progenitor of line of English kings. + +"I have sent for thee, Erling," said the King, in a voice so soft, yet +so constrained, that Erling could not avoid seeing that it was forced, +"to tell thee thou art at liberty to return to thy dalesmen with this +message--King Harald respects the opinions of the men of Horlingdal, and +he will hold a Thing at the Springs for the purpose of hearing their +views more fully, stating his own, and consulting with them about the +whole matter.--Art satisfied with that?" he asked, almost sternly. + +"I will convey your message," said Erling. + +"And the sooner the better," said the King. "By the way, there are two +roads leading to the Springs, I am told; is it so?" he added. + +"There are," said Erling; "one goes by the uplands over the fells, the +other through the forest." + +"Which would you recommend me to follow when I fare to the Springs?" + +"The forest road is the best." + +"It is that which thou wilt follow, I suppose?" + +"It is," replied Erling. + +"Well, get thee to horse, and make the most of thy time; my berserk here +will guide thee past the guards." + +As he spoke, a man who had stood behind the King motionless as a statue +advanced towards the door. He was one of a peculiar class of men who +formed part of the bodyguard of the King. On his head there was a plain +steel helmet, but he wore no "serk", or shirt of mail (hence the name of +berserk, or bare of serk), and he was, like the rest of his comrades, +noted for being capable of working himself up into such a fury of +madness while in action, that few people of ordinary powers could stand +before his terrible onset. He was called Hake, the berserk of Hadeland, +and was comparatively short in stature, but looked shorter than he +really was, in consequence of the unnatural breadth and bulk of his +chest and shoulders. Hake led Erling out to the door of the house, +where they found Glumm waiting with two horses ready for the road. + +"Thou art sharp this morning, Glumm." + +"Better to be too sharp than too blunt," replied his friend. "It seemed +to me that whatever should be the result of the talk with the King +to-day, it were well to be ready for the road in good time. What is +yonder big-shouldered fellow doing?" + +"Hush, Glumm," said Erling, with a smile, "thou must be respectful if +thou wouldst keep thy head on thy shoulders. That is Hake of Hadeland, +King Harald's famous berserk. He is to conduct us past the guards. I +only hope he may not have been commissioned to cut off our heads on the +way. But I think that perchance you and I might manage him together, if +our courage did not fail us!" + +Glumm replied with that expression of contempt which is usually styled +turning up one's nose, and Erling laughed as he mounted his horse and +rode off at the heels of the berserk. He had good reason to look grave, +however, as he found out a few moments later. Just as they were about +to enter the forest, a voice was heard shouting behind, and Jarl +Rongvold was seen running after them. + +"Ho! stay, kinsman, go not away without bidding us farewell. A safe and +speedy journey, lad, and give my good wishes to the old folk at +Haldorstede. Say that I trust things may yet be happily arranged +between the men of Horlingdal and the King." + +As he spoke the jarl managed to move so that Erling's horse came between +him and the berserk; then he said quickly, in a low but earnest whisper: + +"The King means to play thee false, Erling. I cannot explain, but do +thou be sure to take _the road by the fells_, and let not the berserk +know. Thy life depends on it. I am ordered to send this berserk with a +troop of nineteen men to waylay thee. They are to go _by the forest +road_.--There, thou canst not doubt my friendship for thee, for now my +life is in thy hands! Haste, thou hast no chance against such odds. +Farewell, Glumm," he added aloud; "give my respects to Ulf, when next ye +see him." + +Jarl Rongvold waved his hand as he turned round and left his friends to +pursue their way. + +They soon reached the point where they had met the two guards on the +previous day. After riding a little farther, so as to make sure of +being beyond the outmost patrol, the berserk reined up. + +"Here I leave you to guard yourselves," he said. + +"Truly we are indebted to thee for thy guidance thus far," said Erling. + +"If you should still chance to meet with any of the guards, they will +let you pass, no doubt." + +"No doubt," replied Erling, with a laugh, "and, should they object, we +have that which will persuade them." + +He touched the hilt of his sword, and nodded good-humouredly to the +berserk, who did not appear to relish the jest at all. + +"Your road lies through the forest, I believe?" said Hake, pausing and +looking back as he was about to ride away. + +"That depends on circumstances," said Erling. "If the sun troubles me, +I may go by the forest,--if not, I may go by the fells. But I never can +tell beforehand which way my fancy may lead, and I always follow it." + +So saying he put spurs to his horse and galloped away. + +The berserk did the same, but it was evident that he was ill at ease, +for he grumbled very much, and complained a good deal of his ill luck. +He did not, however, slacken his pace on that account, but rather +increased it, until he reached Rongvoldstede, where he hastily summoned +nineteen armed men, mounted a fresh horse, and, ordering them to follow, +dashed back into the forest at full speed. + +For some time he rode in silence by the side of a stout man who was his +subordinate officer. + +"Krake," he said at length, "I cannot make up my mind which road this +Erling and his comrade are likely to have taken, so, as we must not miss +our men, the King's commands being very positive, I intend to send thee +by the mountain road with nine of the men, and go myself by the forest +with the other nine. We will ride each at full speed, and will be sure +to overtake them before they reach the split rock on the fells, or the +double-stemmed pine in the forest. If thou shalt fall in with them, +keep them in play till I come up, for I will hasten to join thee without +delay after reaching the double pine. If I meet them I will give the +attack at once, and thou wilt hasten to join me after passing the split +rock. Now, away, for here our roads part." + +In accordance with this plan the troop was divided, and each portion +rode off at full speed. + +Meanwhile Erling and Glumm pursued their way, chatting as they rode +along, and pausing occasionally to breathe their horses. + +"What ails thee, Erling?" said Glumm abruptly. "One would fancy that +the fair Hilda was behind thee, so often hast thou looked back since the +berserk left us." + +"It is because the fair Hilda is before me that I look so often over my +shoulder, for I suspect that there are those behind us who will one day +cause her grief," replied Erling sadly; then, assuming a gay air, he +added--"Come, friend Glumm, I wish to know thy mind in regard to a +matter of some importance. How wouldst thou like to engage, single +handed, with ten men?" + +Glumm smiled grimly, as he was wont to do when amused by anything-- +which, to say truth, was not often. + +"Truly," said he, "my answer to that must depend on thine answer to +this--Am I supposed to have my back against a cliff, or to be surrounded +by the ten?" + +"With thy back guarded, of course." + +"In that case I should not refuse the fight, but I would prefer to be +more equally matched," said Glumm, "Two to one, now, is a common chance +of war, as thou knowest full well. I myself have had four against me at +one time--and when one is in good spirits this is not a serious +difficulty, unless there chance to be a berserk amongst them; even in +that case, by the use of a little activity of limb, one can separate +them, and so kill them in detail. But ten are almost too many for one +man, however bold, big, or skilful he may be." + +"Then what--wouldst thou say to twenty against two?" asked Erling, +giving a peculiar glance at his friend. + +"That were better than ten to one, because two stout fellows back to +back are not easily overcome, if the fight be fair with sword and axe, +and arrows or spears be not allowed. Thou and I, Erling, might make a +good stand together against twenty, for we can use our weapons, and are +not small men. Nevertheless, I think that it would be our last fight, +though I make no doubt we should thin their number somewhat. But why +ask such questions?" + +"Because I have taken a fancy to know to what extent I might count on +thee in case of surprise." + +"To what extent!" said Glumm, flushing, and looking his friend full in +the face. "Hast known me so long to such small purpose, that ye should +doubt my willingness to stand by thee to the death, if need be, against +any odds?" + +"Nay, be not so hasty, Glumm. I doubt not thy courage nor thy regard +for me, but I had a fancy to know what amount of odds thou wouldst deem +serious, for I may tell thee that our powers are likely to be put to the +proof to-day. My kinsman, Jarl Rongvold, told me at parting that twenty +men--and among them Hake the berserk--are to be sent after us, and are +doubtless even now upon our track." + +"Then why this easy pace?" said Glumm, in a tone of great surprise. +"Surely there is no reason why we should abide the issue of such a +combat when nothing is to be gained by it and much to be lost; for if we +are killed, who will prepare the men of Horlingdal for the King's +approach, and tell of his intentions?" + +"That is wisely spoken, Glumm; nevertheless I feel disposed to meet King +Harald's men." + +"This spirit accords ill with the assertion that thou art not fond of +war," returned Glumm, with a smile. + +"I am not so sure of that," rejoined Erling, with a look of perplexity. +"It is more the consequences of war--its evil effects on communities, on +women and children--that I dislike, than the mere matter of fighting, +which, although I cannot say I long for it, as some of our friends do, I +can truly assert I take some pleasure in, when engaged in it. Besides, +in this case I do not wish to meet these fellows for a mere piece of +brag, but I think it might teach King Harald that he has to do with men +who have heart and skill to use their weapons, and show him what he may +expect if he tries to subdue this district. However, be that as it may, +the question is, shall we hang back and accept this challenge--for such +I regard it--or shall we push on?" + +"Yonder is an answer to that question, which settles it for us," said +Glumm quietly, pointing to a ridge on the right of the bridle path, +which rose high above the tree tops. A troop of horsemen were seen to +cross it and gallop down the slope, where they quickly disappeared in +the forest. + +"How many didst thou count?" asked Erling, with a look of surprise. + +"Only ten," answered Glumm. + +"Come," cried Erling cheerfully, as he drew his sword, "the odds are not +so great as we had expected. I suppose that King Harald must have +thought us poor-looking warriors, or perchance he has sent ten +berserkers against us. Anyhow I am content. Only one thing do I +regret, and that is, that, among the other foolish acts I have been +guilty of at this time, I left my good battle-axe behind me. This is a +level piece of sward. Shall we await them here?" + +"Aye," was Glumm's laconic answer, as he felt the edge of his long +two-handed sword, settled himself more firmly on his seat, and carefully +looked to the fastenings of his armour. + +Erling did the same, and both drew up their steeds with their backs +towards an impenetrable thicket. In front lay a level stretch of +ground, encumbered only here and there with one or two small bushes, +beyond which they had a view far into the dark forest, where the armour +of the approaching horsemen could be seen glancing among the tree stems. + +"It is likely," muttered Erling, "that they will try to speak us fair at +first. Most assassins do, to throw men off their guard. I counsel that +our words be few and our action quick." + +Glumm gave vent to a deep, short laugh, which sounded, however, +marvellously like a growl, and again said-- + +"Aye." + +Next moment the ten horsemen galloped towards them, and reined up at the +distance of a few yards, while two of them advanced. One of these, who +was no other than Krake the berserk, said in a loud, commanding voice-- + +"Yield thee, Erling, in the name of the King!" + +"That for the King!" cried Erling, splitting the head of Krake's horse +with the edge of his sword, and receiving Krake himself on the point of +it as he fell forward, so that it went in at his breast and came out at +his back. At the same time Glumm's horse sprang forward, his long sword +whistled sharply as it flashed through the air, and, next moment, the +head of the second man was rolling on the ground. + +So sudden was the onset that the others had barely time to guard +themselves when Glumm's heavy sword cleft the top of the shield and the +helmet of one, tumbling him out of the saddle, while the point of +Erling's lighter weapon pierced the throat of another. The remaining +six turned aside, right and left, so as to divide their opponents, and +then attacked them with great fury--for they were all brave and picked +men. At first Erling and Glumm had enough to do to defend themselves, +without attempting to attack, but at a critical moment the horse of one +of Glumm's opponents stumbled, and his rider being exposed was instantly +cut down. Glumm now uttered a shout, for he felt sure of victory, +having only two to deal with. Erling's sword proved to be too short for +such a combat, for his enemies were armed with long and heavy weapons, +and one of them had a spear. He eluded their assaults, however, with +amazing activity, and wounded one of them so badly that he was obliged +to retire from the fray. Seeing this our hero made a sudden rush at one +of the men who fought with a battle-axe, seized the axe by the handle, +and with one sweep of his sword lopped off the man's arm. + +Then did Erling also feel that victory was secure, for he now wielded an +axe that was almost as good and heavy as his own, and only one man stood +before him. Under the impulse of this feeling he uttered a shout which +rang through the forest like the roar of a lion. + +Now, well would it have been for both Erling and Glumm if they had +restrained themselves on that occasion, for the shouts they uttered +served to guide two bands of enemies who were in search of them. + +It will be remembered that Hake the berserk had gone after our heroes by +the forest road, but, not finding them so soon as he had anticipated, +and feeling a sort of irresistible belief that they had after all gone +by the fells, he altered his own plans in so far that he turned towards +the road leading by the mountains, before he reached the pine with the +double stem. Thus he just missed those whom he sought, and, after some +time, came to the conclusion that he was a fool, and had made a great +mistake in not holding to his original plan. By way of improving +matters he divided his little band into two, and sending five of his men +in one direction, rode off with the remaining four in another. Krake, +on the contrary, had fulfilled his orders to the letter; had gone to the +split rock, and then hastened to the double-stemmed pine, not far from +which, as we have seen, he found the men of whom he was in search, and +also met his death. + +One of the bands of five men chanced to be within earshot when Erling +shouted, and they immediately bore down in the direction, and cheered as +they came in sight of the combatants. The three men who yet stood up to +our friends wheeled about at once and galloped to meet them, only too +glad to be reinforced at such a critical moment. + +There was a little stream which trickled over the edge of a rock close +to the spot where the combat had taken place. Erling and Glumm leaped +off their horses as if by one impulse, and, running to this, drank +deeply and hastily. As they ran back and vaulted into their saddles, +they heard a faint cheer in the far distance. + +"Ha!" exclaimed Erling, "Harald doubtless _did_ send twenty men after +all, for here come the rest of them. It is good fortune that a berserk +is seldom a good leader--he should not have divided his force. These +eight must go down, friend Glumm, before the others come up, else are +our days numbered." + +The expression of Glumm's blood-stained visage spoke volumes, but his +tongue uttered never a word. Indeed, there was no time for further +speech, for the eight men, who had conversed hurriedly together for a +few seconds, were now approaching. The two friends did not await the +attack, but, setting spurs to their horses, dashed straight at them. +Two were overturned in the shock, and their horses rolled on them, so +that they never rose again. On the right Erling hewed down one man, and +on the left his friend cut down another. They reined up, turned round, +and charged again, but the four who were left were too wise to withstand +the shock; they swerved aside. In doing so the foot of one of their +horses caught in a bramble. He stumbled, and the rider was thrown +violently against a tree and stunned, so that he could not remount. +This was fortunate, for Erling and Glumm were becoming exhausted, and +the three men who still opposed them were comparatively fresh. One of +these suddenly charged Glumm, and killed his horse. Glumm leaped up, +and, drawing his knife, stabbed the horse of the other to the heart. As +it fell he caught his rider by the right wrist, and with a sudden wrench +dislocated his arm. Erling meanwhile disabled one of the others, and +gave the third such a severe wound that he thought it best to seek +safety in flight. + +Erling now turned to Glumm, and asked if he thought it would be best to +ride away from the men who were still to come up, or to remain and fight +them also. + +"If there be five more," said Glumm, leaning against a tree, and +removing his helmet in order to wipe his brow, "then is our last battle +fought, for, although I have that in me which could manage to slay one, +I have not strength for two, much less three. Besides, my good steed is +dead, and we have no time to catch one of the others." + +"Now will I become a berserk," cried Erling, casting his gilt helmet on +the ground and undoing the fastenings of his coat of mail. "Armour is +good when a man is strong, but when he is worn out it is only an +encumbrance. I counsel thee to follow my example." + +"It is not a bad one," said Glumm, also throwing down his helmet and +stripping off his armour. "Ha! there are more of them than we counted +on--six." + +As he spoke six horsemen were seen approaching through the distant +glades of the forest. + +The two friends ran to the fountain before mentioned, slaked their +thirst, and hastily bathed their heads and faces; then, seizing their +swords and shields, and leaving the rest of their armour on the sward, +they ran to a rugged part of the ground, where horses could not act. +Mounting to the highest point of a rocky mound, they awaited the +approach of their foes. + +Quickly they came forward, their faces blazing with wrath as they rode +over the field of battle, and saw their slaughtered comrades. Hake the +berserk rode in front, and, advancing as near as possible to the place +where his enemies stood, said tauntingly: + +"What, are ye so fearful of only six men, after having slain so many?" + +"Small meat would we make of thee and thy men, so that the crows might +pick it easily, if we were only half as fresh as ye are," said Erling; +"but we chose to rest here awhile, so if ye would fight ye must come +hither to us on foot." + +"Nay, but methinks it would be well for both parties," returned the +berserk, "that they should fight on level ground." + +Erling and Glumm had thrown themselves on the rocks to get as much rest +as possible before the inevitable combat that was still before them. +They consulted for a few seconds, and then the former replied: + +"We will gladly come down, if ye will meet us on foot." + +"Agreed," cried the berserk, leaping off his horse, and leading it to a +neighbouring tree, to which he fastened it. The others followed his +example. Then our two heroes arose and stretched themselves. + +"It has been a good fight," said Erling. "Men will talk of it in days +to come, after we are far away in the world of spirits." + +There was deep pathos in the tone of the young warrior as he spoke these +words, and cast his eyes upwards to the blue vault as if he sought to +penetrate that spirit world, on the threshold of which he believed +himself to stand. + +"If we had but one hour's rest, or one other man on our side; but--" He +stopped suddenly, for the six men now stood in the middle of the little +plain where Erling and Glumm had fought so long and so valiantly that +day, and awaited their coming. + +Hastily descending the mound, the two friends strode boldly towards +their opponents, scorning to let them see by look or gesture that they +were either fatigued or depressed. As they drew near, Erling singled +out Hake, and Glumm went towards a tall, powerful man, who stood ready +with a huge sword resting on his shoulder, as if eager to begin the +combat. Glumm had arranged in his own mind that that man and he should +die together. Beside him stood a warrior with a battle-axe, and a steel +helmet on his head. Before Glumm could reach his intended victim the +tall man's sword flashed in the air like a gleam of light, and the head +with the steel helmet went spinning on the ground! + +"That's the way that Kettle Flatnose pays off old scores," cried the +Irish thrall, turning suddenly upon his late friends, and assailing one +of them with such fury that he cut him down in a few seconds, and then +ran to draw off one of the two who had attacked Erling. Glumm's +amazement at this was, as may well be believed, excessive; but it was +nothing to the intensity of his joy when he found suddenly that the +fight was now equalised, and that there stood only one man to oppose +him. His heart leaped up. New life gave spring to his muscles; and to +these new feelings he gave vent in one loud shout, as he sprang upon his +adversary and cleft him to the chin with one sweep of his sword! + +Meanwhile Kettle Flatnose had killed his man; and he was about to come +up behind Hake and sweep off his head, when he was seized by Glumm and +dragged violently back. + +"Would ye rob Erling of the honour of slaying this noted berserk?" he +said sternly. + +"Truly," replied Kettle, somewhat abashed, "I did not know that he was +noted; and as for the honour of it, I do think that Erling seems to have +got honour enough to-day (if all this be his work) to content him for +some time to come; but as ye will," he added, putting the point of his +sword on the ground, and resting his arms on the hilt. + +Glumm also leaned on his sword; and standing thus, these two watched the +fight. + +Now, it may perhaps seem to some readers that as the other men had been +disposed of so summarily, it was strange that Erling the Bold should be +so long in dispatching this one; but for our hero's credit, we must +point out several facts which may have perhaps been overlooked. In the +first place, Kettle Flatnose was a thoroughly fresh man when he began +the fight, and although he killed two men, it must be remembered that +one of these was slain while off his guard. Then, Glumm did indeed slay +his man promptly, but he was one of King Harald's ordinary men-at-arms; +whereas Erling was opposed by one of the most celebrated of the King's +warriors--Hake, the berserk of Hadeland--a man whose name and prowess +were known far and wide, not only in Norway, but in Denmark, and all +along the southern shores of the Baltic. It would have been strange +indeed had such a man fallen easily before any human arm, much more +strange had he succumbed at once to one that had been already much +exhausted with fighting. + +True to the brotherhood to which he belonged, the berserk attacked +Erling with incredible fury. He roared more like a mad bull than a man +as he made the onset; his eyes glared, his mouth foamed, and he bit his +shield as he was driven back. Being fresh, he danced round Erling +perpetually, springing in to cut and thrust, and leaping back to avoid +the terrific blows which the latter fetched at him with his weighty axe. +Once he made a cut at Erling's head, which the latter did not attempt +to parry, intending to trust to his helmet to defend him, and forgetting +for the moment that he had cast that useful piece of armour on the +plain. Luckily the blow was not truly aimed. It shore a lock from +Erling's head as he swung his axe against his opponent's shield, and +battered him down on his knees; but the berserk leaped up with a yell, +and again rushed at him. Hake happened just then to cast his eyes on +the two men who were quietly looking on, and he so managed the fight for +a few moments afterwards that he got near to them. Then turning towards +them with a howl of demoniacal fury, he made a desperate cut at the +unsuspecting Glumm, who was taken so thoroughly by surprise that he made +no movement whatever to defend himself. Fortunately. Kettle Flatnose +was on the alert, but he had only time to thrust his sword awkwardly +between Glumm's head and the descending weapon. The act prevented a +fatal gash, but it could not altogether arrest the force of the blow, +which fell on the flat of his sword, and beat it down on Glumm's skull +so violently that he was instantly stretched upon the green sward. +Erling's axe fell on the helm of the berserk almost at the same time. +Even in that moment of victory a feeling of respect for the courage and +boldness of this man touched the heart of Erling, who, with the +swiftness of thought, put in force his favourite practice--he turned the +edge of the axe, and the broad side of it fell on the steel headpiece +with tremendous force, causing the berserk of Hadeland to stretch +himself on the green sward beside Glumm the Gruff; thus ending the +famous battle of the "Berserkers and the Bold", in regard to which +Thikskul the scald writes:-- + + "The Bold one and his doughty friend, + Glumm the Gruff of Horlingsend, + Faced, fought, and felled, and bravely slew, + Full twenty men--a berserk crew + Sent by King Harald them to slay-- + But much he rued it--lack-a-day! + The heroes cut and hacked them sore, + Hit, split, and slashed them back and fore-- + And left them lying in their gore." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN. + +SHOWS THAT ELOQUENCE DOES NOT ALWAYS FLOW WHEN IT IS EXPECTED, AND THAT +GLUMM BEGINS A NEW COURSE OF ACTION. + +On examination it was found that Glumm's hurt was not severe. He had +merely been stunned by the force of the blow, and there was a trifling +wound in the scalp from which a little blood flowed. While Kettle held +a helmet full of water, and Erling bathed the wound, the latter said: + +"How comes it, Kettle, that ye discovered our straits, and appeared so +fortunately?" + +Kettle laughed and said: "The truth is, that accident brought me here. +You know that I had all but wrought out my freedom by this time, but in +consideration of my services in the battle at the Springs, Ulf set me +free at once, and this morning I left him to seek service with King +Harald Haarfager." + +"That was thankless of thee," said Erling. + +"So said Ulf," rejoined Kettle; "nevertheless, I came off, and was on my +way over the fells to go to the King when I fell in with Hake the +berserk--though I knew not that it was he--and joined him." + +Erling frowned, and looked enquiringly at Kettle as he said: + +"But what possessed thee, that thou shouldst quit so good a master for +one so bad, and how comes it thou hast so readily turned against the +King's men?" + +"Little wonder that you are perplexed," said Kettle, "seeing that ye +know not my motive. The truth is, that I had a plan in my head, which +was to enter Harald's service, that I might act the spy on him, and so +do my best for one who, all the time I have been in thraldom, has been +as kind to me as if he had been my own father." + +"Thou meanest Ulf?" said Erling. + +"I do," replied Kettle with enthusiasm, "and I'd willingly die for him +if need be. As ye know full well, it needs no wizard to tell that such +men as Ulf and your father will not easily be made to bend their necks +to the King's yoke; and for this I honour them, because they respect the +law of the land more than they respect the King. Happy is the nation +where such men abound; and in saying this I do no dishonour to the King, +but the reverse." + +Erling looked in surprise at Kettle, while he continued to bathe the +face of his still unconscious friend, for his language and bearing were +much altered from what they had been when he was in thraldom, and there +was an air of quiet dignity about him, which seemed to favour the common +report that he had been a man of note in his own land. + +"Well," continued Kettle, "it is equally certain that Harald is not a +man who will tamely submit to be thwarted in his plans, so I had made up +my mind to take service with him, in order that I might be able to find +out his intentions and observe his temper towards the men of Horlingdal, +and thus be in a position to give them timely warning of any danger that +threatened. On my way hither I met Hake, as I have said. On hearing +that he belonged to King Harald, I told him that I had just got my +freedom from Ulf, and wished to join the King. He seemed very glad, and +said he thought I would make a good berserk; told me that he was out in +search of some of the King's enemies, and proposed that I should assist +him. Of course this suited me well; but it was only when we found you +that I became aware who the King's enemies were, and resolved to act as +ye have seen me do. I did not choose to tell Ulf my intention, lest my +plan should miscarry; but, now that I find who the King counts his foes, +and know how sharply he intends to treat them, it seems to me that I +need go no farther." + +"Truly thou needst not," said Erling, "for Harald is in the worst +possible humour with us all, and did his best to stop me from going home +to tell the fact." + +"Then is my mission ended. I will return to Ulfstede," said Kettle, +throwing the water out of his helmet, and replacing it on his head, as +he rose and grasped his sword. "Meanwhile, I will cut off Hake's head, +and take it back with me." + +"Thou wilt do so at thy peril," said Erling; "Hake fell to my hand, and +I will finish the work which I have begun. Do thou go catch three or +four of the horses, for I see that Glumm is recovering." + +"I will not interfere with your business," said Kettle, with a laugh, +"only I thought you meant to leave his carcass lying there unheeded, and +was unwilling to go off without his head as a trophy." + +Kettle went to catch the horses--three of which he tied to trees to be +ready for them, while he loaded the fourth with the most valuable of the +arms and garments of the slain. Meanwhile Glumm groaned, and, sitting +up, rubbed his head ruefully. + +"I thought someone had sent me to Valhalla," he said, fetching a deep +sigh. + +"Not yet, friend Glumm, not yet. There is still work for thee to do on +earth, and the sooner ye set about doing it the better, for methinks the +King will wonder what has become of his berserkers, and will send out +men in search of them ere long. Canst mount thy horse?" + +"Mount him? aye," said Glumm, leaping up, but staggering when he had +gained his legs, so that Erling had to support him for a few minutes. +He put his hand to his forehead, and, observing blood on it, asked: "Is +the wound deep?" + +"Only a scratch," said Erling, "but the blow was heavy. If the sword of +Kettle Flatnose had not caught it in time, it would have been thy +death." + +"Truly it has not been far from that as it is, for my head rings as if +the brain were being battered with Thor's hammer! Come, let us mount." + +As he spoke, Kettle brought forward the horses. Glumm mounted with +difficulty, and they all rode away. But Erling had observed a slight +motion of life in the body of Hake, and after they had gone a few yards +he said: "Ride on slowly, Glumm, I will go back to get a ring from the +finger of the berserk, which I forgot." + +He turned, and rode quickly back to the place where the berserk's body +lay, dismounted, and kneeled beside it. There was a large silver ring +on the middle finger of Hake's right hand, which he took off and put on +his own finger, replacing it with a gold one of his own. Then he ran to +the spring, and, filling his helmet with water, came back and laved the +man's temples therewith, at the same time pouring a little of it into +his mouth. In a few minutes he began to show symptoms of revival, but +before he had recovered sufficiently to recognise who his benefactor +was, Erling had vaulted into the saddle and galloped away. + +They arrived at Glummstede that evening about supper-time, but Glumm was +eager to hear the discussion that was sure to take place when the news +of the fight and of Harald's state of mind was told, so he rode past his +own home, and accompanied his friend to Ulfstede. We cannot say for +certain that he was uninfluenced by other motives, for Glumm, as the +reader knows, was not a communicative man; he never spoke to anyone on +the subject; we incline, however, to the belief that there were mingled +ideas in his brain and mixed feelings in his heart as he rode to +Ulfstede! + +Great was the sensation in the hall when Erling, Glumm, and Kettle +entered with the marks of the recent fight still visible upon them-- +especially on Glumm, whose scalp wound, being undressed, permitted a +crimson stream to trickle down his face--a stream which, in his own +careless way, he wiped off now and then with the sleeve of his coat, +thereby making his aspect conspicuously bloody. Tremendous was the +flutter in Ada's heart when she saw him in this plight, for well did she +know that deeds of daring had been done before such marks could have +been left upon her gruff lover. + +The hall was crowded with armed men, for many bonders had assembled to +await the issue of the decision at the Thing, and much anxiety as well +as excitement prevailed. Ulf recognised his late thrall with a look of +surprise, but each of them was made to quaff a brimming tankard of ale +before being allowed to speak. To say truth, they were very willing to +accept the draught, which, after the fatigues they had undergone, tasted +like nectar. + +Erling then stood up, and in the midst of breathless silence began to +recount the incidents which had befallen him and his companion while in +the execution of their mission. + +"In the first place," he said, "it is right to let ye all know that the +King's countenance towards us is as black as a thundercloud, and that we +may expect to see the lightning flash out before long. But it is some +comfort to add that Glumm and Kettle and I have slain, or rendered unfit +to fight, twenty of Harald's men." + +In the midst of the murmur of congratulation with which this +announcement was received, Erling observed that Hilda, who had been +standing near the door, went out. The result of this was, that the poor +youth's spirit sank, and it was with the utmost difficulty he plucked up +heart to relate the incidents of the fight, in which he said so little +about himself that one might have imagined he had been a mere spectator. +Passing from that subject as quickly as possible, he delivered his +opinion as to the hopes and prospects before them, and, cutting his +speech short, abruptly quitted the hall. + +Any little feeling of disappointment that might have been felt at the +lame way in which Erling had recounted his exploits was, however, amply +compensated by Glumm, who, although usually a man of few words, had no +lack of ideas or of power to express them when occasion required, in a +terse, stern style of his own, which was very telling. He gave a +faithful account of the fight, making mention of many incidents which +his friend had omitted to touch on, and dwelling particularly on the +deeds of Kettle. As to that flat-nosed individual himself, when called +upon to speak, he addressed the assembly with a dignity of manner and a +racy utterance of language which amazed those who had only known him as +a thrall, and who now for the first time met him as a freed man. He +moreover introduced into his speech a few touches of humour which +convulsed his audience with laughter, and commented on the condition of +affairs in a way that filled them with respect, so that from that hour +he became one of the noted men of the dale. + +Erling meanwhile hurried towards one of the cliffs overlooking the +fiord. He was well acquainted with Hilda's favourite haunts, and soon +found her, seated on a bank, with a very disconsolate look, which, +however, vanished on his appearing. + +"Wherefore didst thou hasten away just as I began to speak, Hilda?" he +said, somewhat reproachfully, as he sat down beside her. + +"Because I did not wish to hear details of the bloody work of which thou +art so fond. Why wilt thou always be seeking to slay thy fellows?" + +The girl spoke in tones so sad and desponding, that her lover looked +upon her for some time in silent surprise. + +"Truly, Hilda," he said, "the fight was none of my seeking." + +"Did I not hear thee say," she replied, "that Kettle and Glumm and thou +had slain twenty of the King's men, and that ye regarded this as a +comforting thought?" + +"Aye, surely; but these twenty men did first attack Glumm and me while +alone, and we slew them in self-defence. Never had I returned to tell +it, had not stout Kettle Flatnose come to our aid." + +"Thank Heaven for that!" said Hilda, with a look of infinite relief. +"How did it happen?" + +"Come. I will tell thee all from first to last. And here is one who +shall judge whether Glumm and I are to blame for slaying these men." + +As he spoke, the hermit approached. The old man looked somewhat paler +than usual, owing to the loss of blood caused by the wound he had +received in his recent defence of Ulfstede. Erling rose and saluted him +heartily, for, since the memorable prowess in the defence of Ulfstede, +Christian had been high in favour among the people of the neighbourhood. + +"Hilda and I were considering a matter of which we will make thee +judge," said Erling, as they sat down on the bank together. + +"I will do my best," said the hermit, with a smile, "if Hilda consents +to trust my judgment." + +"That she gladly does," said the maid. + +"Well, then, I will detail the facts of the case," said Erling; "but +first tell me what strange marks are those on the skin thou holdest in +thy hand?" + +"These are words," said the hermit, carefully spreading out a roll of +parchment, on which a few lines were written. + +Erling and Hilda regarded the strange characters with much interest. +Indeed, the young man's look almost amounted to one of awe, for he had +never seen the scroll before, although Hilda, to whom it had several +times been shown and explained, had told him about it. + +"These marks convey thoughts," said Christian, laying his forefinger on +the characters. + +"Can they convey intricate thoughts," asked Erling, "such as are +difficult to express?" + +"Aye; there is no thought which can quit the tongue of one man and enter +the understanding of another which may not be expressed by these letters +in different combinations." + +"Dim ideas of this have been in my mind," said Erling, "since I went on +viking cruise to the south, when first I heard of such a power being +known to and used by many, but I believed it not. If this be as thou +sayest, and these letters convey thy thoughts, then, though absent, thy +thoughts might be known to me--if I did but understand the tracing of +them." + +"Most true," returned the hermit; "and more than that, there be some +who, though dead, yet speak to their fellows, and will continue to do so +as long as the records are preserved and the power to comprehend them be +maintained." + +"Mysterious power," said Erling; "I should like much to possess it." + +"If thou wilt come to my poor abode on the cliff I will teach it thee. +A few months, or less, will suffice. Even Hilda knows the names of the +separate signs, and she has applied herself to it for little more than a +few days." + +Hilda's face became scarlet when Erling looked at her in surprise, but +the unobservant hermit went on to descant upon the immense value of +written language, until Hilda reminded him that he had consented to sit +in judgment on a knotty point. + +"True, I had forgotten.--Come now, Erling, let me hear it." + +The youth at once began, and in a few minutes had so interested his +hearers that they gazed in his face and hung upon his words with rapt +attention, while he detailed the incidents of the combats with a degree +of fluency and fervour that would have thrown the oratory of Glumm and +Kettle quite into the shade had it been told in the hall. + +While Erling was thus engaged, his friend Glumm, having finished the +recital of his adventures for the twentieth time, and at the same time +eaten a good supper, was advised by his companions to have the wound in +his head looked to. + +"What! hast thou not had it dressed yet?" asked Ulf; "why, that is very +foolish. Knowest thou not that a neglected wound may compass thy death? +Come hither, Ada; thy fingers are skilled in such offices. Take Glumm +to an inner chamber, and see if thou canst put his head to rights." + +"Methinks," cried Guttorm Stoutheart, with a laugh, "that she is more +likely to put his heart wrong than his head right with these wicked +black eyes of hers. Have a care, Glumm: they pierce deeper than the +sword of the berserk." + +Ada pretended not to hear this, but she appeared by no means displeased, +as she led Glumm to an inner chamber, whither they were followed by +Alric, whose pugnacious soul had been quite fascinated by the story of +the recent fight, and who was never tired of putting questions as to +minute points. + +As Glumm sat down on a low stool to enable Ada to get at his head, she +said (for she was very proud of her lover's prowess, and her heart +chanced to be in a melting mood that night), "Thou hast done well +to-day, it would seem?" + +"It is well thou thinkest so," replied Glumm curtly, remembering +Erling's advice.--"No, boy," he added, in reply to Alric, "I did not +kill the one with the black helmet; it was Erling who gave him his +deathblow." + +"Did Hake the berserk look _dreadfully_ fierce?" asked Alric. + +"He made a few strange faces," replied Glumm. + +"The wound is but slight," observed Ada, in a tone that indicated a +little displeasure at the apparent indifference of her lover. + +"It might have been worse," replied Glumm. + +"Do tell me all about it again," entreated Alric. + +"Not now," said Glumm; "I'll repeat it when Hilda is by; she has not +heard it yet--methinks she would like to hear it." + +"Hilda like to hear it!" cried the lad, with a shout of laughter; "why, +she detests fighting almost as much as the hermit does, though, I must +say, for a man who hates it, he can do it wonderfully well himself! But +do tell me, Glumm, what was the cut that Erling gave when he brought +down that second man, you know--the big one--" + +"Which? the man whose head he chopped off, with half of the left +shoulder?" + +"No; that was the fourth. I mean the other one, with--" + +"Oh, the one he split the nose of by accident before battering down +with--" + +"No, no," cried Alric, "I mean the one with the black beard." + +"Ha!" exclaimed Glumm, "that wasn't the second man; his fall was much +further on in the fight, just after Erling had got hold of the +battle-axe. He whirled the axe round his head, brought it from over the +left down on Blackbeard's right shoulder, and split him to the waist." + +"Now, that is finished," said Ada sharply, as she put away the things +that she had used in the dressing of the wound. "I hope that every foe +thou hast to deal with in future may let thee off as well." + +"I thank thee, Ada, both for the dressing and the good wish," said Glumm +gravely, as he rose and walked into the hall, followed by his +persevering and insatiable little friend. + +Ada retired hastily to her own chamber, where she stood for a moment +motionless, then twice stamped her little foot, after which she sat down +on a stool, and, covering her face with both hands, burst into a +passionate flood of tears. + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN. + +IN WHICH ALRIC BOASTS A LITTLE, DISCOVERS SECRETS, CONFESSES A LITTLE, +AND DISTINGUISHES HIMSELF GREATLY. + +Next day there was great bustle at Ulfstede, and along the shores of the +fiord, for the men of Horlingdal were busy launching their ships and +making preparations to go to the Springs to meet and hold council with +King Harald Haarfager. + +It had been finally resolved, without a dissentient voice, that the +whole district should go forth to meet him in arms, and thus ensure fair +play at the deliberations of the Thing. Even Haldor no longer objected; +but, on the contrary, when he heard his son's account of his meeting +with the King, and of the dastardly attempt that had been made to +assassinate him and his friend, there shot across his face a gleam of +that wild ferocity which had procured him his title. It passed quickly +away, however, and gave place to a look of sad resignation, which +assured those who knew him that he regarded their chance of opposing the +King successfully to be very small indeed. + +The fleet that left the fiord consisted of the longships of Ulf, Haldor, +Erling, Glumm, and Guttorm, besides an innumerable flotilla of smaller +crafts and boats. Many of the men were well armed, not only with +first-rate weapons, but with complete suits of excellent mail of the +kinds peculiar to the period--such as shirts of leather, with steel +rings sewed thickly over them, and others covered with steel scales-- +while of the poorer bonders and the thralls some wore portions of +defensive armour, and some trusted to the thick hides of the wolf, which +were more serviceable against a sword-cut than many people might +suppose. All had shields, however, and carried either swords, bills, +spears, javelins, axes, or bows and arrows, so that, numbering as they +did, about a thousand men, they composed a formidable host. + +While these rowed away over the fiord to the Springs to make war or +peace--as the case might be--with King Harald, a disappointed spirit was +left behind in Horlingdal. + +"I'm sure I cannot see why I should not be allowed to go too," said +little Alric, on returning to Haldorstede, after seeing the fleet set +forth. "Of course I cannot fight so well as Erling _yet_, but I can do +_something_ in that way; and can even face up to a full-grown man when +occasion serves, as that red-haired Dane knows full well, methinks, if +he has got any power of feeling in his neck!" + +This was said to Herfrida, who was in the great hall spreading the board +for the midday meal, and surrounded by her maidens, some of whom were +engaged in spinning or carding wool, while others wove and sewed, or +busied themselves about household matters. + +"Have patience, my son," said Herfrida. "Thou art not yet strong enough +to go forth to battle. Doubtless, in three or four years--" + +"Three or four years!" exclaimed Alric, to whom such a space of time +appeared an age. "Why, there will be no more fighting left to be done +at the end of three or four years. Does not father say that if the King +succeeds in his illegal plans all the independence of the small kings +will be gone for ever, and--and--of course I am old enough to see that +if the small kings are not allowed to do as they please, there will be +no more occasion for war--nothing but a dull time of constant peace!" + +Herfrida laughed lightly, while her warlike son strutted up and down the +ancestral hall like a bantam cock, frowning and grunting indignantly, as +he brooded over the dark prospects of peace that threatened his native +land, and thought of his own incapacity, on account of youth, to make +glorious hay while yet the sun of war was shining. + +"Mother," he said, stopping suddenly, and crossing his arms, as he stood +with his feet planted pretty wide apart, after the fashion of those who +desire to be thought very resolute--"mother, I had a dream last night." + +"Tell it me, my son," said Herfrida, sitting down on a low stool beside +the lad. + +Now, it must be known that in those days the Northmen believed in dreams +and omens and warnings--indeed, they were altogether a very +superstitious people, having perfect faith in giants, good and bad; +elves, dark and bright; wraiths, and fetches, and guardian spirits-- +insomuch that there was scarcely one among the grown-up people who had +not seen some of these fabulous creatures, or who had not seen some +other people who had either seen them themselves or had seen individuals +who _said_ they had seen them! There were also many "clear-sighted" or +"fore-sighted" old men and women, who not only saw goblins and +supernatural appearances occasionally, and, as it were, accidentally, +like ordinary folk, but who also had the gift--so it is said--of seeing +such things when they pleased--enjoyed, as it were, an unenviable +privilege in that way. It was therefore with unusual interest that +Herfrida asked about her son's dream. + +"It must have been mara [nightmare], I think," he said, "for though I +never had it before, it seemed to me very like what Guttorm Stoutheart +says he always has after eating too hearty a meal." + +"Relate it, my son." + +"Well, you must know," said Alric, with much gravity and importance, for +he observed that the girls about the room were working softly that they +might hear him, "I dreamed that I was out on the fells, and there I met +a dreadful wolf, as big as a horse, with two heads and three tails, or +three heads and two tails, I mind not which, but it gave me little time +to notice it, for, before I was aware, it dashed at me, and I turned to +run, but my feet seemed to cleave to the earth, and my legs felt heavy +as lead, so that I could scarce drag myself along, yet, strange to say, +the wolf did not overtake me, although I heard it coming nearer and +nearer every moment, and I tried to shout, but my voice would not come +out." + +"What hadst thou to supper last night?" asked Herfrida. + +"Let me think," replied the boy meditatively; "I had four cuts of +salmon, three rolls of bread and butter, half a wild-duck, two small +bits of salt-fish, some eggs, a little milk, and a horn of ale." + +"It must have been mara," said she, thoughtfully; "but go on with thy +dream." + +"Well, just as I came to the brink of the river, I looked back and saw +the wolf close at my heels, so I dropped suddenly, and the wolf tumbled +right over me into the water, but next moment it came up in the shape of +another monster with a fish's tail, which made straight at me. Then it +all at once came into my head that my guardian spirit was behind me, and +I turned quickly round, but did not see it." + +"Art thou quite sure of that, my son?" + +Herfrida asked this in a tone of great anxiety, for to see one's own +guardian spirit was thought unlucky, and a sign that the person seeing +it was "fey", or death-doomed. + +"I'm quite sure that I did not," replied Alric, to the manifest relief +of his mother; "but I saw a long pole on the ground, which I seized, and +attacked the beast therewith, and a most notable fight we had. I only +wish that it had been true, and that thou hadst been there to see it. +Mara fled away at once, for I felt no more fear, but laid about me in a +way that minded me of Erling. Indeed, I don't think he could have done +it better himself. Oh! how I do wish, sometimes, that my dreams would +come true! However, I killed the monster at last, and hurled him into +the river, after which I felt tossed about in a strange way, and then my +senses left me, and then I awoke." + +"What thinkest thou of the dream?" said Herfrida to a wrinkled old crone +who sat on a low stool beside the fire. + +The witch-like old creature roused herself a little and said: + +"Good luck is in store for the boy." + +"Thanks for that, granny," said Alric; "canst say what sort o' good luck +it is?" + +"No; my knowledge goes no further. It may be good luck in great things, +it may be only in small matters; perhaps soon, perhaps a long time +hence: I know not." + +Having ventured this very safe and indefinite prophecy, the old woman +let her chin drop on her bosom, and recommenced the rocking to and fro +which had been interrupted by the question; while Alric laughed, and, +taking up a three-pronged spear, said that, as he had been disappointed +in going to see the fun at the Springs, he would console himself by +going and sticking salmon at the foss [waterfall]. + +"Wilt thou not wait for midday meal?" said Herfrida. + +"No, mother; this roll will suffice till night." + +"And then thou wilt come home ravening, and have mara again." + +"Be it so. I'd run the risk of that for the sake of the chance of +another glorious battle such as I had last night!" + +Saying this the reckless youth sallied forth with the spear or leister +on his shoulder, and took the narrow bridle path leading up the glen. + +It was one of those calm bright days of early autumn in which men _feel_ +that they draw in fresh life and vigour at each inhalation. With the +fragrant odours that arose from innumerable wild flowers, including that +sweetest of plants, the lily of the valley, was mingled the pleasant +smell of the pines, which clothed the knolls, or hung here and there +like eyebrows on the cliffs. The river was swollen considerably by +recent heat, which had caused the great glaciers on the mountain tops to +melt more rapidly than usual, and its rushing sound was mingled with the +deeper roar of the foss, or waterfall, which leaped over a cliff thirty +feet high about two miles up the valley. Hundreds of rills of all sizes +fell and zigzagged down the mountains on either side, some of them +appearing like threads of silver on the precipices, and all, river and +rills, being as cold as the perpetual ice-fields above which gave them +birth. Birds twittered in the bushes, adding sweetness to the wild +music, and bright greens and purples, lit up by gleams of sunshine, +threw a charm of softness over the somewhat rugged scene. + +The Norse boy's nature was sensitive, and peculiarly susceptible of +outward influences. As he walked briskly along, casting his eager gaze +now at the river which foamed below him, and anon at the distant +mountain ridges capped with perennial snows, he forgot his late +disappointment, or, which is the same thing, drowned it in present +enjoyment. Giving vent to his delight, much as boys did a thousand +years later, by violent whistling or in uproarious bursts of song, he +descended to the river's edge, with the intention of darting his salmon +spear, when his eye caught sight of a woman's skirt fluttering on one of +the cliffs above. He knew that Hilda and Ada had gone up the valley +together on a visit to a kinswoman, for Herfrida had spoken of expecting +them back to midday meal; guessing, therefore, that it must be them, he +drew back out of sight, and clambered hastily up the bank, intending to +give them a surprise. He hid himself in the bushes at a jutting point +which they had to pass, and from which there was a magnificent view of +the valley, the fiord, and the distant sea. + +He heard the voices of the two girls in animated conversation as they +drew near, and distinguished the name of Glumm more than once, but, not +being a gossip by nature, he thought nothing of this, and was intent +only on pouncing out on them when they should reach a certain stone in +the path. Truth constrains us to admit that our young friend, like many +young folk of the present day, was a practical joker--yet it must also +be said that he was not a very bad one, and, to his honour be it +recorded, he never practised jokes on old people! + +It chanced, however, that the two friends stopped short just before +reaching the stone, so that Alric had to exercise patience while the +girls contemplated the view--at least while Hilda did so, for on Ada's +face there was a frown, and her eyes were cast on the ground. + +"How lovely Horlingdal looks on such a day!" observed Hilda. + +"I have no eyes for beautiful things to-night," said Ada pettishly; "I +cannot get over it--such cool, thankless indifference when I took the +trouble to dress his--his--stupid head, and then, not satisfied with +telling the whole story over to thee, who cares no more for it than if +it were the slaying of half a dozen sheep, he must needs go and pay +frequent visits to Ingeborg and to Halgerda of the Foss--and--and--But I +know it is all out of spite, and that he does not care a bodkin for +either of them, yet I cannot bear it, and I _won't_ bear it, so he had +better look to himself. And yet I would not for the best mantle in the +dale that he knew I had two thoughts about the matter." + +"But why play fast and loose with him?" said Hilda, with a laugh at her +companion's vehemence. + +"Because I like it and I choose to do so." + +"But perchance he does not like it, and does not choose to be treated +so." + +"I care not for that." + +"Truly thy looks and tone belie thee," said Hilda, smiling. "But in all +seriousness, Ada, let me advise thee again to be more considerate with +Glumm, for I sometimes think that the men who are most worth having are +the most easily turned aside." + +"Hast thou found it so with Erling?" demanded Ada half-angrily. + +Hilda blushed scarlet at this and said: + +"I never thought of Erling in this light; at least I never--he never-- +that is--" + +Fortunately at this point Alric, in his retreat among the bushes, also +blushed scarlet, for it only then flashed upon him that he had been +acting the mean part of an eavesdropper, and had been listening to +converse which he should not have heard. Instead, therefore, of +carrying out his original intention, he scrambled into the path with as +much noise as possible, and coughed, as he came awkwardly forward. + +"Why, the wicked boy has been listening," cried Ada, laying her hand +upon the lad's shoulder, and looking sternly into his face. + +"I have," said Alric bluntly. + +"And art thou not ashamed?" + +"I am," he replied, with a degree of candour in his self-condemnation +which caused Ada and Hilda to burst into a hearty fit of laughter. + +"But," said Ada, becoming grave again, "thou hast heard too much for thy +good." + +"I know it," he replied, "and I'm sorry, Ada, but cannot help it now. +This will I say, however: I had no wish or intention to hear when I hid +myself. My desire was only to startle thee and Hilda, and before I +thought what thou wert talking of the thing was out, and now I have got +it I cannot unget it." + +"True, but thou canst keep it," said Ada. + +"I can, and ye may rest assured no word or look of mine shall betray +thee. I'll even try to conceal it from myself, and think it was a +dream, unless, indeed, I see a good chance of helping thee in this +affair!" + +Alric laughed as he said this, and the girls joined him, after which +they all went on towards Haldorstede together. + +On reaching the place where Alric had intended to fish, Ada suggested +that he should go and try his fortune, so he ran down to the river, and +the girls followed him to the bank. + +The spot selected was a rapid which terminated in a small and +comparatively quiet but deep pool. We say comparatively, because in the +state of the river at that time even in the quietest places there was +considerable commotion. Just below the pool the river opened out into a +broad shallow, over which it passed in noisy foam, but with little +depth, except in the centre. Below this, again, it narrowed, and formed +another deep pool. + +Alric ran into the water till he was about knee-deep, and then plunged +his spear. Nothing resulted from the first plunge, but the effect of +the second was more tremendous than had ever before happened to the +young sportsman, for the pole of the trident received a twist so violent +that it would infallibly have been torn from the boy's grasp had he not +held on with the tenacity of a vice, and allowed himself to be dragged +bodily into the pool. As we have said, the pool was deep, but that was +nothing to Alric, who could swim like a duck. The Norse maidens who +watched him knew this, and although slightly alarmed, felt on the whole +more inclined to laugh than to tremble as his head emerged and sank +again several times, while the fish which he had struck dragged him +about the pool. After a few seconds of violent and wild exertion it +rushed down the pool into the rapid, and then it was that the girls +perceived that Alric had struck and was clinging to one of the +largest-sized salmon that ever appeared in Horlingdal river. + +Fortunate it was for the boy that the fish took the rapid, for it had +almost choked him in the deep pool; but now he scrambled on his feet, +and began to do battle gallantly--endeavouring to thrust the fish +downwards and pin it to the stones whenever it passed over a shallow +part, on which occasions its back and silver sides became visible, and +its great tail--wide spreading, like a modern lady's fan--flashed in the +air as it beat the water in terror or fury. Alric's spirit was ablaze +with excitement, for the fish was too strong for him, so that every time +it wriggled itself he was made to shake and stagger in a most +ridiculously helpless manner, and when it tried to bolt he was pulled +flat down on his face and had to follow it--sometimes on his knees, +sometimes at full length, for, over and over again, when he was about to +rise, or had half-risen, there was another pull, and down he went again, +quite flat, while the roaring torrent went right over him. + +But no limpet ever stuck to rock with greater tenacity than did Alric to +the handle of that trident; and it is but just to add, for the +information of those who know it not, that the difficulty of retaining +one's foothold on the pebbly bed of a river when knee-deep in a foaming +rapid is very great indeed, even when one has nothing more to do than +attend to the balancing of one's own body--much greater, of course, in +circumstances such as we describe. + +At last the salmon made a rush, and was swept over a shallow part of the +rapid, close under the bank on which the girls stood. Here Alric +succeeded in thrusting it against a large stone. For the first time he +managed to stand up erect, and, although holding the fish with all his +might, looked up, and breathed, or rather gasped, freely: + +"Hoch! hah! _what_ a fish! sk-ho!" + +"Oh, I wish we could help thee!" exclaimed the girls, with flashing eyes +and outstretched hands, as if they could hardly restrain themselves from +leaping into the water, which was indeed the case! + +"N-no! ye can't! 's not poss'ble--hah! my! oh there 'e goes again-- +s-t-swash!" + +Down he went, flat, as he spoke, and water stopped his utterance, while +the fish wriggled into the centre of the channel, and carried him into +the deep pool below! + +Here the scene was not quite so exciting, because the battle was not so +fierce. The salmon had it all his own way in the deep water, and +dragged his attached friend hither and thither as he pleased. On the +other hand, Alric ceased to contend, and merely held on with his right +hand, while with his left he kept his head above water. The pool +circled about in large oily wavelets flecked with foam, so that there +was a great contrast in all this to the tremendous turmoil of the raging +rapid. But the comparative calm did not last long. The huge fish made +a frantic, and apparently a last, effort to get free. It rushed down to +the foot of the pool, and passed over the edge into the next rapid. + +The girls shrieked when they saw this, for, unlike the former, this one +was a deep rush of the river, between narrower banks, where its course +was obstructed by large rocks. Against these the stream beat furiously. +Alric knew the spot well, and was aware of the extreme danger of his +position. He therefore made a violent effort to drag the fish towards a +point where there was a slight break or eddy among a number of boulders, +intending to let him go, if necessary, rather than lose his life. He +succeeded, however, in getting upon one of the rocks quite close to the +bank, and then endeavoured to lift the fish out of the water. In this +also he was successful; made a splendid heave, and flung it with all his +force towards the bank, on which it alighted, trident and all, at the +feet of Hilda. But in letting go his hold of the handle Alric lost his +balance, flung his arms above his head in a vain endeavour to recover +himself, and, with a loud shout, fell back into the roaring torrent and +was swept away. + +A few moments sufficed to carry him into the pool below, to the edge of +which the girls rushed, and found that he was floating round and round +in a state of insensibility, every moment passing near to the vortex of +the rapid that flowed out of it. Hilda at once rushed in waist-deep and +caught him by the collar. She would have been swept away along with +him, but Ada also sprang forward and grasped Hilda by the mantle. She +could not, however, drag her back; neither could Hilda in any way help +herself. Thus they stood for a few moments swaying to and fro in the +current, and, doubtless, one or more of them would have soon been +carried down had not efficient aid been at hand. + +High up on the cliff over the scene where this incident occurred, +Christian the hermit was seated on a log before his door. He sat gazing +dreamily out upon the landscape when Alric began to fish, but, seeing +the danger to which the lad exposed himself, after he had speared the +fish, and fearing that there might be need of his aid, he quickly +descended to the scene of action. He did not arrive a moment too soon, +for the whole event occurred very rapidly. Running to the rescue he +caught Ada round the waist with both hands, and drew her gently back; +she was soon out of danger, after which there was no great difficulty in +dragging the others safely to land. + +At once the hermit stripped off the boy's coat, loosened the kerchief +that was round his throat, and sought, by every means in his power, to +restore him to consciousness. His efforts were successful. The boy +soon began to breathe, and in a short time stood up, swaying himself to +and fro, and blinking. + +The first thing he said was: + +"Where is the salmon?" + +"The salmon? Oh, I forgot all about it," said Ada. + +"Never mind it, dear Alric," said Hilda. + +"Never mind it?" he cried, starting into sudden animation; "what! have +ye left it behind?" + +Saying this he burst away from his friends, and ran up the bank of the +river until he came to where the fish was lying, still impaled on the +barbed prongs of the trident. The run so far restored him that he had +sufficient strength to shoulder the fish, although it afterwards turned +out to be a salmon of thirty-five pounds weight, and he quickly rejoined +his friends, who returned with him to Haldorstede, where, you may be +quite sure, he gave a graphic account of the adventure to willing and +admiring ears. + +"So, granny," he said, at the conclusion of the narrative, to the old +crone who was still seated by the fire, "thy prophecy has come true +sooner than ye expected, and it has come doubly true, for though the +good luck in store for me was a matter of small general importance, no +one can deny that it is a great fish!" + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN. + +TREATS OF ANCIENT DIPLOMACY AMONG THE NORSEMEN, AND SHOWS HOW OUR HERO +TURNS THE TABLES ON A WOULD-BE ASSASSIN. + +When King Harald heard the news of the defeat of Hake and the slaughter +of his men by Erling and Glumm, great was his wrath at first, and Jarl +Rongvold had much ado to appease him and prevent him from going at once +to Horlingdal to ravage it with fire and sword. But when he had cooled +a little, and heard the details of the fight from Hake himself, his +anger against the young warriors changed into admiration of their +dauntless courage. + +Harald Fairhair was a kingly man in spirit as well as in appearance, and +was above encouraging a mean or vengeful mood. He was indeed fierce and +violent in his rage, and often did things which, when read of in the +calm of a comparatively peaceful time, make one shudder; but it must not +be forgotten that the age in which he lived was a cruel and bloody one, +and, in Norway, without one touch of the gentle religion of Christ to +soften its asperities. He could never have retained his power and rule +over the stern warriors of his day, had he not possessed much of their +own callous indifference to the horrors and cruelties of war. + +"Thou hadst tougher work than thou countedst on, it would seem," he said +to Hake; then, turning to Jarl Rongvold, with a laugh, "Methinks I would +fain have this Erling the Bold and his friend Glumm the Gruff among my +men-at-arms." + +"I fear, sire, that they will not be easily induced to enter thy +service, for they are both Sea-kings, and independent spirits." + +"Such men have submitted to us before now," said the King, with a +peculiar glance. + +"Most true," returned the jarl, flushing; "but all men have not the same +belief in your wisdom." + +"That may be, yet methinks I could tame this Sea-king--this Erling. +Perchance costly gifts might win him, or it may be that rough blows +would suit him better. What thinkest thou, Hake? thou hast had some +experience in that way." + +"If you mean, sire, that you have a mind to receive rough blows at his +hand, I will guarantee him both able and willing to gratify you. I know +not the weight of Thor's hammer, but I am bound to say that it occurred +to my mind when Erling's axe came down on my steel headpiece, and set a +host of stars dancing in my brain." + +"I believe thee," said the King, smiling grimly, "and thy visage speaks +for itself." + +This was indeed the case. The berserk's countenance was very pale. He +still suffered from the crashing blow with which he had been felled, and +his heart rankled under his defeat, for he was not aware that the blow, +heavy though it was, had been delivered in mercy, or that if his enemy +had not turned aside the edge of his axe it would have cleft him to the +chin. Perchance, if he _had_ known this it would not have improved the +state of his feelings; for Hake possessed no nobility of spirit. + +"It may be," continued Harald, "that thou shalt have another opportunity +of measuring swords with this Sea-king. Meanwhile, Jarl Rongvold, go +thou with Rolf, and bring round the Dragon and the other longships to +the fiord, for I mistrust the men of this district, and will fare to the +Springs by sea." + +In accordance with these instructions the jarl brought the King's fleet +round without delay. On the following morning they embarked, and set +sail for the appointed place of meeting. + +Here the fleet under Haldor and Ulf had already cast anchor. The ships +lay close to the rocks, near the mouth of the river into which Erling +had thrust his cutter just before the battle with the Danes; and a fine +sight it was to behold these, with their painted shields and gilded +masts and figure-heads, lying in the still water, crowded with armed +warriors, while Harald's longship, the Dragon, and all his other +vessels, came by twos and threes into the fiord, the oars tossing foam +on the blue waters, and the gaily coloured sails swelling out before a +gentle breeze. + +The King laid his ship alongside of a point of rocks on the south side +of the bay. Then, when all the fleet had assembled, both parties +landed, and the Thing was summoned by sound of horn. It was held on the +level ground where the recent battle had been fought. There were still +strewn about many evidences of the ferocity of that fight; and when the +King looked upon the host of stout and well-armed men who had assembled, +not only from Horlingdal, but from the whole of the surrounding +district, he felt that, however much he might wish to force obedience on +his subjects, "discretion" was at that time "the better part of valour." + +When the Thing was assembled the King stood up to speak, and there was +probably not a man upon the ground who did not in his heart acknowledge +that the tall, stout warrior, with the thick mass of golden locks, and +the large masculine features, was, as far as physique went, a worthy +wearer of the crown of Norway. It may be added that physique went a +very long way indeed in those days; yet it is due to the Northmen to say +that, at the same time, intellect was held in higher repute among them +than among any of the feudally governed nations of Europe. One evidence +of this was, that at the Things the best speaker, no matter what his +rank, had a better chance of swaying the people than the King himself; +while, in other countries, might to a large extent was right, and no one +dared to open his mouth against him who chanced to be in power. + +But King Harald Haarfager's power lay not merely in his personal +appearance and indomitable will. He was also a good speaker, and, like +all good speakers in a wrong cause, was an able sophist. But he had men +to deal with who were accustomed to think and reason closely, as must +ever be more or less the case with a self-governed people. There were +acute men there, men who had the laws of the land "by heart", in the +most literal sense of those words,--for there were no books to consult +and no precedents to cite in those days; and his hearers weighed with +jealous care each word he said. + +The King began by complimenting the men of the district for their +spirit, and their resolution to defend the laws of the realm; and he +enlarged a little on these laws and on the wisdom of his own father, +Halfdan the Black, and the men of his time, who had made and modified +many of them. Then he went on to say that with time the circumstances +of nations altered, and that, with these alterations, there arose a +necessity for the alteration and modification of old laws as well as for +the making of new ones. He deprecated the idea that he wished, as had +been said of him, to trample the laws under his feet, and rule the +country according to his own will and pleasure. Nothing was further +from his intention or his desire. His wish was to amend the laws, +especially those of them that touched on the relative position of King +and people. + +Up to this point the people heard him with respectful attention, and +hundreds of those who were more addicted to fighting than to reasoning, +especially among the younger men, began to think that after all, Harald +entertained exceedingly just opinions, and appeared to possess a spirit +of candour and fair play which did not seem to justify the outcry that +had been raised against him. Even these, however, remembered that it +was not very long since a small king of one of the northern glens had +been summoned by Harold to submit to his views of government, and, on +his declining to do so, had been burnt, with all his family and +followers, in his own house, contrary to law! They therefore knitted +their brows and waited to hear more. + +The King then began to explain his ideas with regard to the royal +authority over the chief men of the districts, some of which are already +known to the reader. At this point the assembly listened with deep, +earnest attention. Some of the men sat with hands clasped on their +knees, and with stern downcast brows. Some gazed up at the clouds with +the peculiar expression of men who listen and weigh arguments. Others +leaned on their swords or shields, and, with compressed lips and +suspicious gaze, looked the King full in the face, while a few regarded +him with a sneer; but the expression on the faces of the greater part +denoted manliness of feeling and honesty of purpose. + +After Harald had stated his views, and assured them that his great aim +was to consolidate the kingdom and to prevent the evils that flowed from +the almost unlimited independence of the petty kings, he asked the +assembly to aid him in carrying out his wishes, and to set an example of +fidelity and obedience, which would restrain others from showing that +unseemly opposition to him which had only resulted in severe and merited +punishment. + +He then sat down amid a murmur of mingled applause and disapprobation. + +After a few minutes of animated converse among themselves, there arose +an old man with a bald head, a flowing beard, and sightless eyes. He +was the "lagman" or district judge, and law-expounder of Horlingdal. +Deep silence ensued, and he said, in a decided though somewhat tremulous +tone-- + +"King Harald, I am a very old man now, and can remember the time when +your noble sire, Halfdan the Black, ruled in Norway. I have fought by +his side, and lost my eyes in his service--in a fight in which our +opponents gave us the tooth-ache. [Norse expression signifying `the +worst of it.'] I have also heard him speak those words of wisdom to +which you have referred, and have seen him bow to the laws which were +made _not_ by himself, but by him in conjunction with the Thing legally +assembled for the purpose." + +There was a loud murmur of applause at this point. + +"And now that we have heard the King's opinions," continued the old man, +turning to the people, "and know that his intentions are good, although +the manner in which he has set about carrying them into effect is +undoubtedly wrong, my counsel is that we nevertheless submit to him in +this matter, for we know that a great number of the small kings have +already submitted, and it were better to have a beneficial change--even +when not carried out exactly according to law--than to plunge this +country into prolonged and useless warfare, in which much blood will, +assuredly, be spilt, and nothing of any value gained." + +The lagman sat down, but only a few of those present indicated their +approval of his sentiments. + +Immediately Haldor the Fierce stood up, and men could see that his +spirit was stirred within him, for a dark frown lowered on a brow which +was at most times fair and unruffled like the summer sky. There was +deep silence in the assembly before he began to speak, and the King, +despite the suppressed anger which rankled in his breast, could not +choose but look upon his commanding figure with respect, also with +surprise, for he recognised the strong resemblance between him and +Erling, though he knew not their relationship. + +"I agree not," said Haldor, "with what has just been said by our +respected lagman. A change, even for the better, ought _never_ to be +accepted if not made according to law, No one can say that any change +will certainly be for the better until it is tried; and should this one, +perchance, turn out for the worse, then shall we have neither advantage +nor law on our side. For my part I had rather see my country plunged +into warfare--which no one, unless he is gifted with the foreknowledge +of the gods, can say will be either prolonged or useless--than see her +laws trampled under foot; for well do I know that, if the King be +permitted to make himself an outlaw, blood will be kept boiling +perpetually from one end of the land to the other, and it were better, +methinks, that that blood should spill than boil. My counsel is, that +the King be advised to call a Thing in the regular way, so that the +changes he would make shall be fully considered, and either be made law +or rejected; for, if he attempts to enforce his plans on us as he has +done on other small kings, we will assuredly resist him as long as there +is a man left in the district to wield a battle-axe." + +There was a great shout and clash of arms when this was said, and the +King's face became crimson with rage, for he saw clearly that the +feeling of the majority was against him. + +At this point Jarl Rongvold stood up and spoke in the bland tones of a +man who wishes to throw oil on troubled waters. + +He said that it was his earnest entreaty to the bonders and +house-holding men, both great and small, then and there assembled, that +they should calmly consider the proposals of the King, and not allow +themselves to be carried away by unsound reasoning, although it might +seem very plausible, for he was certain that the King's desire was the +good of the country; and although circumstances had rendered it +necessary that some of the rebellious should be punished, no one could +say that the King was not willing and ready to do all that he did in a +fair, open, and straightforward manner. + +At this Erling was unable to restrain himself. He sprang up, and, with +a passionate flow of words that burst forth like a mountain torrent, +exclaimed-- + +"Thinkest thou, Jarl Rongvold, that our brains are so addled that we +cannot distinguish between black and white? Is thy memory so short, is +thy slavery to the King so complete, that thou must say evil is good and +good evil? Hast thou and has the King so soon forgotten that two +strangers came to the court with a message from one of the legal +assemblies of this land,--that, trusting to the honour of the King, they +came without following, and with only such arms as were needful for +personal defence,--and that the honour to which they trusted was not +proof against the temptation to send a noted berserk and nineteen men to +waylay and slay them? Is all this clean gone from your memory, Jarl and +King? or is your wit so small that ye should think we will believe in +soft words about fair play when such foul deeds are so recent that the +graves are yet wet with the blood of those whom Glumm and I were +compelled to slay in self-defence?" + +At this the King started up, and his face became white and red by turns, +as he said-- + +"Ye shall, both of you, rue this day, Erling and Glumm!" + +Erling made no reply, but Glumm started up and was in so great a passion +that he could hardly speak; nevertheless he made shift to splutter out-- + +"Threats, King Harald, are like water spilt on a shield which can only +rust if left there; I wipe them off and fling them away!" + +He could add no more, but with a contemptuous motion of the hand he +struck his fist violently against his shirt of mail, and the bonders +laughed while they applauded him. + +Then stood up a man in the troop of the Springdal men, who was of great +stature and grim countenance, clad in a leather cloak, with an axe on +his shoulder and a great steel hat upon his head. He looked sternly, +and said-- + +"When rights are not respected then the crows flap their wings and caw, +for they know that ere long they shall glut themselves with human +blood." + +He sat down, and immediately after Ulf of Romsdal stood up. Ulf had +fully as much fire as Erling or Glumm, but he possessed greater power of +self-restraint, and, as he spoke with deliberation, his words had all +the more weight. He said-- + +"King Harald, when in the exercise of our udal rights we bonders elected +thee to be our King at the Thing held in Drontheim, we stated and traced +thy descent from Odin through the Vingling dynasty, proved thy udal +right to the crown, and truly thought that we had placed it on the head +of one who would walk in the footsteps of his father, and respect that +authority and power in virtue of which he held his own high position. +But we now find that thou hast constituted thyself a law higher than the +law which made thee what thou art, and thou now wouldst have us, of our +own free will, bend our necks so low that thou mayest with the more ease +set thy foot on them and keep us down. We have served thee in all good +faith up to the present time; we have readily met thy demands for men, +ships, arms, and money, by calling together our assemblies and voting +these supplies; and now thou wouldst rob us of this our old right, and +tax us without our consent, so that thou mayest raise men for thyself, +and have it all thine own way. This must not, shall not, be. Even now, +we bonders will unanimously hold by the law if it be passed in the +proper assembly and receives our yea, and we will follow thee and serve +thee as our King as long as there is a living man amongst us. But thou, +King, must use moderation towards us, and only require of us such things +as it is lawful or possible for us to obey thee in. If, however, thou +wilt take up this matter with a high hand, and wilt try thy power and +strength against us, we have resolved among ourselves to part with thee, +and to take to ourselves some other chief who will respect those laws by +which alone society can be held together. Now, King Harald, thou must +choose one or other of these conditions before the Thing is ended." + +The loud applause which followed this speech showed that the bonders +heartily sympathised with it, and indeed several of them rose and said +that it expressed their will exactly, and they would stand or fall by +what had been spoken. + +When silence had been restored, Jarl Rongvold, who had whispered in the +King's ear some earnest words, stood forth and said: + +"It is King Harald's will to give way to you in this matter for he does +not wish to separate himself from your friendship." + +This brought the Thing to a close. Thereafter the two parties returned +to their ships, intending to feast and pass the night in them. + +The King was very affable, and invited Haldor and some of the others +whose language had been comparatively moderate to feast with him, but +they declined the honour, and retired to their own ships. + +In the evening, while the sounds of revelry were heard everywhere, a +boat approached Erling's ship. It was rowed by a single man, who, when +it touched her side, leaped on board and went aft to where Erling was +seated with Guttorm Stoutheart. + +"King Harald would speak with thee," said the man, who was no other than +Hake the berserk. + +"Methinks his intentions can scarce be friendly," said Erling, with a +grim smile, "when he sends so trusty a messenger." + +"It may be so," replied Hake coolly, "but that is nothing to me. My +business is to deliver the message and offer to conduct thee to him." + +"And pray, what surety have I that thou wilt not upset me in the fiord?" +asked Erling, laughing. + +"The surety that if I upset thee we shall be on equal terms in the +water," replied Hake gruffly. + +"Nay, that depends on which of us can swim best," returned Erling; "and, +truly, if thou canst fight as well in the water as on the land, we +should have a rare struggle, Hake." + +"Am I to say to the King that thou art afraid of him?" asked the +berserk, with a look of scorn. + +"Yea, truly, if it is thy desire to tell him a lie," retorted Erling. +"But get thee into the boat, fellow; I will follow anon." + +Hake turned on his heel and returned to the boat, while Erling took +Guttorm aside. + +"Now, art thou fey?" [death-doomed] said Guttorm. "What has made thee +so tired of life that thou shouldest put thy neck under his heel thus +readily?" + +"Fear not, my friend," said Erling; "now that I have seen King Harald a +second time, I think him a better man than at first I did. Ambition +will no doubt lead him to do many things that are contrary to his +nature; but I do not think he will violate the laws of hospitality after +what has passed. However, I may be wrong; so I would ask thee, Guttorm, +to go aboard of your ship, which lies nearest to that of the King, and, +should ye see anything like a struggle, or hear a shout do thou haste to +the rescue. I will have my men also in readiness." + +While the stout-hearted old Sea-king, in compliance with this request, +got into a small boat and rowed to his own vessel, Erling gave +particular directions to his chief house-carle to keep a sharp lookout +and be ready to act at a moment's notice. Then he went into Hake's +boat, and was rowed alongside the Dragon, where the King received him +with much condescension, and took him aft to the cabin under the high +poop. Here he offered him a horn of ale, which, however, Erling +declined, and then began to use his utmost powers of persuasion to +induce him to enter his service. At first he tried to influence him by +flattery, and commended him for his bold and straightforward conduct at +the Thing, which, he said, showed to all men that he merited well his +distinctive title; but, on finding that our hero was not to be won by +flattery, he quickly and adroitly changed his ground, began to talk of +the future prospects of Norway, and the necessity for improved +legislation. In this he was so successful that he secured the interest, +and to some extent the sympathy, of the young warrior, who entered +eagerly and somewhat more respectfully into the discussion. + +"But, sire," he said, at the close of one of the King's remarks, "if +these are your sentiments, why did you not state them more fully to-day +at the Thing, and why should you not even now call a meeting of the Stor +Thing, and have the matter properly discussed by all in the land who +have a right to speak?" + +"Hadst thou had any experience of kingcraft, Erling, thou hadst not +asked the question. If I were now to do as thou dost suggest, the +numerous small kings who have already been put down by force would band +against me, and bring such a following of opponents to the Thing that +fair discussion would be out of the question." + +Erling thought in his own mind, "One false step always necessitates +another; you should have called a meeting of the Thing before putting +down anyone;" however, he did not give utterance to the thought, but +said-- + +"I think you are mistaken, sire; there may be many who, out of revenge, +might oppose you, but certain am I that those who would vote for that +which is for the wellbeing of the land would form a vast majority. +Besides, it is the only course left open to you." + +At this the King flushed with a feeling of anger, and, drawing himself +up, touched the hilt of his sword without uttering a word. + +"When I said the only course," remarked Erling, "I meant the only lawful +course. Sorry should I be to see you, King Harald, draw the sword in a +bad cause; but if you do, be assured that thousands of good blades will +gleam in opposition." + +At this the King's eyes flashed, and, turning suddenly upon Erling, he +shook back the masses of his yellow hair with lion-like ferocity, +exclaiming-- + +"Dost thou dare to speak thus to me in mine own ship, Erling?" + +"It is because I am in your ship that I dare. Were I in my own, the +laws of hospitality had shut my mouth." + +"Knowest thou not," said the King, waxing still more angry at the rebuke +conveyed in this speech, and laying his hand on his sword, "that I have +power to shut thy mouth now and for ever?" + +"It may be so, and it may be not so," replied Erling, stepping back, and +laying his hand on the hilt of his own weapon. + +At this the King laughed sarcastically. "And if," said he, "thou hadst +the power and skill to overcome my feeble arm, hast thou the folly to +think that ye could clear the Dragon of all her men?" + +Erling replied: "The remembrance, King Harald, of the way in which I +treated some of thy men in the woods not long ago, inclines me to +believe that I could give them some trouble to slay me, and the thought +of that transaction induced me, before I came hither, to make such +arrangements that at all events my fall should not go unavenged." + +For a moment or two the King's countenance lowered ferociously on the +youth, and he ground his teeth together as if unable to restrain his +passion; but suddenly he uttered a short laugh, and said-- + +"Truly thou shouldst have been styled prudent as well as bold. But go, +I will take counsel with others, and perhaps thou shalt hear again of +this matter." + +Our hero retired immediately, but he observed in passing that Hake was +summoned to attend the King, and that another man stepped into the boat +to row him to his own ship. + +"Is all well?" growled the rich voice of old Guttorm as he passed the +vessel of that worthy. + +Erling told the rower to stop, and, glancing up, beheld the stern yet +good-humoured visage of his bluff friend looking over the rows of bright +shields that hung on the bulwarks. + +"All is well," replied Erling. + +"It is well for the King that it is so," rejoined Guttorm, "for my hand +was itching to give him a taste of our northern metal. Assuredly, if a +mouse had but squeaked on board the Dragon, I had deemed it sufficient +ground on which to have founded an immediate onslaught. But get thee to +bed, Erling, and let me advise thee to sleep with thy windward eye +open." + +"Trust me," said Erling, with a laugh, as he pushed off; "I will not +sleep with both eyes shut to-night!" + +Getting on board his own ship, Erling said to his foot-boy-- + +"I will not sleep in my bed to-night, for I suspect there may be +treachery abroad. Thou shalt keep watch, therefore, in case anything +may happen in the night; and if thou shalt see me strive with anyone, do +not alarm the men. Meanwhile go thou and fetch me a billet of wood, and +let it be a large one." + +The boy quickly brought from the hold one of the largest billets of wood +he could find, and gave it to his master, who laid it in his own bed, +which was under a small tent spread over the aft part of the vessel, +close to the poop. Having covered it up carefully, he sent the boy +forward, and went himself to lie down elsewhere. + +At midnight a boat was rowed stealthily alongside. It was guided by one +man, and moved so silently that the lightest sleeper on board could not +have been awakened by it. The man stepped on board; lifted up the cloth +of the tent over the bulwarks; looked cautiously all round him, and then +went up and struck in Erling's bed with a great axe, so that it stuck +fast in the billet of wood. Next instant the man felt his neck in a +grip like that of an iron vice, and his face was thrust upon the ground +and held there, while a heavy knee pressed into the small of his back, +so that he was utterly unable to rise. + +Erling's foot-boy saw the whole of this, and heard what followed, for +the curtain of the tent was raised; but he moved neither hand nor foot, +though he held a spear ready for instant action if required. + +"It ill becomes thee, Hake," said Erling, "to seek my life a second +time, after making such poor work of it the first. What! wilt thou not +lie quiet?" + +While he was speaking the berserk struggled with the fury of a madman to +free himself, but Erling's grip (perhaps his own wisdom also!) prevented +him from shouting, and Erling's knee prevented the struggles from making +much noise. Finding, however, that he would not be quiet, our hero +tightened the pressure of his left hand until the tongue and eyes of the +berserk began to protrude, and his face to get black, while with his +right hand he drew his knife, and ran the point of it about a quarter of +an inch into the fleshy part of Hake's back. The effect was +instantaneous! Hake could face danger and death bravely, and could hurl +defiance at his foe with the best, when on his legs; but when he felt +the point of the cold steel, and knew that the smallest impulse would +cause it to find a warm bed in his heart, his fury vanished. Brave and +bold though he was, and a berserk to boot, he sank quietly down, and lay +perfectly still! + +Erling at once relaxed the pressure of his fingers, and allowed Hake to +breathe, but he let the point of the knife remain, that it might refresh +his memory, while he read him a lesson:-- + +"Now, Hake, let me tell thee that thou richly deservest to lose thy +life, for twice hast thou sought to take mine in an unfair way, and once +have I spared thine. However, thou art but a tool after all, so I will +spare it again--and I do it the more readily that I wish thee to convey +a message to thy master, King Harald, who, I doubt not, has sent thee on +this foul errand." + +Erling here signalled to his foot-boy, whom he directed to bind Hake's +arms securely behind his back. This having been done, Erling suffered +him to rise and stand before him. + +"See now," he said, taking a silver ring from his finger, "knowest thou +this ring, Hake? Ah, I see by thy look that thou dost. Well, I will +return it to thee and claim mine own." + +He turned the berserk round, took off the gold ring which he had placed +on his finger on the day of the fight and put the silver one in its +place. + +"By these tokens," said he, "thou mayest know who it was that cared for +thee in the wood after the fight, and restored thy consciousness, +instead of cutting off thy head, as he might easily have done. I know +not why I did it, Hake, save that the fancy seized me, for thou art an +undeserving dog. But now we will take thee back to thy master, and as +our message can be conveyed without the use of speech, we will bind up +thy mouth." + +So saying, Erling gagged the berserk (who looked dreadfully sulky) with +a strip of sailcloth. Then he made him sit down, and tied his legs +together with a piece of rope, after which he lifted him in his arms to +the side of the ship and laid him down. + +"Go fetch me a stout carle," he said to the foot-boy, who went forward +and immediately returned with a strapping man-at-arms. + +The man looked surprised, but asked no questions, as Erling directed him +in a low tone to assist in lifting the prisoner into the boat as quietly +as possible. Then they placed the lump of wood with the axe sticking in +it beside him. This accomplished, they rowed silently to the side of +the Dragon, where a sentinel demanded what they wanted. + +"We bring a prisoner to King Harald," answered Erling. "We have him +here tied hand and foot." + +"Who is he?" asked the sentinel; for there was not so much light as is +usual at midnight of that time of the year, owing to a mist on the sea. + +"Thou shalt see when he is aboard." + +"Hoist him up, then," said the man, Erling and his carle raised Hake +over the bulwarks, and let him drop heavily on the deck. Then Erling +seized the lump of wood and hurled it on board with considerable force, +so that, hitting the sentinel on the head, it bounded onwards to the +after part of the ship, and struck against the tent under which Harald +lay. The King sprang out, sword in hand, but Erling had pushed off, and +was already enveloped in the mist. As they rowed away they heard a +great clamour on board the Dragon, but it was quickly hushed by a stern +voice, which Erling knew to be that of the King. + +No pursuit was attempted. Erling got back to his own ship, and, setting +a watch, lay down to rest. + +In the morning no notice was taken of what had occurred during the +night. The King evidently pretended that he knew nothing about the +matter. He again met with the chief men of the district, and made them +many promises and many complimentary speeches, but in his heart he +resolved that the day should come when every one of them should either +bow before his will or lose his life. The bonders, on the other hand, +listened with due respect to all the King said, but it need scarcely be +added that their lips did not express all their thoughts; for while the +sanguine and more trustful among them felt some degree of hope and +confidence, there were others who could not think of the future except +with the most gloomy forebodings. + +In this mood the two parties separated. The King sailed with his +warships out among the skerries, intending to proceed north to +Drontheim, while Haldor the Fierce, with his friends and men, went back +to Horlingdal. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTEEN. + +RELATES TO SUCH ELEMENTARY MATTERS AS THE A B C, AND TOUCHES ON +LOVE-MAKING IN THE OLDEN TIME. + +After the occurrence of the events just narrated, King Harald's +attention was diverted from the people of Horlingdal and the +neighbouring districts by the doings of certain small kings, against +whom it became necessary that he should launch his whole force. These +were King Hunthiof, who ruled over the district of More, and his son +Solve Klofe; also King Nokve, who ruled over Romsdal, and was the +brother of Solve's mother. These men were great warriors. Hearing that +King Harald was sailing north, they resolved to give him battle. + +For this purpose they raised a large force, and went out among the +skerries to intercept him. + +We do not intend here to go into the details of the fight that followed, +or its consequences. It is sufficient for the proper development of our +tale to say that they met at an island in North More named Solskiel, +where a pitched battle was fought, and gained by Harald. The two kings +were slain, but Solve Klofe escaped, and afterwards proved a great thorn +in Harald's side, plundering in North More, killing many of the King's +men, pillaging some places, burning others, and generally making great +ravage wherever he went; so that, what with keeping him and similar +turbulent characters in check, and establishing law and order in the +districts of the two kings whom he had slain, King Harald had his hands +fully occupied during the remainder of that summer, and was glad to go +north to spend the winter peacefully in Drontheim. + +The families and neighbours, therefore, of those with whom our tale has +chiefly to do had rest during that winter. How some of them availed +themselves of this period of repose may be gathered from a few incidents +which we shall now relate. + +In the first place, Erling the Bold spent a large proportion of his time +in learning the alphabet! Now this may sound very strange in the ears +of many people in modern times, but their surprise will be somewhat +abated when we tell them that the art of writing was utterly unknown +(though probably not unheard of) in Norway at the end of the ninth +century, and long after that; so that Erling, although a gentleman of +the period, and a Sea-king to boot, had not up to the time we write of, +learned his A B C! + +It is just possible that antiquaries, recalling to mind the fact that +the art of writing was not introduced among the Norse colonists of +Iceland until the eleventh century, may be somewhat surprised to learn +that our hero acquired the art at all! But the fact is, that there +always have been, in all countries, men who were what is popularly +termed "born before their time"--men who were in advance, +intellectually, of their age--men who, overleaping the barriers of +prejudice, managed to see deeper into things in general than their +fellows, and to become more or less famous. + +Now our hero, Erling the Bold, was one of those who could see beyond his +time, and who became almost prophetically wise; that is to say, he was +fond of tracing causes onwards to their probable effects, to the +amusement of the humorous, the amazement of the stupid, and the +horrification of the few who, even in those days of turmoil, trembled at +the idea of "change"! Everything, therefore, that came under his +observation claimed and obtained his earnest attention, and was treated +with a species of inductive philosophy that would have charmed the heart +of Lord Bacon, had he lived in those times. Of course this new wonder +of committing thoughts to parchment, which the hermit had revealed to +him, was deeply interesting to Erling, who began to study it forthwith. +And we beg leave to tell antiquaries that we have nothing to do with the +fact that no record is left of his studies--no scrap of his writing to +be found. We are not responsible for the stupidity or want of sympathy +in his generation! Doubtless, in all ages there have been many such +instances of glorious opportunities neglected by the world--neglected, +too, with such contempt, that not even a record of their having occurred +has been made. Perchance some such opportunities are before ourselves +just now, in regard to our neglect of which the next generation may +possibly have to hold up its hands and turn up its eyes in amazement! +But be this as it may, the fact remains that although no record is +handed down of any knowledge of letters at this period in Norway, Erling +the Bold _did_ nevertheless become acquainted with them to some extent. + +Erling began his alphabet after he had passed the mature age of twenty +years, and his teacher was the fair Hilda. It will be remembered that +in one of their meetings the hermit had informed Erling of his having +already taught the meaning of the strange characters which covered his +parchments to the Norse maiden, and that she had proved herself an apt +scholar. Erling said nothing at the time, except that he had a strong +desire to become better acquainted with the writing in question, but he +settled it then and there in his heart that Hilda, and not the hermit, +should be his teacher. Accordingly, when the fishings and fightings of +the summer were over, the young warrior laid by his sword, lines, and +trident, and, seating himself at Hilda's feet, went diligently to work. + +The schoolroom was the hermit's hut on the cliff which overlooked the +fiord. It was selected of necessity, because the old man guarded his +parchments with tender solicitude, and would by no means allow them to +go out of his dwelling, except when carried forth by his own hand. On +the first occasion of the meeting of the young couple for study, +Christian sat down beside them, and was about to expound matters, when +Erling interposed with a laugh. + +"No, no, Christian, thou must permit Hilda to teach me, because she is +an old friend of mine, who all her life has ever been more willing to +learn than to teach. Therefore am I curious to know how she will change +her character." + +"Be it so, my son," said the hermit, with a smile, folding his hands on +his knee, and preparing to listen, and, if need be, to correct. + +"Be assured, Erling," said Hilda, "that I know very little." + +"Enough for me, no doubt," returned the youth. + +"For a day or two, perhaps," said the too-literal Hilda; "but after that +Christian will have--" + +"After that," interrupted Erling, "it will be time enough to consider +that subject." + +Hilda laughed, and asked if he were ready to begin. To which Erling +replied that he was, and, sitting down opposite to his teacher, bent +over the parchment, which for greater convenience she had spread out +upon her knee. + +"Well," began Hilda, with a slight feeling of that pardonable +self-importance which is natural to those who instruct others older than +themselves, "that is the first letter." + +"Which?" asked Erling, gazing up in her face. + +"That one there, with the long tail to it. Dost thou see it?" + +"Yes," replied the youth. + +"How canst thou say so, Erling," remonstrated Hilda, "when thou art +looking all the time straight in my face!" + +"But I _do_ see it," returned he, a little confused; "I am looking at it +_now_." + +"Well," said she, "that is--" + +"Thou art looking at it upside down, my son," said the hermit, who had +been observing them with an amused expression of countenance. + +"Oh, so he is; I never thought of that," cried Hilda, laughing; "thou +must sit beside me, Erling, so that we may see it in the same way." + +"This one, now, with the curve _that_ way," she went on, "dost thou see +it?" + +"See it!" thought Erling, "of course I see it: the prettiest little hand +in all the dale!" But he only said-- + +"How can I see it, Hilda, when the point of thy finger covers it?" + +"Oh! well," drawing the finger down a little, "thou seest it now?" + +"Yes." + +"Well, that is--why! where is Christian?" she exclaimed, looking up +suddenly in great surprise, and pointing to the stool on which the +hermit certainly had been sitting a few minutes before, but which was +now vacant. + +"He must have gone out while we were busy with the--the parchment," said +Erling, also much surprised. + +"He went like a mouse, then," said Hilda, "for I heard him not." + +"Nor I," added her companion. + +"Very strange," said she. + +Now there was nothing particularly strange in the matter. The fact was +that the old man had just exercised a little of Erling's philosophy in +the way of projecting a cause to its result. As we have elsewhere +hinted, the hermit was not one of those ascetics who, in ignorance of +the truth, banished themselves out of the world. His banishment had not +been self-imposed. He had fled before the fierce persecutors. They +managed to slay the old man's wife, however, before they made him take +to flight and seek that refuge and freedom of conscience among the Pagan +Northmen which were denied him in Christian Europe. In the first ten +minutes after the A B C class began he perceived how things stood with +the young people, and, wisely judging that the causes which were +operating in their hearts would proceed to their issue more pleasantly +in his absence, he quietly got up and went out to cut firewood. + +After this the hermit invariably found it necessary to go out and cut +firewood when Erling and Hilda arrived at the school, which they did +regularly three times a week. + +This, of course, was considered a very natural and proper state of +things by the two young people, for they were both considerate by +nature, and would have been sorry indeed to have interrupted the old man +in his regular work. + +But Erling soon began to feel that it was absolutely essential for one +of them to be in advance of the other in regard to knowledge, if the +work of teaching was to go on; for, while both remained equally +ignorant, the fiction could not be kept up with even the semblance of +propriety. To obviate this difficulty he paid solitary nocturnal visits +to the hut, on which occasions he applied himself so zealously to the +study of the strange characters that he not only became as expert as his +teacher, but left her far behind, and triumphantly rebutted the charge +of stupidity which she had made against him. + +At the same time our hero entered a new and captivating region of mental +and spiritual activity when the hermit laid before him the portions of +Holy Scripture which he had copied out before leaving southern lands, +and expounded to him the grand, the glorious truths that God had +revealed to man through Jesus Christ our Lord. And profoundly deep, and +startling even to himself, were the workings of the young Norseman's +active mind while he sat there, night after night, in the lone hut on +the cliff, poring over the sacred rolls, or holding earnest converse +with the old man about things past, present, and future. + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTEEN. + +IN WHICH GLUMM TAKES TO HUNTING ON THE MOUNTAINS FOR CONSOLATION, AND +FINDS IT UNEXPECTEDLY, WHILE ALRIC PROVES HIMSELF A HERO. + +"I go to the fells to-day," said Glumm to Alric one morning, as the +latter opened the door of Glummstede and entered the hall. + +"I go also," said Alric, leaning a stout spear which he carried against +the wall, and sitting down on a stool beside the fire to watch Glumm as +he equipped himself for the chase. + +"Art ready, then? for the day is late," said Glumm. + +"All busked," replied the boy.--"I say, Glumm, is that a new spear thou +hast got?" + +"Aye; I took it from a Swedish viking the last fight I had off the +coast. We had a tough job of it, and left one or two stout men behind +to glut the birds of Odin, but we brought away much booty. This was +part of it," he added, buckling on a long hunting-knife, which was stuck +in a richly ornamented sheath, "and that silver tankard too, besides the +red mantle that my mother wears, and a few other things--but my comrades +got the most of it." + +"I wish I had been there, Glumm," said Alric. + +"If Hilda were here, lad, she would say it is wrong to wish to fight." + +"Hilda has strange thoughts," observed the boy. + +"So has Erling," remarked his companion. + +"And so has Ada," said Alric, with a sly glance. + +Glumm looked up quickly. "What knowest _thou_ about Ada?" said he. + +The sly look vanished before Glumm had time to observe it, and an +expression of extreme innocence took its place as the lad replied-- + +"I know as much about her as is usual with one who has known a girl, and +been often with her, since the day he was born." + +"True," muttered Glumm, stooping to fasten the thongs that laced the +untanned shoes on his feet. "Ada has strange thoughts also, as thou +sayest. Come now, take thy spear, and let us be gone." + +"Where shall we go to-day?" asked Alric. + +"To the wolf's glen." + +"To the wolf's glen? that is far." + +"Is it too far for thee, lad?" + +"Nay, twice the distance were not too far for me," returned the boy +proudly; "but the day advances, and there is danger without honour in +walking on the fells after dark." + +"The more need for haste," said Glumm, opening the door and going out. + +Alric followed, and for some time these two walked in silence, as the +path was very steep, and so narrow for a considerable distance, that +they could not walk abreast. + +Snow lay pretty thickly on the mountains, particularly in sheltered +places, but in exposed parts it had been blown off, and the hunters +could advance easily. In about ten minutes after setting out they lost +sight of Glummstede. As they advanced higher and deeper into the +mountains, the fiord and the sea, with its innumerable skerries, was +lost to view, but it was not until they had toiled upwards and onwards +for nearly two hours that they reached those dark recesses of the fells +to which the bears and wolves were wont to retreat after committing +depredations on the farms in the valleys far below. + +There was something in the rugged grandeur of the scenery here, in the +whiteness of the snow, the blackness of the rocks which peeped out from +its voluminous wreaths, the lightness of the atmosphere, and, above all, +the impressive silence, which possessed an indescribable charm for the +romantic mind of Alric, and which induced even the stern matter-of-fact +Glumm to tread with slower steps, and to look around him with a feeling +almost akin to awe. No living thing was to be seen, either among the +stupendous crags which still towered above, or in the depths which they +had left below; but there were several footprints of wolves, all of +which Glumm declared, after careful examination, to be old. + +"See here, lad," he said, turning up one of these footprints with the +butt of his spear; "observe the hardish ball of snow just under the +print; that shows that the track is somewhat old. If it had been quite +fresh there would have been no such ball." + +"Thou must think my memory of the shortest, Glumm, for I have been told +that every time I have been out with thee." + +"True, but thou art so stupid," said Glumm, laying his spear lightly +across the boy's shoulders, "that I have thought fit to impress it on +thee by repetition, having an interest in thine education, although thou +dost not deserve it." + +"I deserve it, mayhap, more than ye think." + +"How so, boy?" + +"_Why_, because I have for a long time past taken an uncommon interest +in thy welfare." + +Glumm laughed, and said he did not know that there was any occasion to +concern himself about his welfare. + +"Oh yes, there is!" cried Alric, "for, when a man goes moping about the +country as if he were fey, or as if he had dreamed of seeing his own +guardian spirit, his friends cannot help being concerned about him." + +"Why, what is running in the lad's head?" said Glumm, looking with a +perplexed expression at his young companion. + +"Nothing runs in my head, save ordinary thoughts. If there be any +unusual running at all, it must be in thine own." + +"Speak, thou little fox," said Glumm, suddenly grasping Alric by the +nape of the neck and giving him a shake. + +"Nay then, if that is thy plan," said the boy, "give it a fair trial. +Shake away, and see what comes of it. Thou mayest shake out blood, +bones, flesh, and life too, and carry home my skin as a trophy, but be +assured that thou shalt not shake a word off my tongue!" + +"Boldly spoken," said Glumm, laughing, as he released the lad; "but I +think thy tone would change if I were to take thee at thy word." + +"That it would not. Thou art not the first man whom I have defied, aye, +and drawn blood from, as that red-haired Dane--" + +Alric stopped suddenly. He had reached that age when the tendency to +boast begins, at least in manly boys, to be checked by increasing good +sense and good taste. Yet it is no disparagement of Alric's character +to say that he found it uncommonly difficult to refrain, when occasion +served, from making reference to his first warlike exploit, even +although frequent rebukes and increasing wisdom told him that boasting +was only fit for the lips of cowards. + +"Why do ye stop?" asked Glumm, who quite understood the boy's feelings, +and admired his exercise of self-control. + +"Be--because I have said enough." + +"Good is it," observed the other, "when man or boy knows that he has +said enough, and has the power to stop when he knows it. But come, +Alric, thou hast not said enough to me yet on the matter that--that--" + +"What matter?" asked Alric, with a sly look. + +"Why, the matter of my welfare, to be sure." + +"Ah, true. Well, methinks, Glumm, that I could give thee a little +medicine for thy mind, but I won't, unless ye promise to keep thy spear +off my back." + +"I promise," said Glumm, whose curiosity was aroused. + +"It is a sad thing when a man looks sweet and a maid looks sour, but +there is a worse thing; that is when the maid _feels_ sour. Thou lovest +Ada--" + +"Hold!" cried Glumm, turning fiercely on his companion, "and let not thy +pert tongue dare to speak of such things, else will I show thee that +there are other things besides spears to lay across thy shoulders." + +"Now art thou truly Glumm the Gruff," cried Alric, laughing, as he +leaped to the other side of a mass of fallen rock; "but if thy humour +changes not, I will show thee that I am not named Lightfoot for nothing. +Come, don't fume and fret there like a bear with a headache, but let me +speak, and I warrant me thou wilt be reasonably glad." + +"Go on, then, thou incorrigible." + +"Very well; but none of thy hard names, friend Glumm, else will I set my +big brother Erling at thee. There now, don't give way again. What a +storm-cloud thou art! Will the knowledge that Ada loves thee as truly +as thou lovest her calm thee down?" + +"I see thou hast discovered my secret," said Glumm, looking at his +little friend with a somewhat confused expression, "though how the +knowledge came to thee is past my understanding. Yet as thou art so +clever a warlock I would fain know what ye mean about `Ada's love for +me.' Hadst thou said her hatred, I could have believed thee without +explanation." + +"Let us go on, then," said Alric, "for there is nothing to be gained and +only time to be lost by thus talking across a stone." + +The path which they followed was broad at that part, and not quite so +rugged, so that Alric could walk alongside of his stout friend as he +related to him the incident that was the means of enlightening him as to +Ada's feelings towards her lover. It was plain from the expression on +the Norseman's face that his soul was rejoiced at the discovery, and he +strode forward at such a pace that the boy was fain to call a halt. + +"Thinkest thou that my legs are as long as thine?" he said, stopping and +panting. + +Glumm laughed; and the laugh was loud and strong. He would have laughed +at anything just then, for the humour was upon him, and he felt it +difficult to repress a shout at the end of it! + +"Come on, Alric, I will go slower. But art thou sure of all this? Hast +not mistaken the words?" + +"Mistaken the words!" cried the boy; "why, I tell thee they were as +plain to my ears and my senses as what thou hast said this moment." + +"Good," said Glumm; "and now the question comes up, how must I behave to +her? But thou canst not aid me herein, for in such matters thou hast +had no experience." + +"Out upon thee for a stupid monster!" said the boy; "have I not just +proved that my experience is very deep? I have not, indeed, got the +length thou hast--of wandering about like a poor ghost or a half-witted +fellow, but I have seen enough of such matters to know what common sense +says." + +"And, pray, what does common sense say?" + +"Why, it says, Act towards the maid like a sane man, and, above all, a +true man. Don't go about the land gnashing thy teeth until everyone +laughs at thee. Don't go staring at her in grim silence as if she were +a wraith; and, more particularly, don't pretend to be fond of other +girls, for thou didst make a pitiful mess of that attempt. In short, be +Glumm without being Gruff, and don't try to be anybody else. Be kind +and straightforward to her, worship her, or, as Kettle Flatnose said the +other day, `kiss the ground she walks on,' if thou art so inclined, but +don't worry her life out. Show that thou art fond of her, and willing +to bide _her_ time. Go on viking cruise, for the proverb says that an +`absent body makes a longing spirit,' and bring her back shiploads of +kirtles and mantles and armlets, and gold and silver ornaments--that's +what common sense says, Glumm, and a great deal more besides, but I fear +much that it is all wasted on thee." + +"Heyday!" exclaimed Glumm, "what wisdom do I hear? Assuredly we must +call thee Alric hinn Frode hereafter. One would think thou must have +been born before thine own grandfather." + +"Truly that is not so difficult to fancy," retorted Alric. "Even now I +feel like a great-grandfather while I listen to thee. There wants but a +smooth round face and a lisping tongue to make thine appearance suitable +to thy wisdom! But what is this that we have here?" + +The boy pointed to a track of some animal in the snow a few yards to one +side of the path. + +"A wolf track," said Glumm, turning aside. + +"A notably huge one," remarked the boy. + +"And quite fresh," said the man. + +"Which is proved," rejoined Alric in a slow, solemn voice, "by the fact +that there is no ball of snow beneath the--" + +"Hold thy pert tongue," said Glumm in a hoarse whisper, "the brute must +be close to us. Do thou keep in the lower end of this gorge--see, +yonder, where it is narrow. I will go round to the upper end; perchance +the wolf is there. If so, we stand a good chance of killing him, for +the sides of the chasm are like two walls all the way up. But," added +Glumm, hesitating a moment, and looking fixedly at the small but sturdy +frame of his companion, whose heightened colour and flashing eyes +betokened a roused spirit, "I doubt thy--that is--I have no fear of the +spirit, if the body were a little bigger." + +"Take thine own big body off, Glumm," said Alric, "and leave me to guard +the pass." + +Glumm grinned as he turned and strode away. + +The spot which the hunters had reached merits particular notice. It was +one of those wild deep rents or fissures which are usually found near +the summits of almost inaccessible mountains. It was not, however, at +the top of the highest range in that neighbourhood, being merely on the +summit of a ridge which was indeed very high--perhaps five or six +thousand feet--but still far below the serried and shattered peaks which +towered in all directions round Horlingdal, shutting it out from all +communication with the rest of the world, except through the fiord and +the pass leading over to the Springs. + +On the place where Alric parted from his friend the rocks of the gorge +or defile rose almost perpendicularly on both sides, and as he advanced +he found that the space between became narrower, until, at the spot +where he was to take his stand, there was an opening of scarcely six +feet in width. Beyond this the chasm widened a little, until, at its +higher end, it was nearly twenty yards broad; but, owing to the widening +nature of the defile, the one opening could not be seen from the other, +although they were little more than four hundred yards apart. + +The track of the wolf led directly through the pass into the gorge. As +the lad took his stand he observed with much satisfaction that it was +that of an unusually large animal. This feeling was tempered, however, +with some anxiety lest it should have escaped at the other opening. It +was also mixed with a touch of agitation; for although Alric had seen +his friend and Erling kill wolves and bears too, he had never before +been left to face the foe by himself, and to sustain the brunt of the +charge in his own proper person. Beyond an occasional flutter of the +heart, however, there was nothing to indicate, even to himself, that he +was not as firm as the rock on which he stood. + +Now, let it not be supposed that we are here portraying a hero of +romance in whom is united the enthusiasm of the boy with the calm +courage of the man. We crave attention, more particularly that of boys, +to the following observations:-- + +In the highly safe and civilised times in which we live, many thousands +of us never have a chance, from personal experience, of forming a just +estimate of the powers of an average man or boy, and we are too apt to +ascribe that to heroism which is simply due to knowledge. A man _knows_ +that he can do a certain thing that seems extremely dangerous, therefore +he does it boldly, not because he is superlatively bold by any means, +but because he knows there is no risk--at least none to him. The +proverb that "Familiarity breeds contempt" applies as truly to danger as +to anything else; and well is it for the world that the majority of +human beings are prone to familiarise themselves with danger in spite of +those well-meaning but weak ones who have been born with a tendency to +say perpetually, "Take care," "Don't run such risk", etcetera. +"Whatever thy hand findeth to do, do it with thy might;" and man has +echoed the sentiment in the proverb, "Whatever is worth doing is worth +doing well". Do you climb?--then do it well--do it in such +circumstances that your spirit will get used to seeing profound depths +below you without your heart melting into hot water and your nerves +quaking. Do you leap?--then do it well--do it so that you may be able +to turn it to some good account in the day of trial; do it so that you +may know _how_ to leap off a runaway carriage, for instance, without +being killed. Learn to jump off high cliffs into deep water, so that, +should the opportunity ever offer, you may be able to plunge off the +high bulwarks of a vessel to save a sister, or mother, or child, with as +little thought about yourself as if you were jumping off a sofa. +Observe, we do not advocate recklessness. To leap off a cliff so high +that you will be sure to be killed is not leaping "well"; but neither is +it well to content yourself with a jump of three or four feet as your +utmost attainment, because that is far short of many a leap which may +have to be taken in this world to save even your own life, not to +mention the lives of others. But enough of this disquisition, which, +the reader will observe, has been entered upon chiefly in order to prove +that we do not ascribe heroic courage to Alric when we say that, having +been familiar with danger from his birth, he prepared to face a wolf of +unknown size and ferocity with considerable coolness, if not +indifference to danger. + +Glumm meanwhile reached the other end of the ravine, and there, to his +intense disappointment, found the track of the wolf leading away towards +the open mountains beyond. Just where it left the ravine, however, the +animal had run about so much that the track was crossed and recrossed in +confusion. Glumm therefore had difficulty at first in following it up, +but when he did so, great was his joy to find that it doubled back and +re-entered the defile. Pressing quickly forward, he came to a broken +part, near the centre, where, among a heap of grey, weather-worn rocks +he perceived two sharp-pointed objects, like a pair of erect ears! To +make certain, he hurled a stone towards the place. The objects +instantly disappeared! + +Immediately afterwards, a long grey back and a bushy tail were visible +as the wolf glided among the rocks, making for the side of the +precipice, with the intention, doubtless, of rushing past this bold +intruder. + +Glumm observed the movement, and promptly went in the same direction. +The wolf noticed this, and paused abruptly--remaining still, as if +uncertain what to do. The hunter at once put to flight his uncertainty +by gliding swiftly towards him. Seeing this, the wolf abandoned the +attempt at concealment and bounded into the centre of the ravine, where, +with his bristles erect, his back slightly arched, and all his +glittering teeth and blood-red gums exposed, he stood for a moment or +two the very picture of intensified fury. The hunter advanced with his +spear levelled, steadily, but not hastily, because there was sufficient +space on either hand to render the meeting of the animal in its rush a +matter of extreme difficulty, while at every step he took, the +precipices on either side drew closer together. The brute had evidently +a strong objection to turn back, and preferred to run the risk of +passing its foe, for it suddenly sprang to one side and ran up the cliff +as far as possible, like a cat, while it made for the upper end of the +ravine. + +The Norseman, whose powerful frame was by this time strung to intensity +of action, leaped to the same side with the agility of a panther, and +got in before it. The wolf did not stop, but with a ferocious growl it +swerved aside, and bounded to the other side of the ravine. Again the +hunter leaped across, and stood in its way. He bent forward to resist +the animal's weight and impetus, but the baffled wolf was cowed by his +resolute front. It turned tail, and fled, followed by Glumm with a wild +halloo! + +When the first growl was heard by Alric, it strung him up to the right +pitch instantly, and the next one caused the blood to rush to his face, +for he heard the halloo which Glumm uttered as he followed in pursuit. +The distance was short. Another moment and the boy saw the infuriated +animal springing towards him, with Glumm rushing madly after it. Alric +was already in the centre of the pass with the spear levelled, and his +body bent in anticipation of the shock. The wolf saw him, but did not +check its pace--with a furious Norseman bounding behind there was no +room for hesitation. It lowered its head, increased its speed, and ran +at the opening like a thunderbolt. When within three yards of the boy +it swerved, and, leaping up, pawed the cliff on the left while in the +air. Alric had foreseen this--his only doubt had been as to which side +the brute would incline to. He sprang at the same moment, and met it +full in the face as it came down. The point of his spear entered the +wolf's chest, and penetrated deep into its body. A terrific yell +followed. The spear handle broke in the middle, and the boy fell on his +face, while the wolf went right over him, yelling and biting the spear, +as, carried on by its impetus, it rolled head over heels for several +yards among the rocks. + +Alric jumped up unhurt, and, for want of a better weapon, seized a mass +of stone, which he raised above his head, and hurled at the wolf, +hitting it fairly on the skull. At the same moment Glumm ran up, +intending to transfix the brute with his spear. + +"Hold thy hand, Glumm," gasped the boy. + +Glumm checked himself. + +"In truth it needs no more," he said, bringing the butt of his weapon to +the ground, and leaning on it, while he looked on at the last struggles +of the dying wolf. "Fairly done, lad," he added, with a nod of +approval, "this will make a man of thee." + +The boy did not speak, but stood with his chest still heaving, his +breath coming fast, and the expression of triumph on his countenance +showing that for him a new era had opened up--that the days of boasting +had ended, and those of manly action had fairly and auspiciously begun. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHTEEN. + +SHOWS WHAT SOME OF THE MEN OF OLD COULD DO IN COLD BLOOD, AND TREATS OF +HEATHEN FESTIVITIES AT HARALD'S COURT, MINGLED WITH PLOT AND COUNTER +PLOT. + +Winter--with its frost and snow, its long nights and its short days, its +feasts in the great halls, and its tales round the roaring wood fires-- +at length began to pass away, and genial spring advanced to gladden the +land of Norway. The white drapery melted in the valleys, leaving +brilliant greens and all the varied hues of rugged rocks to fill the +eyes with harmonious colour. High on the mighty fells the great +glaciers--unchanging, almost, as the "everlasting hills"--gleamed in the +sunlight against the azure sky, and sent floods of water down into the +brimming rivers. The scalds ceased, to some extent, those wild +legendary songs and tales with which they had beguiled the winter +nights, and joined the Norsemen in their operations on the farms and on +the fiords. Men began to grow weary of smoked rafters and frequent +festivities, and to long for the free, fresh air of heaven. Some went +off to drive the cattle to the "saeters" or mountain pastures, others +set out for the fisheries, and not a few sailed forth on viking cruises +over the then almost unknown sea. Our friends of Horlingdal bestirred +themselves, like others, in these varied avocations, and King Harald +Fairhair, uprising from his winter lair in Drontheim like a giant +refreshed, assembled his men, and prepared to carry out his political +plans with a strong hand. But resolute men cannot always drive events +before them as fast as they would wish. Summer was well advanced before +the King was ready to take action. + +There was a man of the Drontheim district named Hauskuld, who was noted +for ferocity and wickedness. He was also very strong and courageous, so +that King Harald made him one of his berserks. + +One morning the King sent for this man, and said to him-- + +"Hauskuld, I have a business for thee to do, which requires the heart of +a brave fellow. There is a man near Horlingdal who has not only refused +to submit to my will, but has gathered a band of seventy men or more +about him, and threatens to raise the country against me. It does not +suit me to go forth to punish this dog just now, for my preparations are +not yet complete. Nevertheless it is important that he should be +crushed, as he dwells in the heart of a disaffected district. It is +therefore my purpose to send thee with a small body of picked men to do +thy worst by him." + +"That suits me well," said Hauskuld; "what is his name?" + +"Atli," answered the King. + +"He is my foster-brother!" said Hauskuld, with a peculiar and unpleasant +smile. + +The King looked a little perplexed. + +"Thou wilt not have much heart to the business if that be so," he said. + +"When you command, sire, it is my duty to obey," replied Hauskuld. + +"Nay, but I can find other stout men for this thing. There is Hake of +Hadeland. Go, send him hither. I will not put this on thy shoulders." + +"Sire, you are considerate," said Hauskuld, "but this foster-brother of +mine I count an enemy, for reasons that I need not tell. Besides, he is +said to be a warlock, and for my part I firmly believe that he is in +league with Nikke, so that it would be a service to the gods to rid the +world of him. If you will permit me, I will gladly go on this errand, +and as this Atli is a stout man, it would be well to take Hake and a few +of the berserkers along with me." + +"Do as thou wilt," replied the King, with a wave of his hand, as he +turned away; "only, what thou doest, see thou do it well and quickly." + +The berserk shouldered his battle-axe and left the hall. As he walked +away the King stood in the doorway looking after him with a mingled +expression of admiration and dislike. + +"A stalwart knave," he muttered to himself, while a grim smile played on +his large handsome features; "a good fighting brute, no doubt, but, with +such a spirit, a bad servant, I fear." + +"There are many such in your army," said a deep, stern voice behind him. + +The King turned quickly round, with a look of anger, and fixed a +searching glance on the huge form of Rolf Ganger, who stood leaning on +the hilt of his sword with a quiet, almost contemptuous smile on his +face. + +"It is well known that birds of a feather are fond of flying in +company," said the King, with a flushed countenance; "no doubt thou +speakest from personal knowledge and experience." + +It was now Rolf's turn to flush, but the King did him injustice, having +no ground for such a speech, further than a knowledge that there existed +between them mutual antipathy which neither was particularly careful to +conceal. + +"Have I done aught to merit such words?" demanded Rolf sternly. + +Harald was on the point of making an angry rejoinder, but, placing a +powerful restraint upon himself, he said-- + +"It may be that thine actions are loyal, but, Rolf, thy words are +neither wise nor true. It is not wise to attempt to shake my confidence +in my followers, and it is not true that many of them are untrustworthy. +But, if thou wouldst prove thyself a real friend, go, get thy longships +ready with all speed, for we fare south a few days hence, and there will +be work for the weapons of stout men ere long." + +"I go to prepare myself for the fight, King Harald," returned Rolf, "but +I have no occasion to give thee further proof of friendship. The world +is wide enough for us both. My ocean steeds are on the fiord. +Henceforth I will fight for my own hand." + +For one moment the King felt an almost irresistible impulse to draw his +sword and hew down the bold Rolf, but with characteristic self-restraint +he crushed down his wrath at the time and made no reply, good or bad, as +the other turned on his heel and left him. When he had gone some +distance the King muttered between his set teeth-- + +"Another good fighting brute and bad servant! Let him go! Better an +open foe than an unwilling friend." + +That night Hauskuld and Hake set sail southward with a small body of +picked men; and Rolf Ganger, with a large body of devoted followers, +left Harald's camp and travelled eastward. In the course of several +days Hauskuld and his men arrived at the small fiord near the head of +which stood the dwelling of Atli. + +This Atli was an unusually intelligent man, a man of great influence in +his district, and one who, like Erling the Bold, was determined to +resist the tyranny of Harald Fairhair. A large force had been gathered +by him towards the end of winter, and at the time of Hauskuld's visit he +was living in his own house with about seventy chosen men. +Unfortunately for these, the peaceful winter had induced them to relax a +little in vigilance. Knowing from the report of spies that the King was +still feasting in the Drontheim district, they felt quite safe, and for +some time past had neglected to set the usual night watch, which, in +time of war, was deemed indispensable. Thus it happened that when +Hauskuld and his men came upon them in the dead of a dark night, they +found everything quiet, and went up to the door of the house +unchallenged. On trying the latch they found it fast, but from the +sounds within they knew that a great many men were sleeping there. +Hauskuld and Hake had approached the house alone. They now returned to +their companions, who were concealed in the deep shades of the +neighbouring woods. + +"What dost thou advise?" asked Hake of his brother berserk. + +"That we burn them all in their nest," replied Hauskuld. + +"What! foster-brother too?" said the other. + +"Aye, wherefore not? He is a warlock. So are most of the men with him. +Burning is their due." + +"There is wood enough here for that purpose," said Hake, with a grim +smile. + +Hauskuld immediately directed the greater part of his force to gather +dry wood, and silently pile it all round the house, while he and Hake +with a few men stood in front of the doors and windows to guard them. +The work was accomplished in a much shorter time than might have been +expected, for those who performed it were strong and active, and well +accustomed to such deeds. In less than an hour the whole of Atli's +house was surrounded by a thick pile of dry inflammable brushwood. When +it was all laid the men completely surrounded the house, and stood with +arrows fitted to the strings, and swords loosened in the sheaths. Then +Hauskuld and several others applied lights to the brushwood at various +points. For a few seconds there was an ominous crackling, accompanied +by little flashes of flame, then a dense smoke rose up all round. +Presently the rushing fire burst through the black pall with a mighty +roar, and lit up the steading with the strength of the sun at noonday, +while flame and smoke curled in curious conflict together over the +devoted dwelling, and myriads of sparks were vomited up into the dark +sky. At the same instant doors and windows were burst open with a +crash, and a terrible cry arose as men, half clad and partly armed, +leaped out and rushed through the circle of fire, with the flame +kindling on their hair and garments. + +Not less relentless than the fire was the circling foe outside. +Whizzing arrows pierced the scorched breasts of some, and many fell +dead. Others rushed madly on sword or spear point, and were thrust +violently back into the fire, or fell fighting desperately for their +lives. Some of the attacking party were killed, and a few wounded, but +not one of the assailed succeeded in bursting through the line. Atli +and all his followers perished there! + +It is dreadful to think that such diabolical deeds were ever done; but +still more dreadful is it to know that the spirit which dictated such +atrocities still haunts the breast of fallen men, for the annals of +modern warfare tell us all too plainly that unregenerate man is as +capable of such deeds now as were the Norsemen in days of old. + +Having fulfilled his mission, Hauskuld left the place as quickly as +possible, and hastened back to Drontheim; not, however, without learning +on the way that preparations were being secretly made all over that +district to resist the King, and that, in particular, Solve Klofe was in +the fiord at Horlingdal, with several ships of war, doing his best to +fan the flame of discontent, which was already burning there briskly +enough of its own accord! + +On returning again to King Harald's quarters, Hauskuld found that +energetic monarch engaged in celebrating one of the heathen feasts, and +deemed it prudent for some hours to avoid his master, knowing that when +heated with deep potations he was not in the best condition to receive +or act upon exasperating news. He therefore went into the great hall, +where the King and his guests were assembled, and quietly took his place +at the lower end of one of the long tables near the door. + +As is usual with men of inferior and debased minds, the berserk +misunderstood and misjudged his master. He had counted on escaping +notice, but the King's eye fell on him the instant he entered the hall, +and he was at once summoned before him, and bidden tell his tale. While +he related the details of the dreadful massacre Hauskuld felt quite at +ease, little dreaming that the King's fingers twitched with a desire to +cut him down where he stood; but when he came to speak of the widespread +disaffection of the people in the south, he stammered a little, and +glanced uneasily at the flushed countenance of the King, fearing that +the news would exasperate him beyond endurance. Great, therefore, was +his surprise when Harald affected to treat the matter lightly, made some +jesting allusion to the potent efficacy of the sword in bringing +obstinate people to reason, and ordered one of the waiting-girls to +fetch the berserk a foaming tankard of ale. + +"There, drink, Hauskuld, my bold berserk! drink down to a deeper peg, +man. After such warm work as thou hast had, that will serve to cool thy +fiery spirit. Drink to the gods, and pray that thou mayest never come +to die, like an old woman, in thy bed--drink, I say, drink deep!" + +The King laughed jovially, almost fiercely, in his wild humour, as he +made this allusion to the well-known objection that the Norse warriors +of old had to dying peacefully in bed; but for the life of him he could +not resist the temptation, as he turned on his seat, to touch with his +elbow the huge silver tankard which the berserk raised to his lips! The +instantaneous result was that a cataract of beer flowed down Hauskuld's +face and beard, while the rafters rang with a shout of laughter from the +Sea-kings and court-men who sat in the immediate neighbourhood of the +King's high seat. Of course Harald blamed himself for his clumsiness, +but he too laughed so heartily that the masses of his fair hair shook +all over his shoulders, while he ordered another tankard to be filled +for his "brave berserk". That brave individual, however, protested that +he had had quite enough, and immediately retired with a very bad grace +to drink his beer in comfort out of a horn cup among kindred spirits. + +Immediately after he was gone the King sent for Hake, for whom he also +ordered a silver tankard of ale; but to him the King spoke earnestly, +and in a low whispering voice, while his courtiers, perceiving that he +wished his converse with the berserk to be private, quaffed their liquor +and talked noisily. + +The young woman who filled Hake's tankard at the King's bidding was no +other than Gunhild, the unfortunate widow of Swart of the Springs. For +some time after the death of her husband she had dwelt at Haldorstede, +and had experienced much kindness at the hands of the family; but having +taken a longing to visit her relatives, who belonged to the Drontheim +district, she was sent thither, and had become a member of Harald's +household, through the influence of King Hakon of Drontheim, the father +of Ada of Horlingdal. + +Hakon had from necessity, and much against his inclination, become one +of Harald Fairhair's jarls. During the feast of which we write, he sat +on the King's left hand. + +After filling Hake's tankard Gunhild retired, but remained within +earshot. + +"Hake," said the King, leaning over the arm of his high seat, "it is now +time that we were moving south; and the news thou hast brought decides +me to complete my arrangements without delay. It seems that Ulf of +Romsdal and that fellow Erling the Bold, with his fierce father, are +making great preparations for war?" + +"Truly they are," said Hake. "I saw as much with my own eyes." + +"But may this not be for the purpose of going on viking cruise?" + +"Had that been so, mine ears would have guided me, and we had brought a +different report, but when men talk loudly and ill of the King, and knit +their brows, and wish for a south wind, it needs not the wisdom of a +warlock to fathom their meaning. Moreover," he continued earnestly, "I +have heard that news has come from the southland that the people of +Hordaland and Rogaland, Agder and Thelemark, are gathering, and bringing +together ships, men, and arms--what can all this mean if it be not +resistance to the King?" + +"Right," said Harald thoughtfully. "Now, Hake, I will tell thee what to +do, and see thou waste not time about it. Most of my ships are ready +for sea. A few days more will suffice to complete them for a cruise, +and then will I sail forth to teach these proud men humility. Meanwhile +do thou get ready the ships under thy charge, and send Hauskuld in a +swift boat with a few chosen men south to Horlingdal fiord. There let +him watch the proceedings of the people--particularly of that fellow +Erling and his kin--and when he has seen enough let him sail north to +give me warning of their movements. They shall be saved the trouble of +coming here to meet me, for I will fare south and slay them all, root +and branch. Let thy tongue be quiet and thy motions swift, and caution +Hauskuld also to be discreet. Another draught of ale, Hake, and then-- +to thy duty." + +These last words the King spoke aloud, and while the berserk was +drinking he turned to converse with Hakon of Drontheim, but finding that +that chief had left the board, he turned to one of the courtiers, and +began to converse on the news recently brought from the south. + +Gunhild meanwhile slipped out of the hall, and found King Hakon hasting +to his house. + +"Ye heard what the King threatened?" she said, plucking him by the +sleeve. + +"I did, and will--but why dost thou speak to me on this subject?" asked +Hakon warily. + +"Because I know your daughter Ada is among the doomed and ye would not +see her perish. My heart is in the house of Haldor the Fierce. Great +kindness have I received there, therefore would I go and warn them of +what is coming. I have friends here, and can get a swift cutter to bear +me south. Shall I tell them to expect aid from you?" + +Hakon was glad to hear this, and told her to inform Haldor that he would +soon be in the fiord with his longship, that he would aid the people of +Horlingdal in resisting Harald, and that it was probable Rolf Ganger +would also join them. + +Bearing these tidings Gunhild left Drontheim secretly, and in a swift +boat with a stout crew set off for the south a considerable time before +Hauskuld sailed, although that worthy did his best to carry out his +master's commands without delay. King Hakon also pushed forward his +preparations, and that so briskly that he too was enabled to start +before the berserk. + +Meanwhile King Harald gave himself up entirely to festivity--laughed and +talked with his courtiers, and seemed so light of heart that the greater +part of his followers thought him to be a careless, hearty man, on whom +the weighty matters of the kingdom sat very lightly. But Jarl Rongvold +knew that this free-and-easy spirit was affected, and that the King's +mind was much troubled by the state of things in several parts of the +kingdom. He also knew, however, that Harald had an iron will, which +nothing could bend from its purpose, and he felt convinced that the +course which his sovereign pursued would end either in his total +overthrow, or in the absolute subjection of Norway. + +It happened that at this time one of the festivals of sacrifice was +being celebrated by the people of the Drontheim country. It was an old +custom that, when there was sacrifice, all the bonders should come to +the spot where the heathen temple stood, and bring with them all that +they required while the festival of the sacrifice lasted. The men were +expected to bring ale with them, and all kinds of cattle as well as +horses, which were to be slaughtered, boiled, and eaten. + +In order to conciliate the people, the King on this occasion issued a +proclamation that he meant to pay all the expenses of the festival. +This had the double effect of attracting to the locality a vast +concourse of people, and of putting them all in great good humour, so +that they were quite ready to listen to, and fall in with, the plans of +the King, whatever these might be. Of course there were many freeborn +noble-spirited udallers who could not thus be tickled into the selling +of their birthright; but Harald's tremendous energy and power, coupled +with his rigorous treatment of all who resisted him, had the effect of +reducing many of these to sullen silence, while some made a virtue of +necessity, and accepted the fate which they thought it impossible to +evade. + +On the evening of the day of which we write, the fire was kindled in the +middle of the floor of the temple, and over it hung the kettles. Full +goblets were handed across the fire, and the King blessed the full +goblets and all the meat of the sacrifice. Then, first, Odin's goblet +was emptied for victory and power to the King; thereafter Niord's and +Freya's goblets for peace and a good season. After that there was much +feasting; and when the ale began to mount to the brains of the +revellers, many of them stood up, and raising aloft the "braga goblet"-- +that over which vows were wont to be made--began, in more or less +bombastic strains, to boast of what they meant to do in the future. +Having exhausted all other sentiments, the guests then emptied the +"remembrance goblet" to the memory of departed friends. + +Soon the desire for song and story began to be felt, and there was a +loud call for the scald. Whereupon, clearing his throat and glancing +round on the audience with a deprecatory air--just as amateur scalds of +the present day are wont to do--Thiodolph hinn Frode of Huina stood up +to sing. His voice was mellow, and his music wild. The subject chosen +showed that he understood how to humour both King and people, and if the +song was short it was much to the point. + + Song of the Scald. + + Of cup and platter need has none, + The guest who seeks the generous one-- + Harald the bounteous--who can trace + His lineage from the giant race; + For Harald's hand is liberal, free. + The guardian of the temple he. + He loves the gods, his open hand + Scatters his sword's gains o'er the land. + +The scald sat down with the prompt energy of a man who believes he has +said a good thing, and expects that it will be well received. He was +not disappointed, for the rafters rang with the wild huzzas of the +revellers as they leaped to their feet and shouted "Victory to the +King!" + +This was just what the King wanted, and he carefully fanned the flame +which the scald had so judiciously kindled. The result was that when he +afterwards called for men to go forth with him to do battle with the +turbulent spirits of Horlingdal, hundreds of those who would otherwise +have been malcontent, or lukewarm followers, busked themselves eagerly +for the fight, and flocked to his standard. His longships were crowded +with picked men, and war vessels of all sizes--from little boats to +dragons with thirty banks of rowers--augmented his fleet. At length he +sailed from Drontheim with perhaps the strongest armament that had ever +swept over the northern sea. + + + +CHAPTER NINETEEN. + +TELLS SOMETHING OF THE DOINGS OF SOLVE KLOFE AND OTHERS, AND TREATS OF A +FEW OF THE MARVELLOUS ADVENTURES OF GUTTORM STOUTHEART. + +The scene is changed. It is night; yet how different from night in most +other inhabited parts of the earth! The midnight sun is just sinking +beneath the horizon, close to the spot whence, in about twenty minutes, +he will rise, to repeat his prolonged course of nearly four-and-twenty +hours through the northern sky. But if the darkness of night is absent, +its deep quietude is there. The mighty cliffs that rise like giant +walls to heaven, casting broad, heavy shadows over the sea, send forth +no echoes, for the innumerable birds that dwell among them are silently +perched like snowflakes on every crag, or nestled in every crevice, +buried in repose. The sea resembles glass, and glides with but a faint +sigh upon the shore. All is impressively still on mountain and fiord. +Everything in nature is asleep, excepting the wakeful eye of day, the +hum of distant rills, the boom of inland cataracts, and the ripple on +the shore. These sounds, however, do but render the universal silence +more profound by suggesting the presence of those stupendous forces +which lie latent everywhere. + +A white mist floats over the sea like a curtain of gauze, investing +insignificant objects with grandeur, and clothing caverns, cliffs, and +mountain gorges with unusual sublimity. + +Only one object suggestive of man is visible through the haze. It is a +ship--of the old, old-fashioned build--with high stem and stern, and +monstrous figurehead. Its forefoot rests upon the strip of gravel in +yonder bay at the foot of the cliff, whose summit is lost in the clouds. +The hull reposes on its own reflected image, and the taper mast is +repeated in a wavy but distinct line below. It is the "longship"; the +"war vessel"; the "sea horse" of Solve Klofe, the son of King Hunthiof +of More, whom Harald Fairhair slew. + +Solve had, as we have before said, spent the winter in taking his +revenge by herrying the coast in his longship, and doing all in his +power to damage the King's men, as well as those who were friendly to +his cause. Among other things he had, early in spring, persuaded Haldor +the Fierce to let him have the use of one of his warships, with a few of +his best men, to accompany him on a viking cruise. Erling had resisted +his pressing invitation to bear him company, because of important +business, the nature of which he did not think it necessary to disclose. +His friend Glumm the Gruff also declined from similar reasons. At all +events, he was similarly pre-engaged and taciturn. Thorer the Thick, +however, and Kettle Flatnose, and young Alric--the latter by special and +importunate request--were allowed to accompany him on this expedition. + +We do not intend to give the details of this foray, although it was +unusually stirring and prolific of adventure. Suffice it to say, that +they had several hard fights both with Swedish and Danish vikings, in +all of which Alric distinguished himself for reckless daring, and would +certainly have been carried home dead upon his own shield had not Kettle +Flatnose watched over him with the solicitude of a father, and warded +off many a blow that was aimed at his pugnacious head. We fear it must +be added that Alric was not sufficiently impressed with his friend's +services in this way. The truth is that he entertained the firm belief +that nobody could kill him, and that he could kill anybody--which was +all very well as far as it went, but would not have carried him +scathless through the cruise, had not the stout Irishman been at his +back. + +Immense and valuable booty was gained at this time, for one of the +vessels which they captured had been cruising in southern lands, and was +returning with a large quantity of gold and silver ornaments when Solve +Klofe attacked it. A misfortune befell them, however. On their way +home a storm drove Thorer's vessel on the rocks in a fog, and it became +a total wreck. The crew were all saved, however, and much of the +lading, by Solve, who stowed the goods in his own ship, and brought home +the men. They were within a day's sail of Horlingdal, when they put +ashore to take a few hours' repose. + +Three hours after midnight Solve Klofe, whose breathing up to that time +had resembled that of an infant, gave vent to a prolonged bass snore, +and opened his eyes. This was followed by the shutting of his mouth, +and with one of those satisfactory stretchings of the body with which a +sound sleeper is wont in the morning to dismiss repose and recall his +energies. Having lain still a few moments to enjoy the result, Solve +sat up, and stretching forth his hand, drew aside the curtain of the +tent under which he slept, and looked out. The sight that gladdened his +eyes was beautiful beyond description, for the sun was up in all his +northern glory, and shone on the silver sea with dazzling light, while +he scattered away the mists of morning. But the best sight of all to +the bold viking was the splendid warship which, with painted sides and +shields, and gilded masts and prow, glowed and glittered like a +beautiful gem in a setting of the brightest azure blue. + +Turning his eyes inside his tent again, Solve gazed with the +expressionless aspect of a still drowsy man upon the countenance of +Kettle, whose flat nose and open mouth gave vent to tones resembling +those of a bassoon. Beside him, and nestling close to him, lay the +youthful Alric, with his curly head resting on Kettle's broad bosom; for +the lad, albeit manly enough when awake, had sufficient of the child +still about him to induce a tendency on his part, when asleep, to make +use of any willing friend as a pillow. Thorer the Thick was also there, +with his head on his arm, his body sprawling indescribably, his shield +above him like a literal coverlet, and his right hand on his sword-hilt. + +"Ho!" exclaimed Solve, in a tone that marvellously resembled the tones +of modern men in similar circumstances. + +Kettle and Thorer, however, sprang up to a sitting posture with very +primitive alacrity, for in those days a man's life often depended on his +being and keeping very wide-awake. + +Poor Alric was tumbled somewhat unceremoniously to one side, but that +failed to awaken him, for he was not yet sufficiently trained to sleep +in the midst of alarms, and felt very naturally inclined to growl and +bite when shaken or told to "get up!" + +In a few minutes, however, his lethargy was overcome; the men were +aroused; the tents were struck; the longship was pushed off, and, under +the influence of thirty pair of oars, it crept like a monstrous insect +away over the sea. + +Those who had not to work at the oars sat at first quietly on the +thwarts, or leaned over the gunwale gazing into the deep, or up at the +sky, enjoying the warm air and their own fancies. But after a time +talkative spirits began to loose their tongues, and ere long a murmur of +quiet conversation pervaded the ship. + +"I wonder what news we shall hear at the stede when we arrive?" said +Thorer to Kettle, who with several others sat on the poop beside Solve. + +"I hope it won't be bad news," answered Kettle. "Harald is not the man +to sleep through the summer when there is work to be done. If it wasn't +that I expect to give him the tooth-ache before I go, surely I should +have been in Ireland long ago." + +"Whom didst thou serve under, Kettle, before we brought thee to Norway?" +asked Alric. + +"Under the King of Dublin," replied Kettle. + +"Was he a great king?" + +"A great king? Aye, never was there a greater; and a great king he is +yet, if he's alive, though I have my own fears on that point, for he was +taking badly to ale when I left." + +There was something pathetic yet humorous in the tone and expression +with which Kettle said this which caused Alric to laugh. The Irishman +started, and for an instant his huge countenance blazed with a look of +wrath which was quite majestic, and overawed the boy, bold though he +was. But it passed away in a moment, and was replaced by a sorrowful +look as Kettle shook his head and said-- + +"Ah! boy, your laugh reminded me of the laugh of the villain Haabrok who +took the old king's throne at the time I was carried off, bound hand and +foot. Lucky was it for him that my hands were not free then.--Well, +well, this sounds like bragging," he added with a smile, "which is only +fit for boys and cowards." + +Alric winced a little at this, for he was quite aware of his own +tendency to boast, and for a moment he felt a strong inclination to +stand up for "boys", and assert, that although boasting was common +enough with cowardly boys, it was not so with all boys; but on +consideration he thought it best to hold his tongue, on that point, at +least until he should have freed himself of the evil of boasting. To +change the subject he said-- + +"Was the old king fond of thee, Kettle?" + +"Aye, as fond of me as of his own son." + +"Was he like my father?" pursued the boy. + +"No; there are not many men like thy father, lad; but he was a stout and +brave old man, and a great warrior in his day. Now I think of it, he +was very like Guttorm Stoutheart." + +"Then he was a handsome man," said Solve Klofe with emphasis. + +"He was," continued Kettle, "but not quite so desperate. Old Guttorm is +the most reckless man I ever did see. Did I ever tell ye of the +adventure I had with him when we went on viking cruise south to +Valland?" + +"No," said Solve; "let us hear about it; but stay till I change the +oarsmen." + +He went forward and gave the order to relieve the men who had rowed from +the land, and when the fresh men were on the benches he returned and +bade Kettle go on. + +"'Tis a fine country," said the Irishman, glancing round him with a +glowing eye, and speaking in a low tone, as if to himself--"one to be +proud of." + +And in truth there was ground for his remark, for the mists had by that +time entirely cleared away, leaving unveiled a sea so calm and bright +that the innumerable islets off the coast appeared as if floating in +air. + +"That is true," said Thorer. "I sometimes wonder, Kettle, at thy +longing to return to Ireland. I am in the same case with thyself--was +taken from my home in Jemteland, laboured as a thrall, wrought out my +freedom, and remained in Haldor's service, but have never wished to +return home." + +"Didst thou leave a wife and children behind thee?" asked Kettle. + +"Nay; I was carried away while very young." + +"Is thy father alive, or thy mother?" + +"No, they are both dead." + +"Then I wonder not that ye have no desire to return home. My father and +mother are both alive--at least I have good reason to believe so--my +wife and children are waiting for me. Canst wonder, man, that I long to +behold once more the green hills of Ireland?" + +"Nay, if that be so, I wonder not," replied Thorer. + +"Come, Kettle, thou forgettest that we wait for the story about old +Guttorm Stoutheart," said Solve Klofe, arranging the corner of a sail so +as to protect his back from the sun. + +"'Tis an old story now in Horlingdal," said Kettle; "but as thou hast +not been in this quarter for a long time, no doubt it is new to thee. +Thorer there knows it well; but I find that it bears telling more than +once. Well, it was, as I have said, two years past that Guttorm went +south to Valland on viking cruise. He called at Horlingdal in passing, +and got some of the dalesmen. Among others, I was allowed to go. He +and I got on very well together, and we were fortunate in getting much +booty. One day we came to a part of the coast where we saw a strong +castle of stone on the top of a hill a short way inland. We also saw +plenty of cattle on a plain near the sea, so Guttorm ordered his +longship to be steered for the shore, and we began to drive some of the +cattle down to the beach, intending to slaughter them there, as our +provisions were getting low. On seeing this, a party of men came out +from the castle and bade us begone. We told them to be easy in their +minds, for we only wanted a little food. We even went so far as to ask +it of them civilly, but the men were such surly fellows that they +refused to listen to reason, and attacked us at once. Of course we +drove them back into their castle, but in doing so we lost one or two of +our best men. This angered old Guttorm, who is not a quarrelsome man, +as ye know. He would have gone away peaceably enough if he had been let +alone to help himself to a few beasts; but his blood was set up by that +time, so he ordered all the men on shore, and we pitched our tents and +besieged the castle. Being made of stone, there was no chance of +setting it on fire, and as the walls were uncommonly high, it was not +possible to take it by assault. Well, we sat down before it, and for +two days tried everything we could think of to take it, but failed, for +there were plenty of men in it, and they defended the walls stoutly. +Besides this, to say the truth, we had already lost a number of good men +on the cruise and could ill afford to lose more. + +"On the third day some of our chief men advised Guttorm to give it up, +but that made him so furious that no one dared speak to him about it for +another two days. At the end of that time his nephew plucked up heart, +and going to him, said-- + +"`Uncle, do you see the little birds that fly back and forward over the +castle walls so freely, and build their nests in the thatch of the +housetops?' + +"`I do, nephew,' says Guttorm. `What then?' + +"`My advice is,' says the nephew, `that you should order the men to make +each a pair of wings like those the birds have, and then we shall all +fly over the walls, for it seems to me that there is no other way of +getting into the castle.' + +"`Thou art a droll knave,' replies Guttorm, for he was ever fond of a +joke; `but thou art wise also, therefore I advise thee to make a pattern +pair of wings for the men; and when they are ready--' + +"Here Guttorm stopped short, and fell to thinking; and he thought so +long that his nephew asked him at last if he had any further commands +for him. + +"`Yes, boy, I have. There is more in this matter of the wings than thou +dreamest of. Go quickly and order the men to make snares, and catch as +many of these little birds as they can before sunset. Let them be +careful not to hurt the birds, and send Kettle Flatnose and my +house-carle hither without delay.' + +"When I came to the old man I found him walking to and fro briskly, with +an expression of eagerness in his eye. + +"`Kettle,' he said smartly, `go and prepare two hundred pieces of cord, +each about one foot long, and to the end of each piece tie a small chip +of wood as long as the first joint of thy thumb, and about the size of a +goose quill. Smear these pieces of wood over with pitch, and have the +whole in my tent within three hours.' + +"As I walked away to obey this order, wondering what it could all be +about, I heard him tell his chief house-carle to have all the men armed +and ready for action a little after sunset, as quietly as possible. + +"Before the three hours were out, I returned to the tent with the two +hundred pieces of cord prepared according to orders, and found old +Guttorm sitting with a great sack before him, and a look of perplexity +on his face that almost made me laugh. He was half-inclined to laugh +too, for the sack moved about in a strange way, as if it were alive! + +"`Kettle,' said he, when I came forward, `I need thy help here. I have +got some three hundred little birds in that sack, and I don't know how +to keep them in order, for they are fluttering about and killing +themselves right and left, so that I shall soon have none left alive for +my purpose. My thought is to tie one of these cords to a leg of each +bird, set the bit of stick on fire and let it go, so that when it flies +to its nest in the thatch it will set the houses in the castle on fire. +Now, what is thy advice?' + +"`Call as many of the men into the tent as it will hold, and let each +catch a bird, and keep it till the cords are made fast; says I.' + +"This was done at once, but we had more trouble than we expected, for +when the mouth of the sack was opened, out flew a dozen of the birds +before we could close it! The curtain of the tent was down, however, +so, after a good deal of hunting, we caught them again. When the cords +were tied to these the men were sent out of the tent, each with a little +bird in his hand, and with orders to go to his particular post and +remain there till further orders. Then another batch of men came in, +and they were supplied with birds and cords like the others; but ye have +no notion what trouble we had. I have seen a hundred viking prisoners +caught and held fast with half the difficulty and less noise! Moreover, +while some of the men squeezed the birds to death in their fear lest +they should escape, others let theirs go in their anxiety not to hurt +them, and the little things flew back to their nests with the cords and +bits of chip trailing after them. At last, however, all was ready. The +men were kept in hiding till after dark; then the little chips were set +on fire all at the same time, and the birds were let go. It was like a +shower of stars descending on the castle, for each bird made straight +for its own nest; but just as we were expecting to behold the success of +our plan, up jumped a line of men on the castle walls, and by shouting +and swinging their arms scared the birds away. We guessed at once that +the little birds which had escaped too soon with the strings tied to +their legs had been noticed, and the trick suspected, for the men in the +castle were well prepared. A few of the birds flew over their heads, +and managed to reach the roofs, which caught fire at once; but wherever +this happened, a dozen men ran at the place and beat the fire out. The +thing was wisely contrived, but it was cleverly met and repelled, so we +had only our trouble and the disappointment for our pains. + +"After this," continued Kettle, "old Guttorm became like a wolf. He +snarled at everyone who came near him for some time, but his passion +never lasted long. He soon fell upon another plan. + +"There was a small river which ran at the foot of the mound on which the +castle stood, and there were mudbanks on the side next to it, One night +we were all ordered to go to the mudbanks as quiet as mice, with shovels +and picks in our hands, and dig a tunnel under the castle. We did so, +and the first night advanced a long way, but we had to stop a good while +before day to let the dirt wash away and the water get clear again, so +that they might not suspect what we were about. The next night we got +under the castle wall, and on the fifth night had got well under the +great hall, for we could hear the men singing and shouting as they sat +at meat above us. We had then to work very carefully for fear of making +a noise, and when we thought it ready for the assault we took our swords +and shields with us, and Guttorm led the way. His chief house-carle was +appointed to drive through the floor, while Guttorm and I stood ready to +egg him on and back him up. + +"We heard the men above singing and feasting as usual, when suddenly +there was a great silence, for one of the big stones over our heads was +loosened, and they had evidently felt or seen it. Now was the time +come; so, while the house-carle shovelled off the earth, some of us got +our fingers in about the edge of the stone, and pulled with all our +force. Suddenly down it came and a man along with it. We knocked him +on the head at once, and gave a loud huzza as the house-carle sprang up +through the hole, caught a shower of blows on his shield, and began to +lay about him fiercely. Guttorm was very mad at the carle for going up +before him, but the carle was light and the old man was heavy, so he +could not help it. I was about to follow, when a man cut at my head +with a great axe as I looked up through the hole. I caught the blow on +my shield, and thrust my sword up into his leg, which made him give +back; but just at that moment the earth gave way under our feet, and a +great mass of stones and rubbish fell down on us, driving us all back +into the passage through which we had come, except the house-carle, who +had been caught by the enemy and dragged up into the hall. As soon as +we could get on our feet we tried to make for the hole again, but it was +so filled with earth and stones that we could not get forward a step. +Knowing, therefore, that it was useless to stay longer there, we ran +back to the entrance of the tunnel, but here we found a body of men who +had been sent out of the castle to cut off our retreat. We made short +work of these. Disappointment and anger had made every man of us equal +to two, so we hewed our way right through them, and got back to the camp +with the loss of only two men besides the house-carle. + +"Next morning when it was daylight, the enemy brought the poor prisoner +to the top of the castle wall, where they lopped off his head, and, +having cut his body into four pieces, they cast them down to us with +shouts of contempt. + +"After this Guttorm Stoutheart appeared to lose all his fire and spirit. +He sent for his chief men, and said that he was going to die, and that +it was his wish to be left to do so undisturbed. Then he went into his +tent, and no one was allowed after that to go near him except his +nephew. + +"A week later we were told that Guttorm was dying, and that he wanted to +be buried inside the castle; for we had discovered that the people were +what they called Christians, and that they had consecrated ground there. + +"When this was made known to the priests in the castle they were much +pleased, and agreed to bury our chief in their ground, if we would bring +his body to a spot near the front gateway, and there leave it and retire +to a safe distance from the walls. There was some objection to this at +first, hit it was finally agreed to--only a request was made that two of +the next of kin to Guttorm might be allowed to accompany the body to the +burial-place, as it would be considered a lasting disgrace to the family +if it were buried by strange hands when friends were near. This request +was granted on the understanding that the two relations were to go into +the castle unarmed. + +"On the day of the funeral I was summoned to Guttorm's tent to help to +put him into his coffin, which had been made for him after the pattern +of the coffins used in that part of the country. When I entered I found +the nephew standing by the side of the coffin, and the old Sea-king +himself sitting on the foot of it. + +"`Thou art not quite dead yet?' says I, looking hard in his face. + +"`Not yet,' says he, `and I don't expect to be for some time.' + +"`Are we to put you into the coffin?' I asked. + +"`Yes,' says he, `and see that my good axe lies ready to my hand. Put +thy sword on my left side, nephew, that thou mayst catch it readily. +They bury me in consecrated ground to-day, Kettle; and thou, being one +of my nearest of kin, must attend me to the grave! Thou must go unarmed +too, but that matters little, for thy sword can be placed on the top of +my coffin, along with thy shield, to do duty as the weapons of the dead. +When to use them I leave to thy well-known discretion. Dost +understand?' + +"`Your speech is not difficult for the understanding to take in,' says +I. + +"`Ha! especially the understanding of an Irishman,' says he, with a +smile. `Well, help me to get into this box, and see that thou dost not +run it carelessly against gate-posts; for it is not made to be roughly +handled!' + +"With that old Guttorm lay back in the coffin, and we packed in the +nephew's sword and shield with him, and his own axe and shield at his +right side. Then we fastened down the lid, and two men were called to +assist us in carrying it to the appointed place. + +"As we walked slowly forward I saw that our men were drawn up in a line +at some distance from the castle wall, with their heads hanging down, as +if they were in deep grief,--and so they were, for only a _few_ were +aware of what was going to be done; yet all were armed, and ready for +instant action. The appointed spot being reached, we put the coffin on +the ground, and ordered the two men, who were armed, to retire. + +"`But don't go far away, lads,' says I; `for we have work for ye to do.' + +"They went back only fifty ells or so, and then turned to look on. + +"At the same time the gate of the castle opened, and twelve priests came +out dressed in long black robes, and carrying a cross before them. One +of them, who understood the Norse language, said, as they came forward-- + +"`What meaneth the sword and shield?' + +"I told him that it was our custom to bury a warrior's arms along with +him. He seemed inclined to object to this at first, but thinking better +of it, he ordered four of his men to take up the coffin, which they did, +shoulder high, and marched back to the castle, closely followed by the +two chief mourners. + +"No sooner had we entered the gateway, which was crowded with warriors, +than I stumbled against the coffin, and drove it heavily against one of +the posts, and, pretending to stretch out my hands to support it, I +seized my sword and shield. At the same moment the lid of the coffin +flew into the air, the sides burst out, and old Guttorm dropped to the +ground, embracing two of the priests so fervently in his descent that +they fell on the top of him. I had only time to observe that the nephew +caught up his sword and shield as they fell among the wreck, when a +shower of blows from all directions called for the most rapid action of +eye and limb. Before Guttorm could regain his feet and utter his +war-cry, I had lopped off two heads, and the nephew's sword was whirling +round him like lightning flashes, but of course I could not see what he +did. The defenders fought bravely, and in the first rush we were almost +borne back; but in another moment the two men who had helped us to carry +the coffin were alongside of us; and now, having a front of five stout +men, we began to feel confident of success. This was turned into +certainty when we heard, a minute later, a great rushing sound behind +us, and knew that our men were coming on. Old Guttorm swung his +battle-axe as if it had been a toy, and, uttering a tremendous roar, cut +his way right into the middle of the castle. We all closed in behind +him; the foe wavered--they gave way--at last they turned and fled; for +remembering, no doubt, how they had treated the poor house-carle, they +knew they had no right to expect mercy. In a quarter of an hour the +place was cleared, and the castle was ours." + +"And what didst thou do with it?" asked Alric, in much excitement. + +"Do with it? Of course we feasted in it till we were tired; then we put +as much of its valuables into our ships as they could carry, after which +we set the place on fire and returned to Norway." + +"'Twas well done, and a lucky venture," observed Solve Klofe. + +Alric appeared to meditate for a few minutes, and then said with a +smile-- + +"If Christian the hermit were here he would say it was ill done, and an +unlucky venture for the men of the castle." + +"The hermit is a fool," said Solve. + +"That he is not," cried the boy, reddening. "A braver and better man +never drew bow. But he has queer thoughts in his head." + +"That may be so. It matters naught to me," retorted Solve, rising and +going forward to the high prow of the ship, whence he looked out upon +the island-studded sea.--"Come, lads, change hands again, and pull with +a will. Methinks a breeze will fill our sails after we pass yonder +point, and if so, we shall sleep to-night in Horlingdal." + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY. + +IN WHICH THE SKY AGAIN BECOMES OVERCAST--THE WAR-TOKEN IS SENT OUT-- +ALRIC GETS A SURPRISE, AND A BERSERK CATCHES A TARTAR. + +Erling the Bold was very fond of salmon-fishing, and it was his wont, +when the weather suited, and nothing of greater importance claimed his +attention, to sally forth with a three-pronged spear to fish in the +Horlingdal river, which swarmed with salmon in the summer season of the +year. + +One evening he left Haldorstede with his fishing-spear on his shoulder, +and went up to the river, accompanied by one of the house-carles. They +both wore shirts of mail, and carried shield and sword, for these were +not times in which men could venture to go about unarmed. On reaching a +place where the stream ran shallow among rocks, our hero waded in, and +at the first dart of his spear struck a fish of about fifteen pounds +weight, which he cast, like a bar of burnished silver, on the grassy +bank. + +"That will be our supper to-night," observed the carle, as he disengaged +the spear. + +Erling made no reply, but in a few minutes he pulled out another fish, +and said, as he threw it down-- + +"That will do for a friend, should one chance to turn in to us +to-night." + +After that he tried again, but struck no more, although he changed his +ground frequently; so he cast his eyes upwards as if to judge of the +time of evening, and appeared to doubt whether or not he should +persevere any longer. + +"Try the foss," suggested the house-carle; "you seldom fail to get one +there." + +"Well, I will try it. Do thou leave the fish under that bush, and +follow me. It needs three big fish to make a good feast for my father's +household." + +"Besides," said the carle, "there is luck in an odd number, as Kettle +Flatnose is fond of telling us." + +They were about to ascend the bank to the track which led to the +waterfall, about half a mile farther up the river, when their attention +was arrested by a shout; looking down the stream in the direction whence +it came, they saw a figure approaching them at full speed. + +"That must be my brother Alric," said Erling, on hearing the shout +repeated. + +"It looks like him," said the carle. + +All doubt on the point was quickly set at rest by the lad, who ran at a +pace which soon brought him near. Waving his cap above his head he +shouted-- + +"News! news! good news!" + +"Out with thy news, then," said Erling, as Alric stood before him, +panting violently, "though I dare say the best news thou hast to give is +that thou hast come back to us safe and well." + +"Hah! let me get wind! nay, I have better news than that," exclaimed +Alric; "Harald is coming--King Harald Haarfager--with a monstrous fleet +of longships, cutters, dragons, and little boats, and a mighty host of +men, to lay waste Horlingdal with fire and sword, and burn us all alive, +perhaps eat us too, who knows!" + +"Truly if this be good news," said Erling, with a laugh, "I hope I may +never hear bad news. But where got ye such news, Alric?" + +"From the widow Gunhild, to be sure, who is true to us as steel, and +comes all the way from Drontheim, out of love to thee, Erling, to tell +it. But, I say, _don't_ you think this good news? I always thought you +would give your best battle-axe to have a chance of fighting Harald!" + +"Aye, truly, for a chance of fighting Harald, but not for that chance +coupled with the other chance of seeing Horlingdal laid waste with fire +and sword, to say nothing of being eaten alive, which, I suppose, is +thine own addition to the news, boy. But come, if this be so, we do not +well to waste time chattering here. Fetch the two fish, carle. +To-night we must be content with what luck lies in an even number in +spite of the opinion of Kettle Flatnose.--Come, Alric, thou canst tell +me more of this as we hasten home." + +"But I have more good news than that to tell," said the lad, as they +hurried towards Haldorstede. "Solve Klofe with his men have come back +with us--indeed, I may rather say that we have come back with Solve, for +our own ship has been wrecked and lost, but Kettle and I and Thorer and +all the men were saved by Solve, with nearly everything belonging to us, +and all the booty. It is not more than an hour since we sailed into the +fiord, loaded to the shield-circle with, oh! _such_ splendid things-- +gold, silver, cups, tankards, gems, shawls--and--and I know not what +all, besides captives. It was just after we landed that a small boat +came round the ness from the north with the widow Gunhild in it, and she +jumped ashore, and told what she had seen and heard at Drontheim, and +that we may expect Ada's father, King Hakon, in his longship, to our +aid; perhaps he may be coming into the fiord even now while we are +talking. And--and, she said also that Rolf Ganger had left the King in +a huff, and perhaps we might look for help from him too. So methinks I +bring good news, don't I?" + +"Good, aye, and stirring news, my boy," cried Erling striding onward at +such a pace that the carle with the fish was left behind, and Alric was +compelled to adopt an undignified trot in order to keep up with his huge +brother. "From this I see," continued Erling in a tone of deep +seriousness, "that the long-looked-for time is at last approaching. +This battle that must surely come will decide the fate of freemen. King +Harald Haarfager must now be crushed, or Norway shall be enslaved. +Alric, my boy, thou hast been styled Lightfoot. If ever thou didst +strive to merit that title, strive this night as ye have never striven +before, for there is urgent need that every friendly blade in the land +should assemble in the dale without delay. I will send thee forth with +the split arrow as soon as I have seen and spoken with my father.--Ha! +I see him coming. Go into the house, lad, and sup well and quickly, for +no sleep shall visit thine eyelids this night." + +Alric's breast swelled with gratification at being spoken to thus +earnestly and made of such importance by his brother, whom he admired +and loved with an intensity of feeling that no words can convey. +Looking up in his face with sparkling eyes, he gave him a little nod. +Erling replied with another little nod and a sedate smile, and the boy, +turning away, dashed into the house, at which they had now arrived. + +"Hast heard the news, Erling?" asked Haldor, as his son drew near. + +"Aye, Alric has told it me." + +"What thinkest thou?" + +"That the game is about to be played out." + +Haldor looked full in Erling's face, and his own noble countenance +glowed with an expression of majesty which cannot be described, and +which arose from the deep conviction that one of the most momentous eras +in his life had arrived--a period in which his own fate and that of all +he held most dear would in all probability be sealed. Death or victory, +he felt assured, were now the alternatives; and when he reflected on the +great power of the King, and the stern necessity there was for the +exertion of not only the utmost bravery, but the most consummate skill, +his whole being glowed with suppressed emotion, while his bearing +betokened the presence, and bore the dignified stamp, of a settled +purpose to do his best, and meet his fate, for weal or woe, manfully. + +"Come," said he, putting his arm within that of his stout son, "let us +turn into the wood awhile. I would converse with thee on this matter." + +"Alric is ready to start with the token," said Erling. + +"I know it, my son. Let him sup first; the women will care well for +him, for they will guess the work that lies before him. The people of +Ulfstede are with us to-night, and Glumm is here; but Glumm is not of +much use as a counsellor just now, poor fellow. It were kind to let him +be, until it is time to rouse him up to fight!" + +A quiet smile played on Haldor's lips as he thus alluded to the +impossibility of getting Glumm to think of anything but love or fighting +at that time. + +While the father and son strolled in the wood conversing earnestly, a +noisy animated scene was presented in the great hall of Haldorstede; for +in it were assembled, besides the ordinary household, the family from +Ulfstede, a sprinkling of the neighbours, Gunhild and her men, Guttorm +Stoutheart, and Solve Klofe, with Kettle Flatnose, Thorer the Thick, and +the chief men who had arrived from the recent viking cruise; all of whom +were talking together in the utmost excitement, while the fair Herfrida +and her daughters and maids prepared a sumptuous meal. + +In those days, and at such an establishment as that of Haldor the +Fierce, it was not possible for friends to appear inopportunely. A +dozen might have "dropped in" to breakfast, dinner, or supper, without +costing Dame Herfrida an anxious thought as to whether the cold joint of +yesterday "would do", or something more must be procured, for she knew +that the larder was always well stocked. When, therefore, a miniature +army of hungry warriors made a sudden descent upon her, she was quite +prepared for them--received them with the matronly dignity and +captivating smile for which she was celebrated, and at once gave +directions to her commissariat department to produce and prepare meat +and drink suitable to the occasion. + +The evening which had thus grown so unexpectedly big with present facts +and future portents had begun in a very small way--in a way somewhat +equivalent to the modern "small tea party". Ulf of Romsdal, feeling a +disposition "to make a night of it", had propounded to Dame Astrid the +idea of "going up to Haldorstede for the evening." His wife, being +amiably disposed, agreed. Hilda and Ada were equally willing, and +Glumm, who by a mere chance happened to be there at the time, could not +choose but accompany them! + +The family at Haldorstede were delighted to see their friends. Dame +Herfrida carried off Dame Astrid to her apartment to divest her of her +hat and mantle. Ingeborg bore off Ada, and the younger girls of the +household made away with Hilda, leaving Ulf to talk the politics of the +day with Haldor, while Glumm pretended to listen to them, but listened, +in reality, for Ada's returning footsteps. In a short time the fair +ones re-entered the hall, and there they had supper, or, more properly, +an interlude supper--a sort of supperlet, so to speak, composed of cold +salmon, scones, milk, and ale, which was intended, no doubt, to give +them an appetite for the true supper that should follow ere long. Over +this supperlet they were all very talkative and merry, with the +exception, poor fellow, of Glumm, who sat sometimes glancing at, and +always thinking of, Ada, and pendulating, as usual, between the +condition of being miserably happy or happily miserable. + +No mortal, save Glumm himself, could have told or conceived what a life +Ada led him. She took him up by the neck, figuratively speaking, and +shook him again and again as a terrier shakes a rat, and dropped him! +But here the simile ceases, for whereas the rat usually crawls away, if +it can, and evidently does not want more, Glumm always wanted more, and +never crawled away. On the contrary, he crawled humbly back to the feet +of his tormentor, and by looks, if not words, craved to be shaken again! + +It was while Glumm was drinking this cup of mingled bliss and torment, +and the others were enjoying their supperlet, that Solve Klofe and his +men, and Kettle Flatnose, Thorer the Thick, and the house-carles, burst +clamorously into the hall, with old Guttorm Stoutheart, who had met them +on the beach. Scarcely had they got over the excitement of this first +invasion when the widow Gunhild and her niece arrived to set the +household ablaze with her alarming news. The moment that Haldor heard +it he dispatched Alric in search of Erling, who, as we have seen, +immediately returned home. + +Shortly afterwards he and Haldor entered the hall. + +"Ho! my men," cried the latter, "to arms, to arms! Busk ye for the +fight, and briskly too, for when Harald Haarfager lifts his hand he is +not slow to strike. Where is Alric?" + +"Here I am, father." + +"Hast fed well, boy?" + +"Aye, famously," answered Alric, wiping his mouth and tightening his +belt. + +"Take the war-token, my son, and see that thou speed it well. Let it +not fail for want of a messenger. If need be, go all the round thyself, +and rest not as long as wind and limb hold out. Thy fighting days have +begun early," he added in a softer tone, as he passed his large hand +gently over the fair head of the boy, "perchance they will end early. +But, whatever betide, Alric, quit thee like a man--as thou art truly in +heart if not in limb." + +Such words from one who was not at any time lavish of praise might, a +short time before, have caused the boy to hold up his head proudly, but +the last year of his life had been fraught with many lessons. He +listened with a heaving breast and beating heart indeed, but with his +head bent modestly down, while on his flushed countenance there was a +bright expression, and on his lips a glad smile which spoke volumes. +His father felt assured, as he looked at him, that he would never bring +discredit on his name. + +"Ye know the course," said Haldor; "away!" + +In another minute Alric was running at full speed up the glen with the +war-token in his hand. His path was rugged, his race was wild, and its +results were striking. He merely shouted as he passed the windows of +the cottages low down in the dale, knowing that the men there would be +roused by others near at hand; but farther on, where the cottages were +more scattered, he opened the door of each and showed the token, +uttering a word or two of explanation, during the brief moment he stayed +to swallow a mouthful of water or to tighten his belt. + +At first his course lay along the banks of the river, every rock and +shrub of which he knew. Farther on he left the stream on the right, and +struck into the mountains just as the sun went down. + +High up on the fells a little cottage stood perched on a cliff. It was +one of the "saeters" or mountain dairies where the cattle were pastured +in summer long ago--just as they are at the present day. Alric ran up +the steep face of the hill, doubled swiftly round the corner of the +enclosure, burst open the door, and, springing in, held up the token, +while he wiped the streaming perspiration from his face. + +A man and his wife, with three stout sons and a comely daughter, were +seated on a low bench eating their supper of thickened milk. + +"The war-token!" exclaimed the men, springing up, and, without a +moment's delay, taking down and girding on the armour which hung round +the walls. + +"King Harald is on his way to the dale," said Alric; "we assemble at +Ulfstede." + +"Shall I bear on the token?" asked the youngest of the men. + +"Aye; but go thou with it up the Wolf's Den Valley. I myself will bear +it round by the Eagle Crag and the coast." + +"That is a long way," said the man, taking his shield down from a peg in +the wall. + +Alric replied not, for he had already darted away, and was again +speeding along the mountain side. + +Night had begun to close in, for the season had not yet advanced to the +period of endless daylight. Far away in an offshoot vale, a bright +ruddy light gleamed through the surrounding darkness. Alric's eye was +fixed on it. His untiring foot sped towards it. The roar of a mighty +cataract grew louder on his ear every moment. He had to slacken his +pace a little, and pick his steps as he went on, for the path was rugged +and dangerous. + +"I wonder if Old Hans of the Foss is at home?" was the thought that +passed through his mind as he approached the door. + +Old Hans himself answered the thought by opening the door at that +moment. He was a short, thick-set, and very powerful man, of apparently +sixty years of age, but his eye was as bright and his step as light as +that of many a man of twenty. + +"The war-token," he said, almost gaily, stepping back into the cottage +as Alric leaped in. "What is doing, son of Haldor?" + +"King Harald will be upon us sooner than we wish. Ulfstede is the +meeting-place. Can thy son speed on the token in the next valley?" + +The old warrior shook his head sadly, and pointed to a low bed, where a +young man lay with the wasted features and bright eyes that told of a +deadly disease in its advanced stage. + +An exclamation of regret and sympathy escaped from Alric. "I cannot +go," he said; "my course lies to the left, by the Stor foss. Hast no +one to send?" + +"I will go, father," said a smart girl of fifteen, who had been seated +behind her mother, near the couch of the sick man. + +"Thou, bairn?" + +"Yes, why not? It is only a league to Hawksdal, where young Eric will +gladly relieve me." + +"True," said the old warrior, with a smile, as he began to don his +armour. "Go; I need not tell thee to make haste!" + +Alric waited to hear no more, but darted away as the little maid tripped +off in another direction. + +Thus hour by hour the night passed by and Alric ran steadily on his +course, rousing up all the fighting men in his passage through the +district. As he advanced, messengers with war-tokens were multiplied, +and, ere the morning's sun had glinted on the mountain peaks or lighted +up the white fields of the Justedal glacier, the whole country was in +arms, and men were crowding to the rendezvous. + +Daylight had just commenced to illumine the eastern sky, when Alric, +having completed his round, found himself once more on the cliffs above +the sea. But he was still six or eight miles from Ulfstede, and the +path to it along the top of the cliffs was an extremely rugged one. +Earnestly then did the poor boy wish that he had remembered to put a +piece of bread in his wallet before leaving home, but in his haste he +had forgotten to do so, and now he found himself weary, foot-sore, and +faint from exertion, excitement, and hunger, far from any human +habitation. As there was no remedy for this, he made up his mind to +take a short rest on the grass, and then set off for home as fast as +possible. + +With this end in view he selected a soft spot, on a cliff overlooking +the sea, and lay down with a sigh of satisfaction. Almost instantly he +fell into a deep slumber, in which he lay, perfectly motionless, for +some hours. How long that slumber would have lasted it is impossible to +say, for it was prematurely and unpleasantly interrupted. + +In his cat-like creepings about the coast, Hauskuld the berserk, having +obtained all the information that he thought would be of use to his +royal master, landed for the last time to reconnoitre the position of +Ulfstede, and see as much as he could of the doings of the people before +turning his prow again to the north. The spot where he ran his boat +ashore was at the foot of a steep cliff, up which he and a comrade +ascended with some difficulty. + +At the top, to his surprise, he found a lad lying on the grass sound +asleep. After contemplating him for a few minutes, and whispering a few +words to his comrade, who indulged in a broad grin, Hauskuld drew his +sword and pricked Alric on the shoulder with it. An electric shock +could not have been more effective. The poor boy sprang up with a loud +cry, and for a few seconds gazed at the berserks in bewilderment. Then +it flashed upon his awakening faculties that he was standing before +enemies, so he suddenly turned round and fled, but Hauskuld sprang after +him, and, before he had got three yards away, had caught him by the nape +of the neck with a grip that made him gasp. + +"Ho, ho! my young fox, so ye thought to leave the hounds in the lurch? +Come, cease thy kicking, else will I give thee an inch of steel to quiet +thee. Tell me thy name, and what thou art about here, and I will +consider whether to make use of thee or hurl thee over the cliffs." + +By this time Alric had fully recovered his senses and his +self-possession. He stood boldly up before the berserk and replied-- + +"My name is Alric--son of Haldor the Fierce, out of whose way I advise +thee to keep carefully, if thou art not tired of life. I have just been +round with the war-token rousing the country." + +"A most proper occupation for an eaglet such as thou," said Hauskuld; +"that is to say, if the cause be a good one." + +"The cause is one of the best," said Alric. + +"Prithee, what may it be?" + +"Self-defence against a tyrant." + +Hauskuld glanced at his comrade, and smiled sarcastically as he asked-- + +"And who may this tyrant be?" + +"Harald Haarfager, tyrant King of Norway," replied the lad stoutly. + +"I thought so," said Hauskuld, with a grim twist of his features. +"Well, young eaglet, thou art worthy to be made mincemeat of to feed the +crows, but it may be that the tyrant would like to dispose of thee +himself. Say now, whether will ye walk down that cliff quietly in front +of me, or be dragged down?" + +"I would rather walk, if I _must_ go." + +"Well, thou _must_ go, therefore--walk, and see thou do it as briskly as +may be, else will I apply the spur, which thou hast felt once already +this morning. Lead the way, comrade; I will bring up the rear to +prevent the colt from bolting." + +As he knew that resistance would be useless, the boy promptly and +silently descended the cliff with his captors, and entered the boat, +which was immediately pushed off and rowed along-shore. + +"Now listen to me, Alric, son of Haldor," said Hauskuld, seating himself +beside his captive: "King Harald is not the tyrant you take him for; he +is a good king, and anxious to do the best he can for Norway. Some +mistaken men, like your father, compel him to take strong measures when +he would fain take mild. If you will take me to a spot where I may +safely view the valley of Horlingdal, and tell me all you know about +their preparations for resistance, I will take you back to Drontheim, +and speak well of you to the King, who will not only reward you with his +favour, but make good terms, I doubt not, with your father." + +The wily berserk had changed his tone to that of one who addresses a +superior in rank while he thus tempted the boy; but he little guessed +the spirit of his captive. + +"What!" he exclaimed scornfully; "wouldst thou have me turn traitor to +my own father?" + +"Nay, I would have you turn wise for the sake of your father and +yourself. Think well of what I say, and all I ask of you is to guide me +to a good point of observation. There is a cave, they say, near +Ulfstede, with its mouth to the sea, and a secret entrance from the +land. No doubt I could find it myself with a little trouble, but it +would save time if you were to point it out." + +"Never!" exclaimed Alric sternly. + +"Truly thou art a chip of the old tree," said Hauskuld, taking Alric's +ear between his finger and thumb; "but there are means to take which +have been known to bend stouter hearts than thine. Say, wilt thou show +me the cave?" + +He pinched the ear with gradually increasing force as he spoke, but +Alric neither spoke nor winced, although the blood which rushed to his +face showed that he felt the pain keenly. + +"Well, well," said the berserk, relaxing his grip, "this is a torture +only fit for very small boys after all. Hand me the pincers, Arne." + +One of the men drew in his oar, and from a locker pulled out a pair of +large pincers, which he handed to his chief, who at once applied them to +the fleshy part at the back of Alric's arm, between the elbow and the +shoulder. + +"When thou art willing to do as I bid thee, I will cease to pinch," said +Hauskuld. + +Poor Alric had turned pale at the sight of the pincers, for he knew well +the use they would be put to; but he set his teeth tightly together, and +determined to endure it. As the pain increased the blood rushed again +to his face, but an extra squeeze of the instrument of torture sent it +rushing back with a deadly chill to his heart. In spite of himself, a +sharp cry burst from his lips. Turning suddenly round, he clenched his +right hand, and hit his tormentor on the mouth with such force that his +head was knocked violently against the steering oar, and two or three of +his front teeth were driven out. + +"Thou dog's whelp!" shouted Hauskuld, as soon as he could speak. +"I'll--" + +He could say no more; but, grasping the boy by the hair of the head, he +seized his sword, and would certainly have slain him on the spot, had +not the man named Arne interposed. + +"The King will not thank thee for his slaying," said he, laying his hand +on Hauskuld's arm. + +The latter made no reply except to utter a curse, then, dropping his +sword, he struck Alric a blow on the forehead with his fist, which +knocked him insensible into the bottom of the boat. + +"Yonder is the mouth of the cave," exclaimed one of the men. + +"It may be the one we look for," muttered Hauskuld. "Pull into it." + +So saying, he steered the boat into the cavern, and its keel soon grated +on the gravelly beach inside. The sound aroused Alric, who at first +could not see, owing to the gloom of the place, and the effects of the +blow; but he was brought suddenly to a state of mental activity and +anxiety when he recognised the sides of the well-known cave. Rising +quickly but cautiously, he listened, and knew by the sounds that the +boatmen, of whom there were eight, were searching for an outlet towards +the land. He therefore slipped over the side of the boat, and hastened +towards the darkest side of the cave, but Hauskuld caught sight of him. + +"Ha! is the little dog trying to get away?" he shouted, running after +him. + +The lad formed his plan instantly. "Come on, Hauskuld," he shouted, +with a wild laugh; "I will show thee the outlet, and get out before thee +too." + +He then ran to the inner part of the cave that was farthest from the +secret opening, shouting as he ran, and making as much noise as +possible. The berserk and his men followed. The instant he reached the +extremity of the place Alric became as silent as a mouse, kicked off his +shoes, and ran nimbly round by the intricate turnings of the inner wall, +until he came to the foot of the dark natural staircase, which has been +referred to at the beginning of our tale. Up this he bounded, and +reached the open air above, while his pursuers were still knocking their +shins and heads on the rocks at the wrong end of the cave below. + +Without a moment's pause the exulting boy dashed away towards Ulfstede. +He had not run two hundred yards, however, when he observed three men +standing on the top of the little mound to which the people of Ulfstede +were wont to mount when they wished to obtain an uninterrupted view of +the valley and the fiord. They hailed him at that moment, so he turned +aside, and found, on drawing near, that they were his brother Erling, +Glumm the Gruff, and Kettle Flat-nose. + +"Why, Alric!" exclaimed Erling in surprise, on seeing the boy's swelled +and bloody face, "what ails thee?" + +"Quick, come with me, all of ye! There is work for your swords at hand. +Lend me thy sword, Erling. It is the short one, and the axe will be +enough for thee." + +The excited lad did not wait for permission, but snatched the sword from +his brother's side, and without further explanation, ran back towards +the cliffs, followed closely by the astonished men. He made straight +for the hole that led to the cave, and was about to leap into it when +Hauskuld stepped out and almost received him in his arms. Before the +berserk could plant his feet firmly on the turf, Alric heaved up his +brother's sword and brought it down on Hauskuld's head with right good +will. His arm, however, had not yet received power to cleave through a +steel helmet, but the blow was sufficient to give it such a dint that +its wearer tumbled back into the hole, and went rattling down the steep +descent heels over head into the cave. The boy leaped down after him, +but Hauskuld, although taken by surprise and partially stunned, had +vigour enough left to jump up and run down to the boat. His men, on +hearing the noise of his fall, had also rushed to the boat, and pushed +off. The berserk sprang into the water, and swam after them, just as +his pursuers reached the cave. Seeing this, his men being safe beyond +pursuit, lay on their oars and waited for him. But Hauskuld's career +had been run out. Either the fall had stunned him, or he was seized +with a fit, for he suddenly raised himself in the water, and, uttering a +cry that echoed fearfully in the roof of the cavern, he sank to the +bottom. Still his men waited a minute or two, but seeing that he did +not rise again, they pulled away. + +"It is unlucky that they should have escaped thus," said Alric, "for +they go to tell King Harald what they have seen." + +"Friends," said Erling, "I have a plan in my head to cheat the King. I +shall send Thorer round with my Swan to this cave, and here let it lie, +well armed and provisioned, during the battle that we shall have to +fight with Harald ere long. If ill luck should be ours, those of us who +survive will thus have a chance of escaping with the women." + +"What need is there of that?" said Glumm; "we are sure to give him the +tooth-ache!" + +"We are sure of nothing in this world," replied Erling, "save that the +sun will rise and set and the seasons will come and go. I shall do as I +have said, chiefly for the sake of the women, whom I should not like to +see fall into the hands of King Harald; and I counsel thee to do the +same with thy small ship the Crane. It can well be spared, for we are +like to have a goodly force of men and ships, if I mistake not the +spirit that is abroad." + +"Well, I will do it," said Glumm. + +"And Alric will not object, I dare say, to stand sentinel over the ships +in the cave with two or three men till they are wanted," said Erling. + +"That will not I," cried Alric, who was delighted to be employed in any +service rather than be left at home, for his father, deeming him still +too young, had strictly forbidden him to embark in the fleet. + +"Well then, the sooner this is set about the better," said Erling, "for +there is no counting on the movements of the King." + +"Humph!" ejaculated Glumm. + +"Ill luck to the tyrant!" said Kettle Flatnose, as they turned and left +the cave. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY ONE. + +GLUMM GAINS A GREAT PRIVATE VICTORY--THE DALESMEN ASSEMBLE TO FIGHT FOR +FREEDOM--THE FOE APPEARS, AND THE SIGNAL OF BATTLE IS SOUNDED. + +Again we return to the mound near Ulfstede, the top of which was now +bathed in the rays of the morning sun--for the day had only begun, the +events narrated at the end of the last chapter having occurred within a +period of less than three hours. + +Here stood the fair Hilda and the volatile Ada, the former leaning on +the arm of the latter, and both gazing intently and in silence on the +heart-stirring scene before them. Once again Horlingdal with its fiord +was the scene of an assembly of armed men, but this time the concourse +was grander, because much greater, than on a previous occasion. Men had +learned by recent events that momentous changes were taking place in the +land. The news of the King's acts had been carried far and wide. +Everyone felt that a decisive blow was about to be struck somewhere, and +although many hundreds had little or no opinion of their own as to what +was best for the interests of the kingdom, they knew that a side must be +taken, and were quite willing to take that which appeared to be the +right, or which seemed most likely to win, while a large proportion of +them were intelligently and resolutely opposed to the King's designs. +Thus, when the war-token was sent round, it was answered promptly. +Those who dwelt nearest to the place of rendezvous were soon assembled +in great numbers, and, from the elevated point on which the girls stood, +their glittering masses could be seen on the shore, while they launched +their longships and loaded them with stones--the ammunition of those +days--or passed briskly to and fro with arms and provisions; while all +up the valley, as far as the eye could see, even to the faint blue +distance, in the haze of which the glaciers and clouds and mountain tops +seemed to commingle, troops of armed men could be seen pouring down from +gorge and glen, through wood and furze and fen. On the fiord, too, the +same activity and concentration prevailed, though not quite to the same +extent. Constantly there swept round the promontories to the north and +south, boat after boat, and ship after ship, until the bay close below +Ulfstede was crowded with war-craft of every size--their gay sails, and +in some cases gilded masts and figureheads, glancing in the sunshine, +and their shield-circled gunwales reflected clearly in the sea. + +"What a grand sight!" exclaimed Ada with enthusiasm, as she listened to +the deep-toned hum of the busy multitude below. + +"Would God I had never seen it!" said her companion. + +"Out upon thee, Hilda! I scarce deem thee fit to be a free Norse +maiden. Such a scene would stir the heart of stone." + +"It _does_ stir my heart strangely, sister," replied Hilda, "I scarcely +can explain how. I feel exultation when I see the might of our +district, and the bold bearing of our brave and brisk men; but my heart +sinks again when I think of what is to come--the blood of men flowing +like water, death sweeping them down like grain before the sickle; and +for what? Ada, these go not forth to defend us from our enemies, they +go to war with brothers and kindred--with Norsemen." + +Ada beat her foot impatiently on the sod, and frowned a little as she +said-- + +"I know it well enough, but it is a grand sight for all that, and it +does no good to peep into the future as thou art doing continually." + +"I do not peep," replied Hilda; "the future stares me full in the face." + +"Well, let it stare, sister mine," said Ada, with a laugh, as she +cleared her brow, "and stare past _its_ face at what lies before thee at +present, which is beautiful enough, thou must allow." + +At that moment there seemed to be increasing bustle and energy on the +part of the warriors on the shore, and the murmur of their voices grew +louder. + +"What can that mean, I wonder?" said Ada. + +"Fresh news arrived, perhaps," replied her friend. "The Christians' God +grant that this war may be averted!" + +"Amen, if it be His will," said a deep voice behind the girls, who +turned and found the hermit standing at their side. "But, Hilda," he +continued, "God does not always answer our prayers in the way we +expect--sometimes because we pray for the wrong thing, and sometimes +because we pray that the right thing may come to us in the wrong way. I +like best to end my petitions with the words of my dear Saviour Jesus +Christ--`Thy will be done.' Just now it would seem as if war were +ordained to go on, for a scout has just come in to say that King Harald +with his fleet is on the other side of yonder point, and I am sent to +fetch thee down to a place of safety without delay." + +"Who sent thee?" demanded Ada. + +"Thy foster-father." + +"Methinks we are safe enough here," she said, with a gesture of +impatience. + +"Aye, if we win the day, but not if we lose it," said the old man. + +"Come," said Hilda, "we must obey our father." + +"I have no intention of disobeying him," retorted the other, tossing her +head. + +Just then Alric ran up with a look of anxiety on his swelled and +blood-stained face. + +"Come, girls, ye are in the way here. Haste--ah! here comes Erling--and +Glumm too." + +The two young men ran up the hill as he spoke. + +"Come with us quickly," cried Erling; "we do not wish the King's people +to see anyone on this mound. Let me lead thee down, Hilda." + +He took her by the hand and led her away. Glumm went forward to Ada, +whose old spirit was evidently still alive, for she glanced at the +hermit, and appeared as if inclined to put herself under his protection, +but there was something in Glumm's expression that arrested her. His +gruffness had forsaken him, and he came forward with an unembarrassed +and dignified bearing. "Ada," he said, in a gentle but deliberate +voice, while he gazed into her face so earnestly that she was fain to +drop her eyes, "thou must decide my fate _now_. To-day it is likely I +shall fight my last battle in my fatherland. Death will be abroad on +the fiord, more than willing to be courted by all who choose to woo him. +Say, dear maid, am I to be thy protector or not?" + +Ada hesitated, and clasped her hands tightly together, while the +tell-tale blood rushed to her cheeks. Glumm, ever stupid on these +matters, said no other word, but turned on his heel and strode quickly +away. + +"Stay!" she said. + +She did not say this loudly, but Glumm heard it, turned round, and +strode back again. Ada silently placed her hand in his--it trembled as +she did so--and Glumm led her down the hill. + +The girls were escorted by their lovers only as far as Ulfstede. With +all the other women of the place, and the old people, they were put +under the care of the hermit, who conveyed them safely to Haldorstede, +there to await the issue of the day. + +Meanwhile, Haldor, Erling, Glumm, Hakon of Drontheim, Ulf, Guttorm +Stoutheart, and all the other Sea-kings, not only of Horlingdal, but of +the surrounding valleys, with a host of smaller bonders, unfreemen, and +thralls, went down to the shores of the bay and prepared for battle. + +It is needless to say that all were armed to the teeth--with coats of +mail and shirts of wolf-skin; swords and battle-axes, bows and arrows, +halberds and spears, "morning stars" and bills, scythes, javelins, +iron-shod poles--and many other weapons. + +The principal ships of the fleet were of course those belonging to +Haldor, Ulf, and the wealthier men of the district. Some of these were +very large--having thirty benches of rowers, and being capable of +carrying above a hundred and fifty men. All of them were more or less +decorated, and a stately brilliant spectacle they presented, with their +quaint towering figureheads, their high poops, shield-hung sides, and +numerous oars. Many proud thoughts doubtless filled the hearts of these +Sea-kings as they looked at their ships and men, and silently wended +their way down to the strand. In the case of Haldor and Erling, +however, if not of others, such thoughts were tempered with the feeling +that momentous issues hung on the fate of the day. + +Well was it for all concerned that the men who led them that day were so +full of forethought and energy, for scarcely had they completed their +preparations and embarked their forces when the ships of Harald Fairhair +swept round the northern promontory. + +If the fleet of the small kings of Horlingdal and the south was +imposing, that of the King of Norway was still more so. Besides, being +stronger in numbers, and many of the warships being larger--his own huge +vessel, the Dragon, led the van, appearing like a gorgeous and gigantic +sea-monster. + +The King was very proud of this longship. It had recently been built by +him, and was one of the largest that had ever been seen in Norway. The +exact dimensions of it are not now known, but we know that it had +thirty-two banks for rowers, from which we may infer that it must have +been of nearly the same size with the Long Serpent, a war vessel of +thirty-four banks, which was built about the end of the tenth century, +and some of the dimensions of which are given in the Saga of Olaf +Tryggvesson. The length of her keel that rested on the grass, we are +told, was about 111 feet, which is not far short of the length of the +keel of one of our forty-two gun frigates. As these warships were long +in proportion to their breadth, like our modern steamers, this speaks to +a size approaching 400 tons burden. As we have said, the Dragon was a +gorgeous vessel. It had a high poop and forecastle, a low waist, or +middle part, and a splendidly gilt and painted stern, figurehead, and +tail. The sides, which were, as usual, hung round with the red and +white painted shields of the crew, were pierced for sixty-four oars, +that is, thirty-two on each side, being two oars to each bank or bench, +and as there were three men to each oar, this gave a total crew of 192 +men; but in truth the vessel contained, including steersmen and +supernumeraries, above 200 men. Under the feet of the rowers, in the +waist, were chests of arms, piles of stones to be used as missiles, +provisions, clothing, goods, and stores, all of which were protected by +a deck of movable hatches. On this deck the crew slept at nights, +sheltered by an awning or sail, when it was not convenient for them to +land and sleep on the beach in their tents, with which all the vessels +of the Norsemen were usually supplied. There was but one great mast, +forty feet high, and one enormous square sail to this ship. The mast +was tipped with gilding, and the sail was of alternate strips of red, +white, and blue cloth. Each space between the banks served as the berth +of six or eight men, and was divided into half berths--starboard and +larboard--for the men who worked the corresponding oars. On the richly +ornamented poop stood the King himself, surrounded by his bodyguard and +chief men of the Court, including Jarl Rongvold and Thiodolph the scald. +From the stem to the mid-hold was the forecastle, on which were +stationed the King's berserkers, under Hake of Hadeland. All the men of +Hake's band were splendid fellows; for King Harald, having a choice of +men from the best of every district, took into his house troop only such +as were remarkable for strength, courage, and dexterity in the use of +their weapons. + +It must not be supposed that the rest of Harald's fleet was composed of +small vessels. On the contrary, some of them were not far short of his +own in point of size. Many of his jarls were wealthy men, and had +joined him, some with ten or twenty, and others with thirty, or even +forty, ships of various sizes. Many of them had from twenty to thirty +banks for rowers, with crews of 100 or 150 men. There were also great +numbers of cutters with ten or fifteen banks, and from thirty to fifty +men in each, besides a swarm of lesser craft, about the size of our +ordinary herring boats. + +There were many men of note in this fleet, such as King Sigurd of Royer +and Simun's sons; Onund and Andreas; Nicolas Skialdvarsson; Eindrid, a +son of Mornef, who was the most gallant and popular man in the Drontheim +country, and many others; the whole composing a formidable force of +seven or eight thousand warriors. + +With Haldor the Fierce, on the other hand, there was a goodly force of +men and ships; for the whole south country had been aroused, and they +came pouring into the fiord continuously. Nevertheless they did not +number nearly so large a force as that under King Harald. Besides those +who have been already named, there were Eric, king of Hordaland; Sulke, +king of Rogaland, and his brother Jarl Sote; Kiotve the Rich, king of +Agder, and his son Thor Haklang; also the brothers Roald Ryg, and Hadd +the Hard, of Thelemark, besides many others. But their whole number did +not exceed four thousand men; and the worst of it all was that among +these there were a great many of the smaller men, and a few of the +chiefs whose hearts were not very enthusiastic in the cause, and who had +no very strong objection to take service under Harald Fairhair. These, +however, held their peace, because the greater men among them, and the +chief leaders, such as Haldor and Ulf, were very stern and decided in +their determination to resist the King. + +Now, when the report was brought that Harald's fleet had doubled the +distant cape beyond Hafurdsfiord, the people crowded to the top of the +cliffs behind Ulfstede to watch it; and when it was clearly seen that it +was so much larger than their own, there were a few who began to say +that it would be wiser to refrain from resistance; but Haldor called a +Thing together on the spot by sound of horn, and a great many short +pithy speeches were made on both sides of the question. Those who were +for war were by far the most able men, and so full of fire that they +infused much of their own spirit into those who heard them. Erling in +particular was very energetic in his denunciation of the illegality of +Harald's proceedings; and even Glumm plucked up heart to leap to his +feet and declare, with a face blazing with wrath, that he would rather +be drowned in the fiord like a dog, or quit his native land for ever, +than remain at home to be the slave of any man! + +Glumm was not, as the reader is aware, famed for eloquence; nevertheless +the abruptness of his fiery spirit, the quick rush of his few sputtered +words, and the clatter of his arms, as he struck his fist violently +against his shield, drew from the multitude a loud burst of applause. +He had in him a good deal of that element which we moderns call "go". +Whatever he did was effectively done. + +The last who spoke was Solve Klofe. That redoubtable warrior ascended +the hill just as Glumm had finished his remarks. He immediately stood +forward, and raised his hand with an impassioned gesture. "Glumm is +right," he cried. "It is now clear that we have but one course to take; +and that is to rise all as one man against King Harald, for although +outnumbered, we still have strength enough to fight for our ancient +rights. Fate must decide the victory. If we cannot conquer, at all +events we can die. As to becoming his servants, that is no condition +for _us_! My father thought it better to fall in battle than to go +willingly into King Harald's service, or refuse to abide the chance of +weapons like the Numedal kings." + +"That is well spoken," cried Haldor, after the shout with which this was +received had subsided. "The Thing is at an end, and now we shall make +ready, for it can be but a short time until we meet. Let the people +take their weapons, and every man be at his post, so that all may be +ready when the war-horn sounds the signal to cast off from the land. +[See note 1.] Then let us throw off at once, and together, so that none +go on before the rest of the ships, and none lag behind when we row out +of the fiord. When we meet, and the battle begins, let people be on the +alert to bring all our ships in close order, and ready to bind them +together. Let us spare ourselves in the beginning, and take care of our +weapons, that we do not cast them into the sea, or shoot them away in +the air to no purpose. But when the fight becomes hot, and the ships +are bound together, _then_ let each man show what spirit is in him, and +how well he can fight for country, law, and freedom!" + +A loud ringing cheer was the answer to this speech, and then the whole +concourse hurried down the hill and embarked; the vessels were quickly +arranged in order according to their size; the war-horn sounded; +thousands of oars dipped at the same moment, the blue waters of the +fiord were torn into milky foam, and slowly, steadily, and in good order +the fleet of the Sea-kings left the strand, doubled the cape to the +north of Horlingfiord, and advanced in battle array to meet the foe. + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +Note 1. Signals by call of trumpet were well understood in those times. +We read, in the ancient Sagas, of the trumpet-call to arm, to advance, +to attack, to retreat, to land, and also to attend a Court Thing, a +House Thing, a General Thing. These instruments were made of metal, and +there were regular trumpeters. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY TWO. + +DESCRIBES A GREAT SEA FIGHT AND ITS CONSEQUENCES. + +Harald Fairhair stood on the poop of the great Dragon, and held the +steering oar. When he saw the fleet of the Sea-kings approaching, he +called Jarl Rongvold to him and said-- + +"Methinks, jarl, that I now see the end of this war with the small +kings. It is easy to perceive that the utmost force they are able to +raise is here. Now, I intend to beat them to-day, and break their +strength for ever. But when the battle is over, many of them will seek +to escape. I would prevent that as much as may be." + +The King paused, as if engaged in deep thought. + +"How do you propose to do it, sire?" + +"By means of a boom," said the King. "Go thou, summon hither the +trustiest man in the fleet for such a purpose, let him detach as many +men and ships as he deems needful, and go into yonder small fiord where +there is a pine wood on the hillside. There let him make a long and +strong boom of timber, while we are engaged in the fight. I will drive +as many of the ships as I can into Horlingfiord, and when that is done +let him come out and stretch the boom right across, so that none of them +shall escape. And, harkee, see that the man thou choosest for this duty +is an able man, and does it well, else shall his head be lopped off." + +After issuing this command the King resigned the helm, and ordered his +banner to be set up, which was done immediately. At the same time his +opponents shook out their banners, and both fleets were put in order of +battle. + +As both were arrayed much in the same way, it will be sufficient to +describe the arrangements made by Haldor the Fierce, who had been +elected commander-in-chief of the small kings' fleet. + +When Haldor saw the King's banner displayed, he unfurled his own in the +centre of the fleet, and arranged his force for attack right against it. +Alongside of him on the right was Ulf of Romsdal with thirty ships, and +on his left was old Guttorm Stoutheart with twenty-five ships. These +composed the centre of the line. Kettle Flatnose commanded the men on +the forecastle in Ulf's longship, and Thorer the Thick was over those in +Haldor's vessel. + +The right wing was commanded by Solve Klofe, under whom were Eric of +Hordaland with fifteen ships; Sulke of Rogaland and his brother Sote +with thirty ships, as well as Kiotve of Agder, and some others with many +ships--all of large size. + +The left wing was led by King Hakon of Drontheim, under whom were Roald +Ryg and Hadd the Hard, and Thor Haklang, with a good many ships. Solve +Klofe laid his ships against King Harald's left wing, which was under +Eindrid, son of Mornef, and Hakon laid his against King Sigurd of Royer, +who led Harald's right wing. All the chiefs on either side laid their +ships according as they were bold or well equipped. When all was ready, +they bound the ships together by the stems, and advanced towards each +other at the sound of the war-trumpet. But as the fleets were so large, +many of the smaller vessels remained loose, and, as it were, went about +skirmishing independently. These were laid forward in the fight, +according to the courage of their commanders, which was very unequal. + +Among these roving warriors were our heroes Erling and Glumm, each in +one of his own small cutters, with about forty men. + +As soon as the war-blast sounded the men rode forward to the attack, and +soon narrowed the small space that lay between the hostile fleets. Then +Haldor and the other commanders went down to the sides of their ships, +where the men stood so thick that their shields touched all round, and +encouraged them to fight well for the freedom of old Norway--to which +they replied with loud huzzas. Immediately after the air was darkened +with a cloud of arrows, and the fight began. + +There were scalds in both fleets at that fight, these afterwards wrote a +poem descriptive of it, part of which we now quote: + + "With falcon eye and courage bright, + Haldor the Fierce prepared for fight; + `Hand up the arms to one and all!' + He cries. `My men, we'll win or fall! + Sooner than fly, heaped on each other, + Each man will fall across his brother!' + Thus spake, and through his vessels' throng + His mighty warship moved along. + He ran her gaily to the front, + To meet the coming battle's brunt-- + Then gave the word the ships to bind + And shake his banner to the wind. + Our oars were stowed, our lances high + Swung to and fro athwart the sky. + Haldor the Fierce went through the ranks, + Drawn up beside the rowers' banks, + Where rows of shields seemed to enclose + The ship's deck from the boarding foes, + Encouraging his chosen crew, + He tells his brave lads to stand true, + And rows against--while arrows sing-- + The Dragon of the tyrant King. + With glowing hearts and loud huzzas, + His men lay on in freedom's cause. + The sea-steeds foam; they plunge and rock: + The warriors meet in battle shock; + The ring-linked coats of strongest mail + Could not withstand the iron hail. + The fire of battle raged around; + Odin's steel shirts flew all unbound. + The pelting shower of stone and steel, + Caused many a Norseman stout to reel, + The red blood poured like summer rain; + The foam was scarlet on the main; + But, all unmoved like oak in wood, + Silent and grim fierce Haldor stood, + Until his axe could reach the foe-- + Then--swift he thundered blow on blow. + And ever, as his axe came down, + It cleft or crushed another crown. + Elsewhere the chiefs on either side + Fought gallantly above the tide. + King Hakon pressed King Sigurd sore, + And Ulf made Hake the berserk roar, + And Kettle Flatnose dared to spring + On board the ship of Norway's King. + Old Guttorm Stoutheart's mighty shout + Above the din was heard throughout, + And Solve Klofe, 'gainst Mornef's son, + Slew right and left till day was done. + While, all around the loose ships rowed-- + Where'er they went the red stream flowed. + Chief among these was Erling bold + And Glumm the Gruff, of whom 'tis told + They rushed in thickest of the fray-- + Whatever part the line gave way-- + And twice, and thrice, retrieved the day. + But heart, and strength, and courage true, + Could not avail where one fought two. + King Harald, foremost in the fight, + With flashing sword, resistless might, + Pushed on and slew, and dyed with red + The bright steel cap on many a head. + Against the hero's shield in vain, + The arrow-storm sends forth its rain. + The javelins and spear-thrusts fail + To pierce his coat of ringed mail. + The King stands on the blood-stained deck; + Trampling on many a foeman's neck; + And high above the dinning stound + Of helm and axe, and ringing sound + Of blade, and shield, and raven's cry + Is heard the shout of--`Victory!'" + +In this poem the scald gives only an outline of the great fight. Let us +follow more closely the action of those in whom we are peculiarly +interested. + +For more than two hours the battle raged with unabated fury--victory +inclining to neither side; but as the day advanced, the energy with +which Solve Klofe pushed the right wing began to tell, and the King's +men gave way a little at that part. Harald, however, was on the alert. +He sent some of his loose ships to reinforce them, and so regained his +position. A short time after that, some of Solve's ships were boarded, +but at that moment Erling and Glumm chanced to pass in their cutters-- +for they kept always close together--and they gave such a shout, while +they turned and pulled to the rescue, that the men, who were wavering, +took heart again and drove the foe overboard. Just then the ship on the +right of Solve Klofe's vessel was also boarded by the enemy. Seeing +this, Erling called to Glumm that there was need of succour there, and +they rowed swiftly to the spot. + +"Art thou hard pressed, Solve?" asked Erling, as he ranged up to the +stern of his friend's ship. + +Solve was so furious that he could not answer, but pointed to the ship +next his, and sprang on the edge of his own, intending to leap into that +of the enemy, and get to the forefront. At the same time Eindrid, son +of Mornef, stood up on the high foredeck of his ship with a large stone +in his hand. He was a very powerful man, and hurled the stone with such +force against Solve's shield that it battered him down, and he fell back +into his own ship much stunned. Seeing this, Erling bade two of his men +follow him, leaped into Solve's ship, and thence into the one where the +fight was sharpest. Glumm followed him closely with his long two-handed +sword, and these two fought so dreadfully that Eindrid's men were driven +back into their own ship again. Then Erling ran to the place where the +high stern was wedged between two of the enemy's ships, and sprang on +the forecastle of Eindrid's ship. + +"Thou art a bold man!" said Eindrid, turning on him. + +"That may be as thou sayest," replied Erling, at the same time catching +a thrust on his shield, which he returned with such interest with his +axe that Eindrid's head was nearly severed from his body. At the same +moment Glumm cut down a famous berserk who ran at him, and in a few +minutes they had cleared the deck of the ship, and taken possession of +it. But this was scarcely accomplished when a cry arose that the left +wing under King Hakon was giving way. + +At once Erling and Glumm ran back to their cutters, and made towards +that part of the line, followed by several of the loose ships. Here +they found that King Hakon was very hard pressed by Sigurd of Royer, so +they pushed in among the ships, and soon Erling's well-known war-cry was +heard, and his tall form was seen sweeping men down before him with his +great axe, like a mower cutting grass. Glumm, however, did not keep +close to him this time, but made direct for Hakon's ship, for he +remembered that he was Ada's father, and thought he might do him some +service. + +As he was coming near he saw Swankie, a famous berserk, fighting +furiously on board Hakon's ship, and roaring, as was the wont of +berserkers sometimes, like a wild bull. Hakon's men had formed a +shield-circle round their chief, and were defending him bravely; but the +berserk was an uncommonly stout man, very brisk and active, and +exceedingly furious, as well as dexterous with his weapons. He slew so +many men that the shield-circle was broken, and he made at Hakon just as +Glumm leaped into the ship at the stern. King Hakon was a stout man and +brave, but he was getting old, and not so active as he used to be. +Nevertheless he met Swankie like a man, and dealt him a blow on his +helmet which made him stagger. The berserk uttered a fearful roar, and +struck at Hakon so fiercely that he split the upper part of his shield +and cut open his helmet. Hakon fell, but before he could repeat the +blow Glumm was upon him. + +"What! is it thou, Swankie?" he cried. "Dog, methought I had killed +thee long ago!" + +"That is yet to be done," cried the berserk, leaping upon Glumm with a +sweeping blow of his sword. Glumm stooped quickly, and the blow passed +over his head; then he fetched a sudden cut at Swankie, and split him +down from the neck to the waist, saying, "It is done now, methinks," as +he drew out his sword. Glumm did not go forward, but let his men drive +back the foe, while he turned and kneeled beside Hakon. + +"Has the dog hurt thee badly?" he asked, raising the old warrior's head +on his knee, and speaking in a voice of almost womanly tenderness. + +Hakon made an effort to speak, but for some time was unable to do so, +and Glumm held his shield over him to keep off the stones and arrows +which fell thickly around them. After a few moments Hakon wiped away +the blood which flowed from a deep wound in his forehead, and looked up +wildly in Glumm's face. He tried again to speak, and Glumm, +misunderstanding the few words he muttered, said: "Thou art already +avenged, King Hakon; Swankie the berserk is dead." + +The dying man made another effort to speak, and was successful. + +"That concerns me little, Glumm. Thou lovest Ada, I know. This ring-- +take it to her, say her father's last thoughts were of her. Be a good +husband, Glumm. The brooch--see." + +"Which?" asked Glumm, looking at several silver brooches with which the +old warrior's armour was fastened--"this one on thy breast?" + +"Aye, take it--it was--her mother's." + +The warrior's spirit seemed to be relieved when he had said this. He +sank down into a state resembling sleep. Once or twice afterwards he +opened his eyes and gazed up into the bright sky with a doubtful yet +earnest and enquiring gaze. Gradually the breathing became fainter, +until it ceased altogether, and Glumm saw that the old man was dead. + +Fastening the brooch on his own broad chest, and putting the ring on his +finger, Glumm rose, seized his sword, and rushed again into the thick of +the fight with tenfold more fury than he had yet displayed, and ere long +the danger that threatened the left wing was for the time averted. + +Meanwhile in the centre there was an equally uncertain and obstinate +conflict--for the chiefs on either side were mighty men of valour. +Wherever Old Guttorm's voice was heard, there victory inclined. Haldor, +on the other hand, did not shout, but he laid about him with such wild +ferocity that many men quailed at the very sight of him, and wherever he +went he was victorious. It was some time before he managed to get +alongside of King Harald Fairhair's ship, but when he did so the fight +became sharp in the extreme. + +All the men in King Harald's ship, except the berserks, were clad in +coats of ring mail, and wore foreign helmets, and most of them had white +shields. Besides, as has been said, each man was celebrated for +personal strength and daring, so that none of those who were opposed to +them could make head against them. The arrows and spears fell harmless +from their shields, casques, and coats of mail, and it was only now and +then--as when a shaft happened to enter a man's eye--that any fell. +When Haldor's forecastle men attacked the berserkers on the high fore +deck of the Dragon, the fighting was terrible, for the berserkers all +roared aloud and fought with the wild fury of madmen, and so fierce was +their onslaught that Haldor's men were forced at first to give back. +But Thorer the Thick guarded himself warily, and being well armed +escaped injury for a time. When he saw the berserkers beginning to +flag, he leaped forward like a lion, and hewed them down right and left, +so that his men drove the enemy back into the Dragon. Some of them +slipped on the gun-wales, and so did some of Haldor's men, all of whom +fell into the sea, and a few of them were drowned, while others were +killed, but one or two escaped by swimming. + +Ulf's ship was also pretty close to the Dragon, and he wished greatly to +board it, but was so hard beset by the ship of Nicolas Skialdvarsson +that he could not do so for a long time. Here Kettle Flatnose did +prodigies of valour. He stood on the high fore-deck with his favourite +weapon, the hook, and therewith pulled a great number of men off the +enemy's deck into the sea. At last he got a footing on their gunwale, +dropped his hook, drew his sword, and soon cleared his way aft. Ulf +leaped after him, drove the men into the waist, and then the most of +them were slain, and lay in heaps one upon another. After that it was +not difficult to clear the poop. Skialdvarsson defended it well, but he +could not stand before Ulf, who finally cut off his head, and so the +ship was won. + +This vessel lay alongside that of King Harald; and although the King was +fully engaged with Haldor at the time, he observed the conquest of +Skialdvarsson by Ulf, and also perceived that Ulf's men were crowding +the side of the vessel, and throwing grappling-irons into his own ship +with a view to board it; for there was a space between the ships a +little too wide for men to leap. Springing to the side, the King cut +the grappling-irons with a sweep of his sword. + +"That was well tried," he said. + +"It shall be tried again," cried Ulf, heaving another iron, which nearly +struck the King, but Harald's sword flashed through the air, and again +the iron was cut. + +At that moment Kettle Flatnose stepped back a few paces, and with a +mighty rush leaped right over the space in all his war gear, and +alighted on the Dragon's deck within a yard of the King. It was a +tremendous leap, and so nearly beyond the compass of Kettle's powers +that he was scarcely able to retain his foothold, but stood for a moment +on the edge of the vessel with shield and sword upheaved, as he +staggered to regain his balance. Thus exposed, he might have easily +been slain; but the King, instead of using his sword, stepped forward, +and with his left hand pushed the Irishman overboard. The cheer which +greeted his daring leap had scarcely ceased to ring when he fell heavily +into the sea. + +"A goodly man, and a bold attempt," said the King, with a smile, as he +turned to Jarl Rongvold. "'Twould have been a pity to slay him +outright. If he can swim he may yet live to fight another battle." + +"True, sire," replied the jarl, who was looking over the side at the +place where Kettle fell; "but methinks he has struck his head on an oar, +and will never succeed in swimming towards a friendly hand." + +This indeed seemed to be true; for Kettle lay with his arm over an oar, +and his head hanging down in the water, like a dead man. Yet there was +life in him, for his fingers moved. Ulf had witnessed all this, and was +on the point of attempting to leap across to Harald's ship when Kettle +fell. He paused, and, seeing that his comrade was apparently being +drowned, at once dropped sword and shield, and sprang into the sea after +him. + +At that moment a number of the King's boldest and best armed men +observed that the two ships had drawn a little nearer to each other. In +a moment they leaped across the intervening space, took their opponents +by surprise, and quickly regained the ship. + +While this had been going on at the poop, the fight on the forecastle +had raged with extreme fury, for Haldor the Fierce had gained a footing +on the Dragon's deck, and was engaged in mortal combat with Hake the +berserk, whom he was slowly but surely driving back. His son Erling the +Bold, who observed what was going on, had run his cutter along the stern +of his father's ship, and was hastening to his aid, when King Harald +became aware that his men were giving way, and rushed to their support. +He went forward raging with anger, and as he ran he picked up a huge +stone, which he hurled before him. Haldor was at the moment in the act +of fetching a deadly cut at Hake, whom he had disarmed. The stone +struck him full in the chest, and he fell backward just as Erling +reached his side. + +A great cheer arose at this time on the right; for there the wing of the +Southland men was broken, and everywhere King Harald's men were +victorious. + +"Hold thou them in check, Glumm," cried Erling to his friend, as he +quickly raised his father in his arms and bore him away to his cutter. + +Glumm, who had followed his friend like his shadow, sprang forward and +engaged Hake, who had recovered his sword, and who found this new enemy +little, if at all, less formidable than the other. + +Erling placed his father carefully in the cutter. + +"Here, Thorer," he said, "do thou guard my father, and hold thyself and +the carles in readiness to push off. The day is lost, I see. I go to +slay the King, and will return presently." + +He leaped away as he spoke, and regained the foredeck of the Dragon, +where Glumm and his men were still engaged with the berserkers, just as +the King came to the front. The instant he saw Erling he leaped upon +him with a fierce shout, and shook back his shaggy flaxen locks as a +lion might shake his mane. Erling was not a whit behind him in anxiety +to meet. He sprang upon him with a crashing blow of his great pole-axe, +which rang loudly on the King's shield, but did him no hurt. They were +a well-matched pair. Harald was fully as stout, though not quite so +tall as his opponent, whose fine silky hair was almost as bushy as that +of the King, though neither so long nor so tangled. + +Men drew back and stood aside when they heard the shock and shout of +their onset, and suspended the fight around them, while they gazed on in +silent awe. For a time it seemed doubtful which was the better man; for +the King's blade whirled incessantly around his head like flashing +light, and rang on Erling's shield, which was ever upraised to meet it. +At the same time the axe of our hero, if not so swift in its gyrations, +was more tremendous in its action; more than once the King was seen to +stagger beneath its thundering blows, and once he was beaten down on one +knee. How long this might have lasted it is impossible to tell; but, +seeing that the King was likely to get the worst of it, one of his men +crept round by the outside of the ship, and coming suddenly up behind +Erling, put out his hand and caught him by the leg, causing him to +stagger backwards, so that he fell overboard. In falling our hero +caught the man by the throat, and both fell into the sea together. + +It was seen that Erling dived with his foe and dragged him down as if to +force him to perish along with him, and everyone looked for a few +moments at the water, expecting to see them rise. Glumm gazed among the +rest; and he had leaped down into Haldor's ship to be ready to lend a +hand. But Erling did not rise again. Seeing this, Glumm sprang up with +sudden fury and dashed at the enemy, but by this time they had recovered +from their surprise, and now poured into the ship in such overwhelming +numbers that the men were driven back and slain, or they leaped +overboard and trusted to escape by swimming. + +Meanwhile Erling the Bold having choked off his antagonist, dived under +his father's ship and came up at the stern of his own cutter, into which +he speedily clambered by means of a rope which hung over the side. He +found that his father was seated on the poop with his head resting on +the gunwale, recovering consciousness slowly, and Thorer was engaged in +the difficult task of preventing the men from leaving the vessel to +succour their comrades. + +"Keep back, men," cried Erling in a voice which none dared to disobey. +"Stay where ye are and get out the oars.--Come, Thorer, follow me with a +stout man, and keep them back while I rescue Glumm." + +He jumped into Haldor's ship, and ran to the fore part of the poop, +where Glumm was fighting against overwhelming odds, with the blind +desperation of a man who has resolved to sell his life as dearly as he +can. Thorer and a tall stout man followed him, and instantly assailed +King Harald's men with such fury that they gave back a little. At the +same moment Erling seized Glumm by the neck; almost strangled him; +dragged him violently to the stern, and half sprang, half tumbled with +him into the cutter, where, despite his frantic struggles to rise, he +held him down. + +"Now, my brisk lads," shouted Erling, who was gasping by this time, +"come back and jump in! Push off an ell or so. Steady!" + +Thorer and the other man heard the shout, and, turning at once, ran to +the stern and leaped into the cutter, which was instantly thrust off, so +that one or two of their opponents who ventured to jump after them were +left floundering in the sea. + +By this time King Harald's victory was complete. Both wings had been +beaten for some time, and now the centre had given way--only one or two +of the more desperate leaders were still keeping up the fight. + +As Erling rowed towards the shore he could see that all the loose +vessels of the fleet were flying up the fiord, pursued by a few of the +loose vessels of the enemy. But the greater part of both fleets being +tied together, could take no part in the chase until they were cut +asunder. + +"The day is lost, father," said Erling, as he stood by the steering oar. + +"I know it, my son," replied Haldor, who was now able to sit up and look +about him; "Norway is henceforth enthralled." + +He said this in a tone of such deep sadness that Erling forbore to +continue the subject. + +"They are cutting asunder the fleet," observed Glumm, who had recovered +self-possession, and stood looking back at the scene of the recent +conflict; "surely some of them are trying to escape." + +As he spoke, one of the large vessels shot out from among the others, +and rowed rapidly away. There was desperate fighting on board of it for +a few minutes, and then a number of men were pushed or thrown overboard, +and a loud cheer of victory arose. + +"Well done, Solve Klofe!" cried Erling with enthusiasm. "That is his +shout. I should know it among a thousand. He at least is bent on being +free!" + +Several of Harald's ships, which had been also cut loose, immediately +gave chase, but Solve's men pulled so well that they soon left them +behind, and hoisting their sail to a light breeze which was blowing just +off the mouth of the fiord, soon doubled the point and bore away to the +south. + +"Is that someone swimming in the water?" asked Erling, pointing as he +spoke to an object which moved forward among the debris of oars, +portions of clothing, and wreck, which was floating about everywhere. + +One of the men at the bow oar stood up, and after a short glance, said +that he thought it was a man. + +"Look out on the starboard bow. Mind your oars and be ready, someone, +to lean over the waist and catch hold of him." + +As he spoke, the cutter ranged up to the object, which appeared to be +the dishevelled and blood-bespattered head of a man. He suddenly gave +vent to a wild shout--"Come on, thou tyrant! Down with ye, dog--huzza!" +At the last shout a pair of arms were swung wildly in the air, and the +next moment the man's voice was stifled in the water as he sank, while +another head appeared beside him. + +"That is the voice of Kettle Flatnose, or his wraith," exclaimed Erling; +"pull gently, lads; hold water." + +"Why, Ulf, is it thou?" + +"Truly," exclaimed Ulf, grasping the extended hand of Glumm, "I don't +feel quite sure! Haul gently, Glumm. I've got Kettle here. Another +hand or two. Now then, heave together!" + +Several stout men leaned over the side, and, acting in accordance with +these instructions, hauled Ulf and Kettle out of the sea; the former in +a state of great exhaustion, the latter almost dead, for his last dip +had well-nigh choked him. + +"It has been a long swim," said Ulf, sitting down and leaning languidly +against the bulwarks, while Glumm and Haldor proceeded to chafe the +Irishman into a state of consciousness. "Once or twice I sank under +him, for he was very wild when he came to himself, after I got hold of +him, and struggled to be up and fight the King; but I held him fast. +Yet methought once or twice," added Ulf, with a smile, "that I had at +last got into Valhalla." + +A horn of ale refreshed Ulf, and another of the same was shortly after +given to Kettle, by which his wandering faculties were soon restored. + +By this time they were drawing near the bay at Ulfstede, and Erling +urged on the rowers, for they could see that Harald's ships were now +cast loose, and giving chase to those that endeavoured to escape, while +several of the largest, including the Dragon, made direct for the land. + +"Our whole effort now," said Haldor, "must be to rescue the women." + +"That will not be easy," observed Ulf gloomily. + +"But it is not impossible," said Erling with decision. "We shall have +time to get into the woods, and so round to the cave. By the way, does +anyone know aught of Hakon of Drontheim?" + +"He is dead," said Glumm. + +"Dead!" + +At that moment Haldor started up with a wild exclamation, and pointed +towards the spot on which his own dwelling stood, where, above the +trees, there arose a cloud of dense black smoke. The truth was soon all +too plain, for, on rounding the point which had hitherto concealed the +bay from their view, several of the enemy's largest ships were seen with +their bows on the shore. It was evident that part of the left wing of +the enemy, which was first victorious, had, unobserved by them, made for +the shore, and landed a large force of men, who had hastened to +Ulfstede, and, finding it deserted, had pushed on to Haldorstede, which +they had set on fire. + +"Now indeed would death be welcome!" cried Haldor, stamping fiercely on +the deck, while every feature of his face blazed with wrath. + +We need scarcely say that the hearts of all had sunk within them, but +Erling said--"Death would be unwelcome yet, father. The men, no doubt, +are killed, but be sure they will not hurt the women while King Harald +is on his way to the stede. We may yet die in defending them, if we +cannot save them." + +"True, my son," said Haldor, clasping his hands, and looking upwards +with a solemnity of expression that was in strong contrast with his +recent burst of passion; "we may perchance save them, as thou sayest; +but woe is me for poor Alric!" + +"Alric is safe, I am certain," said Erling energetically, as he turned a +meaning glance on Glumm. + +"How knowest thou that?" asked Haldor. + +Erling hesitated to reply, not wishing to raise hopes that after all +might prove to be fallacious. + +Before the question could be repeated the cutter's keel grated on the +sand of a small bay which was close to the large one, and concealed from +it by a small rocky islet. Here they all jumped ashore--all except +Kettle Flatnose, who, on attempting to rise, found himself so weak that +he fell down again, and nearly fainted. + +"This is bad," said Erling. "But come, we have no time to waste. Give +me the chief command of our men, father; I have a plan in my head." + +"Do as thou wilt," said Haldor, with a strange mixture of despair, +resignation, and ferocity in his tone. + +"Come then, form up, men, and follow me!" + +So saying, Erling lifted Kettle in his arms, and hurried away with him +as if he had been no heavier than a little boy! He led the way to the +secret entrance to the cave, where, true as steel to his trust, little +Alric was found with a few men guarding the two warships of Erling and +Glumm. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY THREE. + +THE END OF AN OLD SEA-KING. + +Haldor the Fierce said nothing when he heard Alric's blithe voice in the +cavern, but he caught him up in his arms, and gave him a hug that almost +made him cry out. + +"Why, father, what ails thee?" asked the boy in surprise, when Haldor +set him free. + +"Never mind, lad," interposed Erling, "but lend a hand to keep Kettle in +order. He is a little wild just now, and as I intend to leave him in +thy charge we must restrain him a bit. Hand me that rope." + +The boy obeyed in silence, but with much wonder depicted on his face +while Erling lashed Kettle's hands together, and, lifting him in a +half-unconscious state into his ship, bound him in as comfortable a +position as he could, to one of the rowers' banks. + +"Now, Alric, come aside with me, quick! I have only time for a few +words. It is enough to tell thee that the day is lost. I go with our +father and the men to save our mother and the other women, or to die. +Thou wilt stay here with a few men to guard the ships, and be ready to +cast off at a moment's notice. If we return not before night, do thou +creep out and try to ascertain what has become of us, and if ye have +reason to think we are killed, cut Kettle's bonds and let him do what he +will, poor fellow. At present his head has got a knock that renders him +a dangerous comrade, so he must remain tied. Of course, if the cave is +attacked thou wilt set him free at once. There is a little boat at the +stern of my Swan. Escape if thou canst. But be watchful. We may +return in a few hours. If so, all shall yet be well. Dost understand +me, boy?" + +"I do, but methinks ill luck awaits us." + +Erling made no reply, but, kissing Alric's forehead, he returned to his +men, of whom there were about sixty, and led them out of the cave, +leaving six with his little brother to guard the ships. + +While our hero is thus hastening to the rescue, let us turn aside for a +little to follow the course of Guttorm Stoutheart. That brave old +Sea-king had escaped scathless throughout the whole of the disastrous +day until near the end, when he received his death-wound from a javelin +which pierced his thigh, and cut some important blood vessel, to stanch +which defied the skill of his attendants. He immediately ordered his +ship to be cut loose, and his was among the first to escape round the +southern point of the fiord, just before the battle ended. + +At first the men pulled as if their lives depended on it. So great was +their haste that they did not take time to throw their dead comrades +overboard, but left them lying in a ghastly heap on the lower deck. +When, however, they got round the next point, and found that no pursuit +was made, they slackened speed and began to heave out the dead, when +Guttorm, who reclined near the helm, steering the vessel, ordered them +to desist. + +"My men," said he, in a voice which had already lost much of its deep +richness of tone, "we will land on the next point. My days are run out. +I go to Odin's halls, and I am glad, for it becomes not an old warrior +to die in his bed, which I had begun to fear was going to be my fate; +besides, now that Norway is to be no longer a free land, it is time that +the small kings should be going home. Ye will carry me to the top of +yonder headland cliff, and leave me where I can see the setting sun, and +the fords and fells of my native land. Would that my bones might have +been burned, as those of my fathers were! but this may not be. Ye can +lay beside me the comrades who have gone before, and then push off and +leave me with the dead." + +There was a low murmur among the men as they again dipped their oars, +but not a word was spoken in reply. Just as they reached the point a +vessel came in sight behind them under sail. + +"Too late!" muttered Guttorm bitterly, as he looked back; "we are +pursued, and must hold on." + +"Not so," answered one of his chief men; "that is Solve Klofe's ship." + +"Is that so?" cried Guttorm, while the colour mounted to his pale cheek, +and the fire shone in his old eyes; "then have I better luck than I had +looked for. Quick, get to land! The breeze that brings Solve down will +reach us soon. Get out your arms, and go hail Solve as he passes. Ye +shall sail with him to-night. I will hie me out upon the sea." + +He spoke somewhat like his former self for a moment, but soon his voice +sank, for the life-blood was draining fast away. + +Ere many minutes had passed, the breeze freshened into a squall of +considerable force. It came off the land, and swept down the fiord, +lashing its waters into seething waves. Solve answered the hail of +Guttorm's men, and landed. + +"What news?" he asked: "there is but short space for converse." + +The men told him that old Guttorm was dying in his ship. He walked up +the plank that lay from the shore to the gunwale, and found the old +warrior lying on the poop beside the helm, wrapped in his mantle, and +giving directions to his men, who were piling brushwood on the deck. + +"This is an ill sight," said Solve, with much feeling, as he knelt +beside the dying chief, who received him with a smile, and held out his +hand. + +"Ha! Solve, I am glad thou art here. My last battle has been fought, +and it has been a good one, though we did get the tooth-ache. If it had +only been a victory, I had recked little of this wound." + +"Can nothing be done for thee?" asked Solve. "Perchance I may be able +to stop the bleeding." + +Guttorm shook his head, and pointed to the blood which had already +flowed from him, and lay in a deep pool in the sides of the ship. + +"No, no, Solve, my fighting days are over, and, as I have said, the last +fight has been a good one! Ye see what I am about, and understand how +to carry out my will. Go, relieve me of the trouble, and see that it is +done well. I would rest now." + +Solve pressed the hand of his friend in silence, and then went forward +to assist actively in the preparations already referred to. The men +heaped up the funeral pile round the mast, fastened the stern ropes to +the shore, plied the dead upon the deck, and, when all was ready, +hoisted sail. The squall had increased so that the mast bent, and the +ship strained at her stern ropes like an impatient charger. Then the +men went on shore, and Solve, turning to Guttorm, bent over him, and +spoke a few words in a low, earnest tone, but the old man's strength was +almost gone. He could only utter the single word "Farewell", and wave +his hand as if he wished to be left alone. Solve rose at once, and, +applying a light to the pile, leaped ashore. Next moment the cables +were cut; the brushwood crackled with a fierce noise as the fire leaped +up and the "ocean steed" bounded away over the dark blue sea. Guttorm +was still seated by the helm, his face pale as death, but with a placid +smile on his mouth, and a strange, almost unearthly, fire in his eyes. + +The longship rushed over the waves with the foam dashing on her bows, a +long white track in her wake, and a dense black cloud curling overhead. +Suddenly the cloud was rent by a fork of flame, which was as suddenly +quenched, but again it burst upwards, and at last triumphed; shooting up +into the sky with a mighty roar, while below there glowed a fierce fiery +furnace, against which was strongly depicted the form of the grand old +Sea-king, still sitting motionless at the helm. Swiftly the blazing +craft dashed over the waves, getting more and more enveloped in smoke +and flame. Ere long it could be seen in the far distance, a rushing +ball of fire. Gradually it receded, becoming less and less, until at +last it vanished, like a setting star, into the unknown waste of the +great western sea. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR. + +HOPES AND FEARS--THE BURNING OF HALDORSTEDE, AND ESCAPE OF THE FAMILY. + +Meanwhile the family at Haldorstede had made a narrow escape, and some +members of it were still in great peril. When Hilda and Ada were sent +thither, with the females of Ulfstede, under the charge of Christian the +hermit, as already related, they found Dame Herfrida and her maidens +busily engaged in making preparations for a great feast. + +"I prithee," said Dame Astrid, in some surprise, "who are to be thy +guests to-night?" + +"Who should be," replied Herfrida, with a smile, "but the stout fellows +who back my husband in the fight to-day! Among them thine own goodman, +Dame Astrid, and his house-carles; for if no one is left at Ulfstede +there can be no supper there for them; and as the poor lads are likely +to be well worn out, we must have something wherewith to cheer them." + +"But what if ill luck betide us?" suggested Astrid. + +"Ill luck never betides us," replied Herfrida, with an expression of +bland assurance on her handsome face. "Besides, if it does, we shall be +none the worse for having done our part." + +"_Some_ people are always forecasting evil," muttered Ingeborg, with a +sour look, as she kneaded viciously a lump of dough which was destined +to form cakes. + +"And some other people are always forecasting good," retorted Ada, with +a smile, "so that things are pretty well balanced after all. Come now, +Ingeborg, don't be cross, but leave the dough, and let us go to thy +room, for I want to have a little gossip with thee alone." + +Ingeborg was fond of Ada, and particularly fond of a little gossip, +either public or private. She condescended, therefore, to smile, as it +were under protest, and, rubbing the dough from her fingers, accompanied +her friend to her chamber, while the others broke into several groups, +and chatted more or less energetically as they worked, or idled about +the house. + +"Is there any fear of our men losing the day?" asked Hilda of the +hermit, who stood looking out of a window which commanded a view of the +fiord, where the ships of the opposing fleets could be seen engaged in +the battle, that had just begun. + +Poor Hilda asked the question with a look of perplexity in her face; for +hitherto she had been so much accustomed to success attending the +expeditions of her warlike father and friends, that she had never given +much thought to the idea of defeat and its consequences. + +"It is not easy to answer that question," replied the hermit; "for the +success or failure of thy father's host depends on many things with +which I am not acquainted. If the forces on both sides are about equal +in numbers, the chances are in his favour; for he is a mighty man of +valour, as well as his son, and also thy father. Besides, there are +many of his men who are not far behind them in strength and courage; but +they may be greatly outnumbered. If so, defeat is possible. I would +say it is probable, did I not know that the Ruler of events can, if He +will, give victory to the weak and disaster to the strong. Thy father +deems his cause a righteous one--perhaps it is so." + +"Well, then," said Hilda, "will not God, who, you say, is just and good, +give victory to the righteous cause?" + +"He may be pleased to do so; but He does not always do so. For His own +good and wise ends He sometimes permits the righteous to suffer defeat, +and wrongdoers to gain the victory. This only do I know for certain, +that good shall come out of all things to His people, whether these +things be grievous or joyful; for it is written, `All things work +together for good to them that love God, to them that are the called, +according to His purpose.' This is my consolation when I am surrounded +by darkness which I cannot understand, and which seems all against me. +That things often pass my understanding does not surprise me; for it is +written, `His ways are wonderful--past finding out.'" + +"Past finding out indeed!" said Hilda thoughtfully. "Would that I had +faith like thine, Christian; for it seems to enable thee to trust and +rejoice in darkness as well as in sunshine." + +"Thou mayst have it, daughter," answered the hermit earnestly, "if thou +wilt condescend to ask it in the name of Jesus; for it is written, +`Faith is the gift of God;' and again it is written, `Whatsoever ye +shall ask the Father in my name, He will give it you.' One of our chief +sins consists in our desire to produce, by means of our own will, that +faith which God tells us we cannot attain to by striving after, but +which He is willing to bestow as a free gift on those who ask." + +The conversation was interrupted here by the old house-carle Finn the +One-eyed, who said in passing that he was going down to the cliffs to +see and hear what was doing, and would return ere long to report +progress. For an hour after that, the people at Haldorstede continued +to watch the fight with intense interest; but although they could see +the motion of the ships on the fiord, and could hear the shout of war, +as it came floating down on the breeze like a faint murmur, the distance +was too great to permit of their distinguishing the individual +combatants, or observing the progress of the fight. That it was likely +to go ill with their friends, however, was soon made known by Finn, who +returned in hot haste to warn them to prepare for flight. + +"Be sure," said Dame Herfrida, "that there is no need to flee until +Haldor or Erling come to tell us to get ready." + +"That may be so," said Finn; "but if Haldor and Erling should chance to +be slain, ill will it be for you if ye are not ready to fly." + +"Now it seems to me," said Dame Astrid, who was of an anxious +temperament, "that thou art too confident, Herfrida. It would be wise +at all events to get ready." + +"Does anyone know where Alric is?" asked Ingeborg. + +As everyone professed ignorance on this point, his mother said that she +had no doubt he was safe enough; for he was a bold little man, and quite +able to take care of himself. + +"If he has had his own way," observed Ivor the Old, who came in at that +moment, "he is in the fleet for he is a true chip of the old tree; but +we are not like to see him again, methinks, for I have seen the fleet +giving back on the right wing, and hasted hither to tell ye." + +This report had the effect of shaking Herfrida's confidence to the +extent of inducing her to give up her preparations for the feast, and +assist the others in making arrangements for a hasty flight with such +household valuables as could be easily carried about the person. Some +time after they had begun this work, a young man, who was a cripple, and +therefore a non-combatant, hobbled into the hall, and announced the fact +that Haldor's fleet was routed everywhere, and fleeing. He had seen it +from the cliff behind the stede, and indeed it could partly be seen from +the hall window. + +"Now," cried Finn the One-eyed bitterly, "all is lost, and I must carry +out Erling's last instructions. He told me, if the fight went against +us, and the King's men gained the day, I was to lead ye down by the +forest path to the cave behind Ulfstede, where there is a ship big +enough to carry the whole household. If alive, he and his friends are +to meet us there. Come, we must make haste; some of the ships are +already on the beach, and if they be the King's men we shall soon see +them here." + +Everyone was now so thoroughly convinced of their desperate case that +without reply each went to complete arrangements as fast as possible. + +"Wilt thou go with us?" said Finn to the hermit, when all were assembled +in front of the house at the edge of the forest. + +"I will, since God seems to order it so," said the hermit; "but first I +go to my hut for the rolls of the Book. As ye have to pass the bottom +of the cliff on which my dwelling is perched, I will easily overtake +you." + +"Let us go with him," said Hilda to Ada. "There is a roll in the hut +which Erling and I have been trying to copy; Christian may not be able +to find it, as I hid it carefully away--and," she continued, blushing +slightly, "I should not like to lose it." + +"You had better go with _us_," said Finn gravely. + +"We will do what seems best to ourselves," replied Ada; "go on, +Christian, we follow." + +The hermit advised the girls to go with Finn, but as they were +self-willed he was fain to conduct them up the steep and narrow path +that led to his hut upon the cliff, while Finn put himself at the head +of a sad band of women, children, and aged retainers, who could advance +but slowly along the rugged and intricate path which he thought it +necessary to take through the forest. + +Not twenty minutes after they had left Haldorstede the first band of +King Harald's men came rushing up the banks of the river, enraged at +having found Ulfstede deserted, and thirsting for plunder. They ran +tumultuously into the house, sword in hand, and a yell of disappointment +followed when they discovered that the inmates had fled. There is no +doubt that they would have rushed out again and searched the woods, had +not the feast which Herfrida had been preparing proved too attractive. +The cold salmon and huge tankards of ale proved irresistible to the +tired and thirsty warriors, who forthwith put the goblets to their +bearded lips and quaffed the generous fluid so deeply that in a short +time many of them were reeling, and one, who seemed to be more full of +mischief than his fellows, set the house on fire by way of a joke. + +It was the smoke which arose after the perpetration of this wanton act +that had attracted the attention of Haldor and his friends, when they +were making for the shore after the battle. + +Of course the hermit and the two girls heard the shouts of the +marauders, and knew that it was now too late to escape along with the +baud under Finn, for the only practicable path by which they could join +them passed in full view of Haldorstede, and it was so hemmed in by a +precipice that there was no other way of getting into the wood--at least +without the certainty of being seen. Their retreat up the river was +also cut off, for the hermit, in selecting the spot for his dwelling, +had chosen a path which ascended along the rugged face of a precipice, +so that, with a precipice above and another below, it was not possible +to get to the bank of the river without returning on their track. There +was no alternative, therefore, but to ascend to the hut, and there wait +patiently until the shades of night should favour their escape. + +Finn pushed on as fast as was possible with a band in which there were +so many almost helpless ones. He carried one of the youngest children +in his arms, and Ivor the Old brought up the rear with a very old woman +leaning on his arm. They were a long time in descending the valley, for +the route Finn had chosen was circuitous, and the first part of it was +extremely trying to the cripples, running as it did over a somewhat high +spur of the mountain which extended down from the main ridge to the +river. Gradually, however, they drew near to the coast, and Finn was in +the act of encouraging them with the assurance that they had now only a +short way to go, when the hearts of all sank within them at the sight of +a band of armed men who suddenly made their appearance in their path. + +The wail of despair which burst from some of them at sight of these, +was, however, changed into an exclamation of joy when four of the band +ran hastily towards them, and were recognised to be Haldor, Erling, Ulf, +and Glumm! + +"Now thanks be to the gods," said Haldor, stooping to print a kiss on +his wife's lips. "But--but--where are Hilda and Ada?" + +Erling and Glumm, glancing quickly round the group with looks of intense +disappointment and alarm, had already put this question to Finn, who +explained the cause of their absence. + +"Now this is the worst luck of all," cried Glumm, grinding his teeth +together in passion, and looking at Finn with a dark scowl. + +Erling did not speak for a few minutes, but his heaving chest and +dilated nostrils told of the storm that raged within him. + +"Art thou sure they went to the hermit's hut?" asked Ulf in a stern +voice. + +"Quite sure," replied Finn. "I cautioned them not to go, but--" + +"Enough," cried Erling. "Father, wilt thou go back to the cave with the +women, and a few of the men to guard them?" + +"I will, my son, and then will I rejoin thee." + +"That do, an it please thee. It matters little. Death must come sooner +or later to all.--Come, men, we will now teach this tyrant that though +he may conquer our bodies he cannot subdue our spirits. Up! and if we +fail to rescue the girls, everlasting disgrace be to him who leaves this +vale alive!" + +Haldor had already selected a small detachment of men, and turned back +with the women and others, while Erling and his men went on as fast as +they could run. A short time sufficed to bring them to the edge of the +wood near Haldorstede. The old place was now a smoking ruin, with +swarms of men around it, most of whom were busily engaged in trying to +put out the fire, and save as much as possible from its fury. The man +who had kindled it had already paid dearly for his jest with his life. +His body was seen swinging to the limb of a neighbouring tree. Harald +Fairhair himself, having just arrived, was directing operations. + +There were by that time one or two thousand of the King's men on the +ground, while others were arriving every moment in troops--all +bloodstained, and covered with marks of the recent conflict--and Erling +saw at once he had no chance whatever of accomplishing his aim by an +open attack with only fifty men. He therefore led his force silently by +a path that he well knew to an adjacent cliff, over the edge of which +they could see all that went on below, while they were themselves well +concealed. Here the three leaders held a consultation. + +"What dost thou advise, Ulf?" asked Erling. + +"_My_ advice," interposed Glumm fiercely, "is that we should make a +sudden assault without delay, kill the King, and then sell our lives +dearly." + +"And thus," observed Ulf, with something like a sneer, "leave the girls +without protectors, and without a chance of deliverance. No," he +continued, turning to our hero, "my advice is to wait here as patiently +as we can until we ascertain where the girls are. Few, perhaps none, of +our men are known to Harald's men; one of them we can send down to +mingle with the enemy as a spy. Whatever we do must be done cautiously, +for the sake of the girls." + +"That is good advice," said a voice behind them, which was that of the +hermit, who had crept towards them on his hands and knees. + +"Why, Christian, whence comest thou?" said Ulf. + +"From my own hut," replied the hermit, raising himself, "where I have +just left Hilda and Ada safe and well. We had deemed ourselves +prisoners there till night should set us free; but necessity sharpens +the wit even of an old man, and I have discovered a path through the +woods, which, although difficult, may be traversed without much chance +of our being seen, if done carefully. I have just passed along it in +safety, and was on the point of returning to the hut when I came upon +you here." + +"Lead us to them at once," cried Glumm, starting up. + +"Nay," said the hermit, laying his hand on the youth's arm, "restrain +thine ardour. It would be easier to bring the girls hither, than to +lead a band of armed men by that path without their being discovered. +If ye will take the advice of one who was a warrior in his youth, there +is some hope that, God permitting, we may all escape. Ye know the Crow +Cliff? Well, the small boat is lying there. It is well known that men +dare not swim down the rapid, unless they are acquainted with the run of +the water and the formation of the rock. Thy men know it well, the +King's men know it not. With a boat the maidens may descend in safety. +The men can leap into the river and escape before the enemy could come +at them by the hill road." + +"Excellently planned," exclaimed Erling in an eager tone; "but, hermit, +how dost thou propose to fetch the maidens hither?" + +"By going and conducting them. There is much risk, no doubt, but their +case is desperate, for their retreat is certain to be discovered." + +"Away then," said Ulf, "minutes are precious. We will await thee here, +and, at the worst, if they should be captured, we can but die in +attempting their rescue." + +Without uttering another word the hermit rose, re-entered the underwood, +sank down on his hands and knees, and disappeared with a cat-like +quietness that had been worthy of one of the red warriors of America. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE. + +IN WHICH IS DESCRIBED A DESPERATE ATTEMPT AT RESCUE, A BOLD LEAP FOR +FREEDOM, AND A TRIUMPHANT ESCAPE. + +The Crow Cliff, to which Christian had referred, was a high precipitous +rock that jutted out into the river just below Haldorstede. It was the +termination of the high ridge on the face of which Erling had posted his +men, and could be easily reached from the spot where they lay concealed, +as well as from the stede itself, but there was no possibility of +passing down the river in that direction by land, owing to the +precipitous nature of the ground. The ordinary path down the valley, +which elsewhere followed the curvatures of the river, made at this point +a wide detour into the woods, went in a zigzag form up the steep ascent +of the ridge, descended similarly on the other side, and did not rejoin +the river for nearly half a mile below. The waters were so pent up by +the Crow Cliff that they rushed along its base in a furious rapid, +which, a hundred yards down, descended in a perpendicular fall of about +fifteen feet in depth. The descent of this rapid by a boat was quite +possible, for there was a little bay at the lower end of Crow Cliff, +just above the foss, into which it could be steered by a dexterous +rower; but this mode of descent was attended with the imminent risk of +being swept over the fall and dashed to pieces, so that none except the +daring young spirits of the glen ever attempted it, while all the rest +were content to cross the ridge by the longer and more laborious, but +safe, path which we have just described. To descend this rapid by +swimming was one of the feats which the youths of the place delighted to +venture, and often had Erling and Glumm dared it together, while not a +few of their companions had lost their lives in the attempt. + +A few words from Erling gave the men to understand what was expected of +them. It was arranged that while he, Ulf, Glumm, and the hermit should +put the girls into the little boat and guide them down the rapid, the +men were to leap into the water and swim down. All were to land in the +little bay, and then make for the cave on the coast in a body, and fight +their way thither, if need be; but it was believed there would be no +occasion for that, because before the plan was carried out most of the +King's men would probably be assembled above the Crow Cliff at the +stede. A few who could not swim were sent off at once by the track to +warn Haldor. All these well-laid plans, however, were suddenly +frustrated, for, while Erling was still consulting with Ulf and Glumm as +to details, and peeping through the underwood, they beheld a sight which +caused their hearts almost to stand still. + +From the elevated spot where they lay they could see the hermit +advancing rapidly towards them in a crouching attitude, closely followed +by the maidens, while at the same time there advanced from the stede a +large band of men under a chief, who was evidently commissioned to +execute some order of the King. Erling and his friends could clearly +see these two parties unwittingly approaching each other, at right +angles, each making for a point where the two paths crossed, and where +they were certain to meet. They could see their friends quietly but +swiftly gliding towards the very fate they sought to avoid, and +experienced all the agony of being unable to give a shout of warning, or +to prevent the foe from capturing them; for, even if there had been time +to rush upon them before the meeting, which there was not, Erling by so +doing would have been obliged to place the whole of Harald's host +between him and the boat at Crow Cliff. This consideration, however, +would not have deterred him, but another idea had flashed upon his mind. +What that was shall be seen presently. + +Before the two parties met, the ears of the hermit, albeit somewhat +dulled by age, became aware of the tramp of armed men, and at once he +drew the girls hastily aside into the bushes; but the bushes at that +part happened to be not very thick, and part of Ada's dress, which was a +gay one with a good deal of scarlet about it, caught the attention of a +sharp-eyed warrior. The man uttered a shout and sprang towards them; +several others joined in the pursuit, a loud scream from one of the +girls was heard, and next moment the fugitives were captured! + +"Up and at them!" cried Glumm, endeavouring to rise, but he found +himself pinned to the earth by Erling's powerful arms. + +"Stay, Glumm, be quiet, I beseech thee," entreated Erling, as his +comrade struggled violently but fruitlessly to escape from his powerful +embrace.--"Do listen, Ulf; ye will spoil all by inconsiderate haste. I +have a plan: listen--these men are not devils, but Norsemen, and will +not hurt the girls; they will take them before the King. Hear me, and +they shall yet be rescued!" + +While the power of Erling's muscles restrained Glumm, the deep-toned +impassioned earnestness of his voice held back Ulf, who had leaped up +and drawn his sword; but it was with evident reluctance that he paused +and listened. + +"Now hear me," cried Erling; "I and Glumm will go down and mingle with +Harald's men. Our faces are doubtless not known to any of them; +besides, we are so bespattered with the blood and dust of battle that +even friends might fail to recognise us. We will go boldly about among +the men, and keep near to the girls until a fitting opportunity offers, +when we will seize them and bear them off. This will not be so +difficult as ye may think." + +"Difficult!" cried Glumm, grinding his teeth; "I think nothing difficult +except sitting still!" + +"Because," continued Erling, "the King's men will be taken by surprise, +and we shall be through the most of them before they are aware that +there is need to draw their blades. But (and on this everything will +depend) thou must be ready, Ulf, with all the men, to rush, in the +twinkling of an eye, to our aid, the moment my shout is heard, for, if +this be not done, we cannot fail to be overpowered by numbers. If thou +dost but keep them well in play while we make for the boat, and then +follow and leap into the river, we shall all escape." + +"Come along, then," cried Glumm, in desperate impatience. + +"Does the plan like thee, Ulf?" asked Erling. + +"Not much," he replied, shaking his head, "but it is the only chance +left, so get thee gone. I will not fail thee in the moment of need-- +away! See, the girls are already being led before the King." + +Erling and Glumm instantly pulled their helmets well down on their +brows, wrapped their mantles round them so as to conceal their figures +as much as possible, then entered the wood and disappeared. + +Meanwhile, on the open space in front of Haldor's ruined dwelling, King +Harald Haarfager stood surrounded by his court men. He was still +bespattered with the blood and dust of battle, and furiously angry at +the escape of Haldor and the burning of the stede. His gilt helmet +restrained the exuberance of his shaggy locks, and he stood on the top +of a slight elevation or mound, from the base of which his men extended +in a dense ring in front of him, eager to ascertain who it was that had +been so unexpectedly captured. Erling and Glumm mingled with the crowd +unnoticed, for so many of the men assembled there had been collected +from various districts, that, to each, strange faces were the rule +instead of the exception. + +When the girls were led into the ring there was a murmur of admiration, +and many complimentary remarks were made about them. The old hermit was +dragged in after them, and excited a little attention for a few moments. +He had experienced rough handling from his captors. His grey hair was +dishevelled and his face bloodstained, for, although he had offered no +resistance, some of the men who seized him were so much out of humour in +consequence of the burning of the stede and the escape of its inmates, +that they were glad to vent their anger on anyone. + +"Good-looking girls, both of them," remarked the King to Jarl Rongvold, +as they were being led forward.--"Who are ye?" he added, addressing +them. + +Ada looked round on the circle of men with a frightened glance, and cast +down her eyes, but did not reply, while Hilda raised her eyes timidly to +the King's face, but lacked courage to speak. + +"Come," said the King sternly, "let us have no false modesty. Ye are +before Norway's King, therefore speak, and to the point. Who art thou?" + +He addressed himself to Hilda, who replied-- + +"I am Hilda, daughter of Ulf of Romsdal." + +"And thou?" he added, turning to her companion. + +"My name is Ada. My father is Hakon of Drontheim." + +"Ha!" exclaimed the King, with a bitter smile. "Is it so? Thy father +has met his desert, then, for he now lies at the bottom of the fiord." + +Ada turned deadly pale, but made no reply. + +"Know ye where Haldor the Fierce is, and his insolent son Erling?" asked +the King. + +Hilda flushed at this, and answered with some spirit that she did not +know, and that if she did she would not tell. + +"Of course not," said the King; "I might have guessed as much, and do +but waste my time with ye.--Stand aside--bring forward yonder fellow." + +The hermit was immediately led forward. + +"Who art thou?" asked the King. + +"An old wanderer on the face of the earth," replied Christian. + +"That is easily seen," answered the King; "but not too old, it would +seem, to do a little mischief when the chance falls in thy way." + +"Methinks, sire," whispered Jarl Rongvold, "that this fellow is one of +those strange madmen who have taken up with that new religion, which I +do not profess to understand." + +"Sayest thou so?" exclaimed Harald, "then will I test him.--Ho! fetch me +a piece of horse flesh." + +A piece of horse flesh was brought without delay, for some that had been +sacrificed in the Drontheim temple had been packed up and carried off +among other provisions when the expedition set forth. + +"Here, old man, eat thou a portion of that," said Harald, holding the +flesh towards him. + +"I may not eat what has been sacrificed to idols," said the hermit. + +"Ho! ho! then thou art not a worshipper of Odin? Say, dog, what art +thou?" + +"I am a follower of the Lord Jesus Christ. He is my Saviour. To Him I +live, and for Him I can die." + +"Can He save you from _me_?" demanded Harald. + +"He can," answered the hermit earnestly, "and will save you too, King +Harald, from your sins, and all who now hear me, if they will but turn +to Him." + +"Now will I test him," said the King. "Stand forth, Hake of Hadeland, +and hew me the old man's head from his body." + +"Spare him! O spare him!" cried Hilda, throwing herself suddenly +between Hake and his victim, who stood with the resigned air of a man +who had made up his mind to die. "He has twice saved _my_ life, and has +never done you evil in thought or deed." + +"Stand aside, my pretty maid. Nay, then, if thou wilt not, I must grant +thy request; but it is upon one condition: that this Saviour shall +either come himself or send a champion to deliver the old man.--Come," +he added, turning fiercely to the hermit, "pray that thy God shall send +thee a champion now, for if He does not, as I live thou shalt die." + +"I may not pray at thy bidding," said the hermit calmly; "besides, it +needs not that I should, because I have already prayed--before dawn this +morning--that He would grant me His blessing in the form that seemed +best to Himself." + +"And hast thou got it?" + +"I have--in that I possess a quiet spirit, and do not fear to die, now +that His time has come." + +"'Tis something this, I admit," returned the King; "yet methinks 'tis +but a poor blessing, after all, with death as the end of it." + +"Death is not the end of it," said the hermit, with a kindling eye, "for +after death is everlasting joy and glory with the Lord. Besides, King +Harald, which were better, think you: to die with a willing spirit and +bright hope, or to live full of restless ambition, disappointment, and +rage, even although victorious and King of Norway?" + +The King's countenance grew livid with anger as he turned to the berserk +and said, in a voice of suppressed passion--"Go forward, Hake, and slay +him!" + +"Now--the time has come," whispered Erling to Glumm. + +"Get as near to Ada as thou canst; for the rest, may Christian's God be +with us!" + +As he spoke he sprang into the circle, sword in hand, and stood suddenly +between the astonished Hake and the hermit. + +There was a loud murmur of amazement at this unexpected apparition, and +not a few of the spectators were awestricken, supposing that this was +actually a champion sent from the spirit world. + +"Harald," cried Erling, for the berserk had shrunk back dismayed, "I do +now accept the challenge, and come here to champion the old man." + +At the sound of his voice the King's face lighted up with intelligence. + +"Ha!" he exclaimed suddenly; "has the old man's God sent Erling the +Bold?" + +"Truly I think he has," replied Erling; "at all events it was not for +this purpose that I came hither to-day. But now that I have come, and +of mine own free will put myself in thy power, I claim the right to do +battle for my old friend with thy stoutest man--so set him forth, King +Harald." + +"What sayest thou, Hake?" said the King, turning to his berserk with a +smile; "art willing to join issue with the Bold one?--bold enough, +truly, and insolent as well." + +Hake, who had recovered his self-possession the instant he recognised +Erling's voice, and who was by no means wanting in courage, suddenly +uttered one of his terrible roars, and rushed upon Erling like a +thunderbolt. + +Our hero was too well accustomed to the ways of his class to be caught +off his guard. Although Hake rained blows upon him so fast that it was +almost impossible for the spectators to follow the motions of his +flashing sword, Erling received them all on his shield, or parried them +with his short sword--which, as being more manageable in a _melee_, he +had selected for his present enterprise. The instant, however, that the +berserk's furious onset began to slacken, Erling fetched him such a +tremendous cut on the sword that the weapon was broken close off at the +hilt. Disdaining to slay an unarmed foe, he leaped upon the berserk, +and struck him a blow with the hilt of his sword, which drove the casque +down upon his head and stretched him flat upon the sward. + +Without waiting an instant Erling flung down his shield and walked to +the place where Hilda stood, took her by the hand, and whispered, +"Courage! come with me and thou shalt be saved." At the same moment +Glumm stepped to Ada's side, and took her right hand in his left. No +sword was drawn, for Glumm had not drawn his, and no one present had the +faintest idea of what the young men intended to attempt. Indeed, they +were all so amazed at the sudden termination of the fight, that the men +of the inner part of the ring actually stood aside to let them pass, +before the King had time to shout:-- + +"Seize them!" + +In other circumstances, at Harald's word a thousand swords would have +been drawn, and the doom of Erling and his friends at once been sealed; +but the natural ferocity of the tyrant's followers had been spellbound, +and for the time paralysed by the calm bearing of old Christian and the +prowess of his champion, whose opportune appearance had all the effect +of a supernatural interposition, as it might well be deemed: and it will +be readily believed that our hero and Glumm did not fail to use the +advantage thus offered. Leading those whom they had come to rescue, and +closely followed by the hermit, they passed completely through the +circle of men. But at the repetition, in a voice of thunder, of the +royal mandate, some hundreds of the King's men surrounded them, and, +notwithstanding their wondrous strength and skill, they were being +gradually overpowered by numbers, when suddenly a tremendous shout was +heard, and next moment Ulf with his fifty men in battle array rushed out +of the forest. + +King Harald endeavoured hastily to draw up his men in something like +order. Hearing the cry in rear, the men in front of Erling and Glumm +fell aside, so that they quickly cut down those who still stood in their +way, and ran towards their friends, who opened their ranks to let them +pass--then reclosed, and fell upon the King's men with incredible fury. +Although outnumbered by at least twenty to one, the disparity did not at +first tell against them, owing to the confusion in the enemy's ranks, +and the confined space of ground on which they fought. They were thus +enabled to act with great vigour, and, being animated by the spirit of +desperate men, they actually for some time kept driving back the King's +forces. + +But the continual assault of fresh foes began to tell, and several of +Ulf's men had already fallen, when Erling's voice was heard ringing high +above the din of battle. Instantly every man turned on his heel and +fled towards the river madly pursued by the whole of the King's host. + +By this time Erling and Glumm had got the girls into the boat, and +steered them safely down the rapid into the little bay, where they +waited for their companions as patiently as they could. + +Meanwhile Ulf's men reached the foot of the Crow Cliff and one by one +sprang into the boiling rapid. Ulf was among the first there, but he +stayed to see them all pass. Before the last could do so their enemies +were upon them, but Ulf kept them at bay for a few moments; and when the +last of his men took the water he retreated fighting, and leaped +backwards into the flood. One or two of the King's men followed, but +they failed to catch him, were carried down stream, and, being ignorant +of the dangers of the place, were swept over the foss and killed. Most +of the host, however, turned suddenly, and set off at full speed to +cross the ridge and pursue their enemies, by the path to which we have +already referred. Before they had crossed it, Erling and his men were +far on their way down the valley; and when the pursuers reached the +coast there was no sign of the fugitives anywhere. + +On reaching the cave Erling found that his father had got everything in +readiness to start; so, assembling the people together without delay, he +divided them into two bands, one of which he sent into the Swan, the +other into Glumm's vessel, the Crane. + +Haldor also went in the Swan, along with Ulf of Romsdal, Thorer the +Thick, Kettle Flatnose, Alric, and the hermit, besides Dames Herfrida +and Astrid, and the widow Gunhild, Ingeborg, and all Haldor's younger +children. With Glumm there were also several women besides Ada. Ivor +the Old and Finn the One-eyed also went with him; but most of the old +and crippled hangers-on of both families, as well as Glumm's mother, +were taken by Erling into the Swan, as the accommodation there was +better than on board the Crane. + +"Now, Glumm," said Erling, when all were on board, "we must say farewell +to Norway. Keep close in my wake. If they give chase we will do our +best to escape, but if that may not be, we will fight and fall +together." The friends shook hands; then, each getting into his ship, +the stern ropes were cast off, the oars were dipped, and they shot out +upon the blue fiord, which the sinking sun had left in a solemn subdued +light, although his beams still glowed brightly on the snow-clad +mountain peaks. + +They had proceeded some distance down the fiord before their pursuers +observed them. Then a mighty shout told that they were discovered; and +the grinding of the heavy ships' keels was distinctly heard upon the +shore, as they were pushed off into deep water. Immediately after, the +splash of hundreds of oars warned them to make haste. + +"Pull, my lads,--pull with heart," cried Erling; "and let these slaves +see how freemen can make their ocean steeds leap across the sea! Pull! +I see a breeze just off the mouth of the fiord. If we reach that, we +may laugh at the tyrant King." + +"What may yonder line on the water be?" said Haldor, with an anxious +look, as he pointed towards the mouth of the fiord. + +Erling caught his breath, and the blood rushed to his temples as he +gazed for a moment in silence. + +"'Tis a boom," cried Kettle, who had recovered by this time, and who now +leaped towards the fore deck with terrible energy. + +"All is lost!" exclaimed Ulf, in a tone of bitterness which words cannot +express. + +"Are ye sure it is a boom?" cried Erling quickly. Everyone looked with +intense earnestness at the black line that stretched completely across +the mouth of the fiord, and each gave it as his opinion that it was a +boom. There could not indeed be any doubt on the point. King Harald's +berserk, although somewhat tardy, had fulfilled his orders but too well; +and now a succession of huge logs, or tree trunks, joined together by +thick iron chains, completely barred their progress seaward. + +"Surely we can burst through," suggested Kettle, returning to the poop, +his huge frame quivering with contending emotions. + +"Impossible," said Haldor; "I have tried it before, and failed. Of +course we must make the attempt, but I have no hope except in this," he +added, touching his sword, "and not much in that either, _now_." + +"But I have tried it before, and did not fail, and I'll try it again," +cried Erling heartily. "Come aft, men, quick, all of ye; every man +except the rowers. Women, children, and cripples, get ye into the +waist. The stoutest men to the oars--jump!" + +These orders were obeyed at once. All the best men in the ship seized +the oars, Erling himself, Kettle, and Haldor setting the example, while +Thorer took the helm, and, hailing Glumm, bade him do as they did. + +The effect of this was that the stern of the Swan was so weighed down +with the weight of people on the poop, that her bows and a third of her +keel were raised high out of the water, while the men, straining with +every fibre of their muscles at the oars, sent her careering forward +with trebled speed, and the foam rolled in milky billows in her wake. + +"When I give the word `Forward,'" cried Erling, "leap like lightning, +all of ye, to the fore deck." + +The pursuers, elated by this time with the certainty of success, pulled +also with unwonted energy. + +When the Swan came within about twenty yards of the boom, which floated +almost on a level with the water, Thorer gave the word-- + +"One stroke for freedom!" + +"Ho! ho!" shouted Erling and Haldor, straining until their oars cracked +again. The foam hissed from the blades, and the Swan rushed as if she +had been suddenly endued with true vitality. + +Next moment she stuck fast--with the boom amidships beneath her! + +"Forward!" shouted Erling. + +All the unengaged men sprang instantly to the forecastle, and their +weight sank it slowly down, but it seemed inclined for a moment to +remain balanced on the boom. Hereupon the men at the oars jumped up and +also ran forward. The bow dipped at once, the good ship slid over with +a plunge, and glided out upon the sea! + +A great shout or yell told that this had been noticed by their foes, who +still rowed madly after them; but heedless of this, Erling backed water +and waited for Glumm, who had made similar preparations, and was now +close on the boom. His vessel went fairly on, and stuck halfway, as the +other had done; but when she was balanced and about to turn over, there +was a terrible rending sound in the hull, then a crash, and the Crane +broke in two, throwing half of her crew into the sea on the inner side +of the boom, and the other half outside. + +Well was it for them all then that the Swan had waited! She was at once +backed towards the scene of disaster, and as many as possible were +picked up. Among the rescued was Glumm, with Ada in his arms. But many +were drowned, and a few stuck to the boom, refusing to let go, or to +make any attempt to reach the Swan. + +Erling knew, however, that these were sure to be picked up by the King's +ships, so he once more ordered the rowers to give way, and the vessel +sprang forth on her voyage some time before the pursuers reached the +boom. When these did so, most of them attempted to leap it as the +fugitives had done--for none of the Norsemen there lacked spirit. Some, +however, failed to get on to it at all, others got on a short way and +stuck fast, while two or three ships broke their backs, as Glumm's had +done, and threw their crews into the water--but not one got over. + +The men then leaped on the boom, and the sound of axes was heard as they +laboured to cut it through, or to dash away its iron fastenings. It +was, however, a thoroughly well-executed piece of work, and for a long +time resisted their utmost efforts. When at length it did give way, and +the King's ships passed through, the Swan was beyond pursuit--far away +on the horizon, with all sail set, and running before a stiff breeze, +while the shades of evening were closing in around her! + +That night there was silence in the Norsemen's little ship as she +ploughed her adventurous course over the northern sea, for the thoughts +of all were very sad at being thus rudely driven from their native land +to seek a home where best they might in the wide world. Yet in the +hearts of some of them there was also much happiness. + +Hilda's sanguine mind pictured many sweet and peaceful abodes, far from +the haunts of warlike men. Alric was happy, because he was beginning, +as he fondly hoped, a life of wild adventure. So was Kettle Flatnose, +for he was now sailing westward, and he knew that Ireland was somewhere +in that direction. But Glumm the Gruff was perhaps the happiest of all +on board, for, besides the delight of having at last got possession of +his bride, he enjoyed, for the first time in his life, the pleasure of +comforting a woman in distress! + +Ada's wild spirit was--we dare not say eradicated, but--thoroughly +subdued at last. When she thought of her father she laid her head on +Glumm's broad chest and wept bitterly. + +Thus did those Sea-kings sail away from and forsake the land of Norway. +On their voyage westward they fell in with many ships from other +quarters containing countrymen, Sea-kings and vikings like themselves, +who had also left their native land to seek new homes in Shetland, +Orkney, and the other isles north of Scotland, rather than submit to the +yoke of Harald Haarfager. + +They joined company with these, and all sailed westward together. + +Among them was a man named Frode, who was celebrated for daring and +wisdom, especially for his knowledge of the stars, and his power of +navigating the unknown ocean of the west. To this man was assigned the +direction of the fleet, and all submitted to his guidance; but the +Sea-kings invariably assembled together in council when it was intended +to decide, what they should do or to what part of the world they should +steer. + +"My advice is," said Kettle Flatnose, the first time they assembled thus +in council, "that we steer first to Ireland, where I can promise ye all +a hearty welcome, for it is well known that the Irish are a hospitable +people, and my father is a great man there." + +"I fall in with that," said Glumm, glancing at Ada, whose eyes had now +become his guiding stars! + +"The advice is good," said Erling, "for, wherever we may finally come to +an anchor, we will be none the worse of getting some provisions on the +way." + +As Haldor, Ulf, Frode, and all the rest were of one mind on this point, +the ships were steered to Ireland; and when they reached that country +they put ashore in a small bay not far from Dublin, where was a log hut. +To this Kettle went up with Erling and Glumm, and asked the man of the +house how things were going on in Ireland. + +"As ill as can be in this district," said the man; "there is nothing but +vengeance in the hearts of the people." + +"That is a bad state," said Kettle, with a look of anxiety; "what may be +the cause of discontent? Is the old King hard on ye?" + +"Thou must have been long away to ask that. The old King is dead," said +the man. + +At this Kettle uttered a great and bitter cry; but, restraining himself, +asked eagerly if the old Queen were alive. The man replied that she +was. Then Kettle asked how the King met his death. + +With a dark frown the man replied that Haabrok the Black had murdered +him and seized the throne. On hearing this Kettle became pale, but was +very calm, and listened attentively while the man went on to say that +Haabrok was such a tyrant that the whole district was ready to start up +as one man and dethrone him, if they had only someone who was fit to +lead them. + +"That they shall not long want for," said Kettle. + +After some more earnest conversation he turned away, and went down to +the shore. + +"Now, Erling and Glumm," said he, "we must do a little fighting before I +can offer ye the hospitality I spoke of. Will ye aid me in a venture I +have in my mind?" + +"That will we," they replied heartily. + +Kettle thereupon explained his views, and said that he had learned from +the man that his wife was still alive and well, but in the hands of the +king of the district, who was a regicide and a tyrant. It was then +arranged that the Swan should be rowed quietly up towards the town, and +the men landed in the night at a spot where they could be ready to +answer the summons of Kettle, Erling, Glumm, and Ulf, who were to go up +unattended to the King's house in Dublin, with no other arms than their +short swords. + +On drawing near, these four found the hall of the King's house +brilliantly lighted, for great festivities were going on there. No one +interfered with them, because none guessed that so small a party would +dare to go up half-armed for any other than peaceful purposes. They +therefore went through the streets unmolested, and easily passed the +guards, because Kettle plied them with a good deal of that which has +since come to be known by the name of "blarney." + +When they got into the hall, Kettle went straight up to the high seat or +throne on which Haabrok the Black was seated. + +"Ye are presumptuous knaves," said the tyrant, eyeing the strangers +sternly; "is it thus that ye have been taught to approach the King? +What is your errand?" + +"For the matter of that, thou well-named villain," said Kettle, "our +errand will but add to our presumption, for we have come to slay thee." + +With that Kettle whipped out his sword and cut off Haabrok's head, so +that it went rolling over the floor, while the body fell back and +spouted blood all over the horrified court men! + +Instantly every man drew his sword; but Erling, Ulf, and Glumm leaped on +the low platform of the throne, and presented such a bold front, that +the bravest men there hesitated to attack them. At the same moment +Kettle raised his sword and shouted, "If there be yet a true man in this +hall who loves his country and reveres the memory of the good old King +whom this dead dog slew, let him come hither. It is the voice of the +King's son that calls!" + +"Sure, 'tis Kettle; I'd know his red head anywhere!" exclaimed a +shrivelled old woman near the throne. + +"Aye, nurse, it is Kettle himself--come back again," he said, glancing +towards the old woman with a kindly smile. + +A ringing cheer burst from the crowd and filled the hall; again and +again it rose, as nearly all the men present rushed round the throne and +waved their swords frantically over their heads, or strove to shake +hands with the son of their old King. In the midst of the tumult a wild +shriek was heard; and the crowd, opening up, allowed a beautiful +dark-eyed woman to rush towards Kettle, with a stalwart boy of about +five years of age clinging to her skirts. + +We need scarcely pause to say who these were, nor who the handsome +matron was who afterwards went and clung round Kettle's neck, and heaped +fervent blessings on the head of her long-lost son. It is sufficient to +say that the feast of that night was not interrupted; that, on the +contrary, it was prolonged into the morning, and extended into every +loyal home in the city; and that Kettle Flatnose entertained his Norse +friends right royally for several days, after which he sent them away +laden with gifts and benedictions. They did not quit Ireland, however, +until they had seen him happily and securely seated on the throne of +Dublin. + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +Sailing northward, the fleet touched at the Orkney and Shetland Islands, +where they found that a number of the expatriated Sea-kings had +comfortably settled themselves. Here some of Haldor's people would fain +have remained, but Frode, who was a man of enterprise, resolved to +penetrate farther into the great unknown sea, to lands which rumour said +did certainly exist there. Accordingly they left Shetland, and went on +until they came to the Faroe Islands. Here they thought of settling, +but on landing they found that a few of the Sea-kings had taken up their +abode there before them. + +"Now," said Frode, "it is my great desire to break new ground. Shall we +go and search farther to the west for that new island which has been +lately discovered by Ingoll?" + +To this Haldor and Ulf said they were agreed. Hilda plucked Erling by +the sleeve, and whispered in his ear, after which he said that he too +was agreed. Glumm glanced at Ada, who, with a little blush and smile, +nodded. A nod was as good as a word to Glumm, so he also said he was +agreed, and as no one else made objection, the ships' prows were again +turned towards the setting sun. + +North-westward they sailed over the world of waters, until they came one +fine morning in sight of land. As they drew near they saw that it was +very beautiful, consisting partly of snow-capped mountains, with green +fertile valleys here and there, and streams flowing through them. They +ran the vessels into a bay and landed, and the country looked so +peaceful, and withal so desirable, that it was at once resolved they +should make this place their abode. Accordingly, while most of the men +set themselves to work to land the goods, put up the tents, and make the +women and children comfortable, a select band, well armed, prepared to +go on an expedition into the country, to ascertain whether or not it was +inhabited. Before these set out, however, Christian the hermit stood up +on a rising ground, and, raising his eyes and hands to heaven, prayed +for God's blessing on their enterprise. + +Thereafter plots of land were marked out, houses were built, "Things" +were held, a regular government was established, and the island--for +such it proved to be--was regularly taken possession of. + +The exploring party found that this was indeed the island which they +were in search of. It had been discovered about the middle of the ninth +century, and a settlement had been made on it by Ingoll in the year 874; +but the band of immigrants under Frode and Haldor was by far the most +important that had landed on it up to that time. + +In this manner, and under these circumstances, was Iceland colonised by +expatriated Norsemen about the beginning of the tenth century! + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +Good reader, our tale is told. Gladly would we follow, step by step, +the subsequent career of Erling and Glumm, for the lives of such men, +from first to last, are always fraught with interest and instruction; +but this may not be. We have brought them, with the other chief actors +in this little tale, to a happy point in their adventurous career, and +there we feel that we ought to leave them in peace. Yet we would fain +touch on one or two prominent points in their subsequent history before +bidding them a final farewell. + +Let it be recorded, then, that many years after the date of the closing +scene of our tale, there might have been seen in Iceland, at the head of +a small bay, two pretty cottages, from the doors of which there was a +magnificent view of as sweet a valley as ever filled the eye or +gladdened the heart of man, with a distant glimpse of the great ocean +beyond. On the sward before these cottages was assembled a large party +of young men and maidens, the latter of whom were conspicuous for the +sparkle of their blue eyes and the silky gloss of their fair hair, while +the former were notable because of the great size and handsome +proportions of their figures; some, however, of the men and maidens were +dark and ruddy. The youths were engaged in putting the stone and +throwing the hammer; the maidens looked on with interest--as maidens +were wont to do on manly pastimes in days of old, and as they are not +unwilling to do occasionally, even in modern times. Around these romped +a host of children of all ages, sizes, and shades. + +These were the descendants of Erling the Bold and Glumm the Gruff. The +two families had, as it were, fused into one grand compound, which was +quite natural, for their natures were diverse yet sympathetic; besides, +Glumm was dark, Erling fair; and it is well known that black and white +always go hand in hand, producing that sweet-toned grey, which Nature +would seem to cherish with a love quite as powerful as the abhorrence +with which she is supposed to regard a vacuum. + +Beside each other, leaning against a tree, and admiring the prowess of +the young men, stood Erling and Glumm, old, it is true, and past the +time when men delight to exercise their muscles, but straight and +stalwart, and still noble specimens of manhood. The most interesting +group, however, was to be seen seated on a rustic bench near the door. +There, sometimes conversing gravely with a silver-haired old man at his +side, or stooping with a quiet smile to caress the head of a child that +had rushed from its playmates for a little to be fondled by the "old +one"--sat Haldor the Fierce, with Christian the hermit on one side, and +Ulf of Romsdal on the other. Their heads were pure white, and their +frames somewhat bent, but health still mantled on the sunburnt cheeks, +and sparkled in the eyes of the old Norse Sea-kings. + +Within the house might have been seen two exceedingly handsome matrons-- +such as one may see in Norway at the present time--who called each other +Hilda and Ada, and who vied with a younger Hilda and Ada in their +attentions upon two frail but cheery old women whom they called "Granny +Heff" and "Granny Ast". How very unlike--and yet how like--were these +to the Herfrida and Astrid of former days! + +Between the old dames there sat on a low stool a man of gigantic +proportions, who had scarcely reached middle age, and who was still +overflowing with the fun and fire of youth. He employed himself in +alternately fondling and "chaffing" the two old women, and he was such +an exact counterpart of what Erling the Bold was at the age of thirty, +that his own mother was constantly getting confused, and had to be +reminded that he was _Alric_, and not Erling! + +Alric's wife, a daughter of Glumm, was with the young people on the +lawn, and his six riotous children were among the chief tormentors of +old Haldor. + +Ingeborg was there too, sharp as ever, but not quite so sour. She was +not a spinster. There were few spinsters in those days! She had +married a man of the neighbouring valley, whom she loved to distraction, +and whom she led the life of a dog! But it was her nature to be +cross-grained. She could not help it, and the poor man appeared to grow +fonder of her the more she worried him! + +As for Ivor the Old and Finn the One-eyed, they, with most of their +contemporaries, had long been gathered to their fathers, and their bones +reposed on the grassy slopes of Laxriverdale. + +As for the other personages of our tale, we have only space to remark +that King Harald Haarfager succeeded in his wish to obtain the undivided +sovereignty of Norway, but he failed to perpetuate the change; for the +kingdom was, after his death, redivided amongst his sons. The last +heard of Hake the berserk was, that he had been seen in the midst of a +great battle to have both his legs cut off at one sweep, and that he +died fighting on his stumps! Jarl Rongvold was burnt by King Harald's +sons, but his stout son, Rolf Ganger, left his native land, and +conquered Normandy, whence his celebrated descendant, William the +Conqueror, came across the Channel and conquered England. + +Yes, there is perhaps more of Norse blood in your veins than you wot of, +reader, whether you be English or Scotch; for those sturdy sea rovers +invaded our lands from north, south, east, and west many a time in days +gone by, and held it in possession for centuries at a time, leaving a +lasting and beneficial impress on our customs and characters. We have +good reason to regard their memory with respect and gratitude, despite +their faults and sins, for much of what is good and true in our laws and +social customs, much manly and vigorous in the British Constitution, of +our intense love of freedom and fairplay, are pith, pluck, enterprise, +and sense of justice that dwelt in the breasts of the rugged old +Sea-kings of Norway! + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Erling the Bold, by R.M. Ballantyne + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ERLING THE BOLD *** + +***** This file should be named 21730.txt or 21730.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/7/3/21730/ + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |